Powerpact™ M-, P-And R-Frame, and Compact™ Ns630B-Ns3200 Circuit Breakers

PowerPact™ M-, P- and R-Frame,
and Compact™ NS630b–NS3200

Circuit Breakers
Catalog
0612CT0101 R01/17
2017
Class 0216
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Energy Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Electronic Trip Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
PowerPact M-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
PowerPact P-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
PowerPact R-Frame Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Compact NS630b–NS1600 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Compact NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
P-Frame Cradles and Cradle Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Accessory Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
™
PowerPact™ M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact™ NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers
7: GENERAL INFORMATION 7
22: ENERGY MANAGEMENT 22
39: ELECTRONIC TRIP SYSTEMS 39
69: POWERPACT M-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 69
72: POWERPACT P-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 72
83: POWERPACT R-FRAME CIRCUIT BREAKERS 83
92: COMPACT NS630B–NS1600 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 92
97: COMPACT NS1600B–NS3200 CIRCUIT BREAKER 97
99: ACCESSORIES 99
119: P-FRAME CRADLES AND CRADLE ACCESSORIES 119
126: CIRCUIT BREAKER DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 126
164: ACCESSORY DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 164
171: TRIP CURVES 171
185: CATALOG NUMBERS 185
2
01/2017 © 2001–2017 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
™
SECTION 1: GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 7

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Features and Benefits ..................................................................................................................... 7
Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 8
Codes and Standards ...................................................................................................................... 8
Circuit Breaker Ratings ................................................................................................................... 9
Enclosure Sizes ............................................................................................................................. 11
Operating Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 11
Trip System ................................................................................................................................... 12
Motor Circuit Protectors ................................................................................................................. 13
Automatic Molded Case Switches ................................................................................................. 13
Internal Operating Mechanism ...................................................................................................... 14
Push-to-Trip Button ....................................................................................................................... 14
Circuit Breaker Mounting and Connections ................................................................................... 14
Catalog Numbering System .......................................................................................................... 16
Testing Requirements ................................................................................................................... 20
SECTION 2: ENERGY MANAGEMENT .......................................................................... 22

Energy Management Using the Smart System ............................................................................. 22
On-Site Real-Time Monitoring and Control ........................................................................ 23
On-Line Energy Management Services ............................................................................. 23
Smart System Communication Components ................................................................................ 24
FDM121 ............................................................................................................................. 24
FDM128 ............................................................................................................................. 24
Power Meter Functions ................................................................................................................. 25
Display Function ............................................................................................................................ 25
FDM121 Display Unit (One to One) ................................................................................... 25
FDM128 Display Unit (One to Eight).................................................................................. 25
Measurement Function .................................................................................................................. 26
Histories ........................................................................................................................................ 28
Maintenance Indicators ................................................................................................................. 28
Management of Installed Devices ................................................................................................. 29
FDM121 Display ............................................................................................................................ 30
Main Menu ......................................................................................................................... 32
Fast Access to Essential Information ................................................................................. 33
Access to Detailed Information .......................................................................................... 33
FDM128 Display ............................................................................................................................ 34
Main Menu ......................................................................................................................... 35
Fast Access to Essential Information ................................................................................. 36
Access to Detailed Information .......................................................................................... 36
SECTION 3: ELECTRONIC TRIP SYSTEMS ................................................................. 39

Type ET Electronic Trip System .................................................................................................... 39
Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Systems ............................................................................................ 40
Protection Settings ............................................................................................................. 44
Ammeter Measurements.................................................................................................... 44
Communication Network .................................................................................................... 44
Protection Settings ............................................................................................................. 46
Maintenance Record .......................................................................................................... 46
Load Shedding and Reconnection Parameters ................................................................. 46
Indication Option Via Programmable Contacts .................................................................. 47
Real-Time Metering ........................................................................................................... 49
Demand Metering .............................................................................................................. 49
Metering ............................................................................................................................. 50
Waveform Capture ............................................................................................................. 50
3
© 2001–2017 Schneider Electric ™ 01/2017
All Rights Reserved
Customized Alarm Programming ....................................................................................... 51

Event Logs ......................................................................................................................... 51
Additional Characteristics for Type P and H Trip Units ...................................................... 51
Long-Time Trip Functions .................................................................................................. 52
Short-Time Trip Functions.................................................................................................. 52
Instantaneous Trip Function............................................................................................... 52
Ground-Fault Trip Functions .............................................................................................. 53
Smart System Communication Wiring System ..............................................................................54
Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 55
Number of Devices............................................................................................................. 55
Length of Bus ..................................................................................................................... 55
Bus Power Source.............................................................................................................. 55
COM Option in PowerPact and Compact Circuit Breakers ............................................................56
IFE Ethernet Interface ...................................................................................................................58
Introduction......................................................................................................................... 58
IFE Interface....................................................................................................................... 58
IFE Interface + Gateway .................................................................................................... 58
IFE Interface, IFE Interface + Gateway Features............................................................... 58
IFM Modbus Communication Interface ..........................................................................................61
ULP Port............................................................................................................................. 61
Modbus Slave Port ............................................................................................................. 61
I/O Application Module ..................................................................................................................64
Electrical Asset Manager Configuration Engineering Tool (Ecoreach™) ......................................67
SECTION 4: POWERPACT M-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......... 69

Performance ..................................................................................................................................69
Interrupting Ratings .......................................................................................................................70
Termination Information .................................................................................................................70
Accessories ...................................................................................................................................70
Control Wiring ................................................................................................................................71
SECTION 5: POWERPACT P-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ........... 72

Performance ..................................................................................................................................72
Catalog Numbers ...........................................................................................................................73
Continuous Current Rating ............................................................................................................77
Automatic Molded Case Switches .................................................................................................78
Motor Circuit Protectors .................................................................................................................79
Electrically-Operated Circuit Breakers ...........................................................................................80
Control Wiring ................................................................................................................................80
SECTION 6: POWERPACT R-FRAME CIRCUIT BREAKERS ...................................... 83

Performance ..................................................................................................................................83
Catalog Numbers ...........................................................................................................................84
Automatic Molded Case Switches .................................................................................................89
Continuous Current Rating ............................................................................................................90
Control Wiring ................................................................................................................................90
SECTION 7: COMPACT NS630B–NS1600 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................... 92

Performance ..................................................................................................................................92
Catalog Numbers ...........................................................................................................................94
4
01/2017 ™ © 2001–2017 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
Interrupting Ratings ....................................................................................................................... 96

Electrically-Operated Circuit Breakers .......................................................................................... 96
Termination Information ................................................................................................................ 96
Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 96
Control Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 96
SECTION 8: COMPACT NS1600B–NS3200 CIRCUIT BREAKER ................................ 97

Performance .................................................................................................................................. 97
Termination Information ................................................................................................................ 97
Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 97
Control Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 98
Catalog Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 98
SECTION 9: ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................... 99

Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 99
Electrical Accessories ................................................................................................................. 101
Auxiliary Switch (OF): ...................................................................................................... 103
Alarm Switch (SD)............................................................................................................ 103
Overcurrent Trip Switch (SDE) ........................................................................................ 103
Micrologic Trip Unit Accessories ................................................................................................. 106
Test Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 112
Circuit Breaker Terminations ....................................................................................................... 113
External Accessories ................................................................................................................... 116
Locking Accessories .................................................................................................................... 117
Sub-Feed Lugs ............................................................................................................................ 118
SECTION 10: P-FRAME CRADLES AND CRADLE ACCESSORIES ........................... 119

Circuit Breaker and Cradle Design .............................................................................................. 119
Cradle Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 120
Cradle Locking and Interlocking .................................................................................................. 121
Open Door Racking Interlock ...................................................................................................... 121
Miscellaneous Accessories ......................................................................................................... 121
Wiring Diagrams .......................................................................................................................... 122
SECTION 11: CIRCUIT BREAKER DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ................................. 126

Dimensions for M-Frame Circuit Breakers .................................................................................. 126
Dimensions for P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Circuit Breakers ............................................... 129
Dimensions for R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers ............................................. 153
SECTION 12: ACCESSORY DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ............................................ 164

Accessory Dimensions ................................................................................................................ 164
SECTION 13: TRIP CURVES .......................................................................................... 171
SECTION 14: CATALOG NUMBERS ............................................................................. 185
5
© 2001–2017 Schneider Electric ™ 01/2017
All Rights Reserved
6
01/2017 ™ © 2001–2017 Schneider Electric
All Rights Reserved
Section 1—General Information
Introduction
PowerPact™ M-, P-, and R-frame and Compact™ NS630b–NS3200 electronic trip molded case circuit
breakers are designed to protect electrical systems from damage caused by overloads, short circuits,
and ground faults. All circuit breakers are designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means
and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent. Electronic trip molded case circuit
breakers use an electronic trip system to signal the circuit breaker to open automatically.
The PowerPact M-frame (800 A frame size), P-frame (1200 A frame size) and R-frame (3000 A frame
size) circuit breakers are dual rated to UL489 and IEC 60947-2. The Compact NS630b–NS1600 (1600 A
frame size) and NS1600b–NS3200 (3200 A frame) circuit breakers are rated to IEC 60947-2 only.
M-frame molded case circuit breakers are equipped with a basic ET1.0 electronic trip system, which has
a fixed long-time (overload) setting and an adjustable instantaneous (short-circuit) trip setting. P-frame,
R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 molded case circuit breakers are available with either a basic ET 1.0I
electronic trip system or with a more advanced Micrologic™ trip system. Electronic trip motor circuit
protectors (trip system ET 1.0M), which trip on short circuit only, and automatic molded case switches,
which trip at a predetermined self-protection level only, are also available for special applications. All of
these circuit breakers are available labeled as Square D™ or Schneider Electric™ (formerly Merlin
Gerin™, Federal Pioneer™, or Federal Pacific™).
For information on other Square D brand PowerPact molded case circuit breakers, see the Class 611
catalog: PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers.
Features and Benefits
M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 electronic trip circuit breakers:

• Provide overload and short-circuit protection
• Are true RMS sensing devices
• Provide means to manually disconnect power to the circuit
• Provide enhanced coordination by their adjustability
• Provide high interrupting ratings and withstand ratings
Circuit breakers with Micrologic trip units can also:
• Provide integral equipment ground-fault protection or alarm
• Provide communications
• Provide power monitoring
• Provide protective relaying functions
• Provide zone-selective interlocking (ZSI), which can reduce damage in the event of a fault
7
© 2001–2017 Schneider Electric 01/2017
All Rights Reserved
™
Specifications
Electronic trip molded case circuit breakers have a molded case made of a glass-reinforced insulating
material (thermal set composite resin) that provides high dielectric strength. These circuit breakers:
• Are available in either dual-rated Underwriters Laboratory® (UL®) / International Electrotechnical
Commission® (IEC®) or IEC-only constructions
• Are also Canadian Standard Association® (CSA®) and Association of the Electrical Sector®
(ANCE®) certified (dual-rated UL/IEC circuit breakers only)
• Are manufactured in unit-mount, I-Line™ and drawout (P-frame and NS630b–NS1600) constructions
• Are available with either type ET or Micrologic electronic tripping systems
• Provide optional power monitoring, communications, protective relaying, integral ground-fault
protection for equipment and zone-selective interlocking functions
• Share common tripping of all poles
• Can be mounted and operated in any position1
• Are equipped with an externally-accessible test port for use with hand-held and full-function test sets
• Are available in motor circuit protector and automatic molded case switch constructions
• Can be reverse connected, without restrictive LINE and LOAD markings
• Meet the requirements of National Electrical Code® (NEC®) Sections 240.6 by providing a means
to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments
Codes and Standards
M-, P- and R-frame, and NS630b–NS3200 electronic trip circuit breakers and switches are
manufactured and tested in accordance with the following standards:
Table 1: Standards
M-Frame, P-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 NS630b–NS3200

P- and R-Frame Switches
R-Frame Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Switches
UL 4891 UL 4892
IEC Standard 60947-2 IEC Standard 60947-3
IEC Standard 60947-2 IEC Standard 60947-3
CSA C22.2 No 5 CSA C22.2 No 5
Federal Specification Federal Specification
Federal Specification Federal Specification
W-C-375B/GEN W-C-375B/GEN
W-C-375B/GEN W-C-375B/GEN
NEMA AB1 NEMA AB1
NEMA AB1 NEMA AB1
UTE, VDE, BS, CEI, UNE UTE, VDE, BS, CEI, UNE
NMX J-266 NMX J-266
UTE, VDE, BS, CEI, UNE, CCC UTE, VDE, BS, CEI, UNE
1 PowerPact M-frame circuit breaker is in UL File E10027.
PowerPact P-frame circuit breaker is in UL File E63335.
PowerPact R-frame circuit breaker is in UL FIle E10027.
2 PowerPact P-frame switch is in UL File E103740.
PowerPact R-frame switch is in UL FIle E33117.
Circuit breakers should be applied according to guidelines detailed in the NEC and other local
wiring codes.
1 Compact NW circuit breakers are not available with I-Line terminations. (They cannot be mounted horizontally, only vertically.)
8
All Rights Reserved
™
Circuit Breaker Ratings
Interrupting Rating
The interrupting rating is the highest current at rated voltage the circuit breaker is designed to safely
interrupt under standard test conditions. Circuit breakers must be selected with interrupting ratings equal
to or greater than the available short-circuit current at the point where the circuit breaker is applied to the
system (unless it is a branch device in a series rated combination). Interrupting ratings are shown on the
front of the circuit breaker. For grounded B phase interrupting ratings, see Data Bulletin 2700DB0202.
Table 2: UL/IEC Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings
UL/CSA Rating (50/60 Hz) IEC 60947-2 Rating (50/60 Hz)
Grounded
Circuit
3 Phase B Phase 240 Vac 380/415 Vac
Breaker1
(1Ø-3Ø)
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 240 Vac 2P Icu Ics Icu Ics
MG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 65 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
MJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
PG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 65 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
PJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
PK 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 65 kA 50 kA 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA
PL 125 kA 100 kA 25 kA 65 kA 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA
RG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
RJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 100 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
RK 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 85 kA 65 kA 70 kA 55 kA
RL 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 125 kA 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA
1 The K interrupting rating is recommended for applications having high inrush and/or non-linear loads such as large motors,
transformers, motors with soft starts, etc.
Table 3: IEC Only Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings (50/60 Hz)
220/240 Vac 380/415 Vac 440 Vac 500/525 Vac 660/690 Vac
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Rating
Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
Electrically Operated
NS630b–NS1600 N Interrupting Rating 50 kA 37 kA 50 kA 37 kA 50 kA 37 kA 40 kA 30 kA 30 kA 22 kA
NS630b–NS1600 H Interrupting Rating 70 kA 35 kA 70 kA 35 kA 65 kA 32 kA 50 kA 25 kA 42 kA 21 kA
NS630b–NS1000 L Interrupting Rating 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 130 kA 130 kA 100 kA 100 kA — —
Manually Operated
NS630b–NS1600 H Interrupting Rating 85 kA 52 kA 70 kA 52 kA 65 kA 48 kA 50 kA 37 kA 42 kA 31 kA
NS630b–NS1000 L Interrupting Rating 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 130 kA 130 kA 100 kA 100 kA — —
NS630b–NS800 R Interrupting Rating 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA 100 kA 75 kA 75 kA
NS1600b–NS3200 H Interrupting Rating 125 kA 94 kA 85 kA 64 kA 85 kA 64 kA — — — —
9
All Rights Reserved
™
Application Ratings
The voltage rating is the highest voltage for the electrical system on which the circuit breaker can be
applied. The frequency rating indicates the system frequency for which the circuit breaker is intended.
The withstand rating is used to improve system coordination by maximizing the current level at which
the circuit breaker trips with no intentional delay. The withstand rating is the level of RMS symmetrical
current that a circuit breaker can carry in a closed position for a stated period of time.
Table 4: Voltage, Frequency and Withstand Ratings
Voltage Withstand Rating at

Circuit Breaker Frequency Rating
Rating 480 Vac1
MG, MJ 600 Vac 50/60 Hz (UL and IEC) 10 kA (0.5 sec)
PG, PK 600 Vac 50/60 Hz (UL and IEC) 25 kA (0.5 sec)
PJ 600 Vac 50/60 Hz (UL and IEC) 10 kA (0.5 sec)
PL 480 Vac 50/60 Hz (UL and IEC) 10 kA (0.5 sec)
R-frame (RG, RJ, RK, RL) 600 Vac 50/60 Hz (UL and IEC) 32 kA (3 sec)
NS630b–NS1600 N Interrupting Rating 690 Vac 50/60 Hz (IEC) 19.2 kA (1 sec)
NS630b–NS1600 H Interrupting Rating 690 Vac 50/60 Hz (IEC) 19.2 kA (1 sec)
NS630b–NS1000 L Interrupting Rating 690 Vac 50/60 Hz (IEC) N/A
NS630b–NS1000 R Interrupting Rating 690 Vac 50/60 Hz (IEC) N/A
NS1600b–NS3200 N Interrupting Rating 690 Vac 50/60 Hz (IEC) 32 kA (3 sec)
NS1600b–NS3200 H Interrupting Rating 440 Vac 50/60 Hz (IEC) 32 kA (3 sec)
1 A system coordination study should be done for optimum circuit breaker coordination.
Ampere Rating (Continuous Current Rating)
The ampere rating (or continuous current rating) (Ir) is the maximum current that a circuit breaker can
carry. The sensor size (In) is the maximum ampere rating for a specific circuit breaker and is based on
the size of the sensor plug inside the circuit breaker. This value is printed below the trip unit on the
sensor plug. See Sensor Plugs (page 108) for more information.
NOTE: The maximum ampere rating a circuit breaker family can carry is called the frame size. Sensor
size is less than or equal to frame size.
The ampere rating of a type ET electronic trip circuit breaker is equal to the current sensor size (In).
The ampere rating of a Micrologic™ electronic trip circuit breaker is determined by the mathematical
equation:
Ampere Rating = Sensor Size x Rating Plug Setting (Ir = In x Rating Plug Setting)
The rating plug varies the circuit breaker ampere rating as a function of its sensor size. Rating plugs
have nine dial settings; the multiplier values corresponding with each setting are printed on the rating
plug. The maximum setting range is 0.4–1.0 x In.
10
All Rights Reserved
™
Enclosure Sizes
All type ET electronic trip UL/IEC M-frame, P-frame and R-frame circuit breakers are available as
standard rated circuit breakers. Micrologic electronic trip UL/IEC circuit breakers are also available in
100% rated constructions. Because the additional heat generated when applying circuit breakers at
100% of continuous current rating, the use of specially designed enclosures and 194° F (90°C) rated
wire sized per the 167° F (75°C) NEC chart is required.
Circuit breakers with 100% rating can also be used in applications requiring only 80% continuous loading.
Table 5: Minimum Enclosure Sizes for Fixed-Mounted Circuit Breakers
Enclosure Dimensions (h x w x d) Ventilation Area

Circuit Breaker Rating
3P Circuit Breaker 4P Circuit Breaker Top Bottom
51.9 x 20.25 x 7.75 in. 51.9 x 23.01 x 7.75 in.
M-Frame, ≤ 800 A, Standard Rated — — — —
(1318.3 x 514.4 x 196.9) mm (1318.3 x 584.4 x 196.9 mm)
P-Frame, ≤ 800 A, 100% Rated 51.9 x 20.25 x 7.75 in. 51.9 x 23.01 x 7.75 in.
— — — —
P-Frame, ≤ 1200 A, Standard Rated (1318.3 x 514.4 x 196.9 mm) (1318.3 x 584.4 x 196.9 mm)
62.25 x 23 x 14.75 in. 62.25 x 25.76 x 14.75 in.
P-Frame, ≤ 1200 A, 100% Rated 16.5 in. 10,645 mm 16.5 in. 10,645 mm
(1581.2 x 584.2 x 374.7 mm) (1581.2 x 654.2 x 374.7 mm)
30 x 21 x 7 in. 30 x 25.5 x 7
R-Frame, Standard Rated1 — — — —
(762 x 533 x 178 mm) (762 x 648 x 178 mm)
30 x 21 x 7 in. 30 x 25.5 x 7 in.
R-Frame, 100% Rated1 40.25 in. 26,000 mm 40.25 in. 26,000 mm
(762 x 533 x 178 mm) (762 x 648 x 178 mm)
1 RLTB or RL3TB kits may extend beyond end of enclosure when using minimum enclosure size.
Operating Conditions
Temperature
To meet the requirements of the UL489 Standard, molded case circuit breakers are designed, built and
calibrated for use on 50/60 Hz ac systems in a 40°C (104°F) ambient environment. Electronic trip
circuit breakers, however, are designed to react only to the magnitude of the current flowing through
the circuit breaker and are inherently ambient insensitive. Both UL/IEC and IEC-only circuit breakers
may be operated at temperatures between -25°C and +70°C (-13°F and 158°F). For temperatures
other than 40°C (104°F), the circuit breakers must be re-rated as shown.
Table 6: Temperature Re-rating Values
Maximum Ambient Temperature

°F 158 140 122 104 86 77 68 50 32 14 -4 -13 -22
°C 70 60 50 40 30 25 20 10 0 -10 -20 -25 -30
Current 0.75 0.83 0.92 1.00 1.07 1.11 1.14 1.21 1.27 1.33 1.39 1.42 1.44
Altitude
Circuit breakers are suitable for use at altitudes up to 13,100 ft. (4000 m). For altitudes higher than
6560 ft. (2000 m), circuit breakers must be derated as shown.
Table 7: Altitude Derating Values Per ANSI C37.20.1 Table 10
d6,600 ft. 8,500 ft. 13,000 ft.

Altitude
(d2,000 m) (2,600 m) (3,900 m)
Voltage 1.00 0.95 0.80
Current 1.00 0.99 0.96
11
All Rights Reserved
™
Extreme Atmospheric Conditions
PowerPact circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests defined below for extreme atmospheric
conditions.
Dry cold and dry heat:
• IEC 68-2-1—Dry cold at -67°F (-55°C)
• IEC 68-2-2—Dry heat at 185°F (+85°C)
Damp heat (tropicalization)
• IEC 68-2-30—Damp heat (temperature 131°F (55°C) and relative humidity of 95%, condensing)
• IEC 68-2-52 level 2—Salt mist
The materials used in the PowerPact circuit breakers will not support the growth of fungus and mold.
Vibration
PowerPact circuit breakers meet IEC 60068-2-6 Standards for vibration.

• 2 to 13.2 Hz and amplitude 0.039 in. (1 mm)
• 13.2 to 100 Hz constant acceleration
Storage Temperature
Circuit breakers with trip units without LCD displays may be stored in the original packaging at
temperatures between -58°F (-50°C) and 185°F (85°C). For circuit breakers with trip units with LCD
displays, this range is -40°F (-40°C) to 185°F (85°C).
Trip System
ET .0I Micrologic 6.0A The trip system causes the circuit breaker to open automatically under overload, short-circuit or
equipment ground-fault conditions. Electronic trip circuit breakers give the customer more versatility to
t I n
MA
tsd tr
Isd
Ii Ir
Ig
tg
s
A achieve coordination with features such as adjustable instantaneous pickup and high withstand ratings.
The type ET and the Micrologic trip systems consist of current sensors, a microprocessor-based trip
00
unit, and a tripping coil. The tripping coil is a flux transfer solenoid that requires no external power
40
source. All type ET and Micrologic protective functions are completely fault powered.
menu
Ii
4
instantaneous
6 8 10
12
Ir
.5
.6
long time
.63
.7
.8
tr
(s) 4
2
8
12
16
alarm Micrologic Trip System
3 15 .45 .9 1 20
2 off .4 1 .5 24
In x In 6 Ir
setting
short instantaneous
Isd tsd Ii
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10
.3 .2
Features found in Micrologic™ electronic trip circuit breakers, such as universally interchangeable
2.5 6 4 12
2 8 .2 . 3 15
1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off
Ir on I t off In
test setting delay
test
Ig tg
.4 .4 .3
rating plugs, adjustable long-time pickups and 100% ratings also provide capacity for future growth.
E (s)
D F
C G .3 .2
H .2 .
A .1 2 0
on I t off
ground fault
ET Micrologic
The integral equipment ground-fault sensing capabilities available with Micrologic trip systems mean
Electronic Electronic that there are fewer parts and pieces to purchase, mount and wire. These capabilities include integral
Trip Unit Trip Unit ground-fault protection for equipment, which causes the circuit breaker to trip when a ground fault is
detected, as well as integral ground-fault alarm, which does not trip the circuit breaker but sends an
alarm when a ground fault is detected.
Certain Micrologic trip systems also offer the customer true power management system solutions through
communication. These trip units can communicate with other circuit breakers in the system and also with a
power monitoring system. Communication is by Modbus® and does not require proprietary software.
Communication between trip units allows zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) between circuit breakers at
different levels in the system. ZSI reduces fault stress by allowing the upstream circuit breaker closest to the
fault to ignore its preset delay time and trip without any intentional delay on a short circuit or ground fault.
For more information on ZSI, see data bulletin Reducing Fault Stress with Zone-Selective Interlocking.
12
All Rights Reserved
™
Communication with a power monitoring system through a communications network allows a ground
fault to be reported without interrupting power to the system. It also allows the power monitoring
system to remotely report power usage, current flow, and trip history.
Instantaneous OFF Feature
Micrologic™ 5.0 and 6.0 Standard, A, P, and H electronic trip units provide the unique ability to turn the
instantaneous tripping function OFF. Turning off the instantaneous trip function increases the current
level at which the circuit breaker will trip with no intentional delay to the level of the short-time
withstand rating. This current level is typically much higher than any of the pickup levels provided by
the adjustable instantaneous feature. Therefore, using the instantaneous OFF feature improves
coordination by allowing the user to take advantage of the circuit breaker withstand rating.
Motor Circuit Protectors
An instantaneous trip version of the electronic trip circuit breaker is also available for motor circuit
protection. These motor circuit protectors comply with NEC requirements for providing short-circuit
protection when installed as part of a Listed combination controller having motor overload protection.
Electronic trip motor circuit protectors are similar in construction to type ET electronic trip circuit
breakers.They are designed as disconnect devices for use in combination with motor starters. These
motor circuit protectors provide short-circuit protection only and have an adjustable amperage pickup
so they can be set to open instantaneously at current values slightly above the motor starting inrush
current. This setting coordinates the pickup time-current response of the motor circuit protector with
the overload relay of the motor starter to give the best possible protection.
Current interrupting ratings for these UL Recognized components are established in combination with
motor starters and properly-sized overload relays and contactors.
Automatic Molded Case Switches
P- and R-frame circuit breakers are also available in automatic molded case switch construction.
Automatic switches are similar in construction to electronic trip circuit breakers, except that the
switches open instantaneously at a factory-set non-adjustable trip point calibrated to protect only the
molded case switch itself. Because of their molded case construction, they are more compact than
conventional disconnect switches and accept electrical accessories for added flexibility.
Molded case switches are intended for use as disconnect devices only. UL489 requires molded case
switches to be protected by a circuit breaker or fuse of equivalent rating. Molded case switches are
labeled with their appropriate withstand ratings. The withstand rating of a switch is defined as the
maximum current at rated voltage that the molded case switch will withstand without damage when
protected by a circuit breaker with an equal continuous current rating.
Table 8: P- and R-Frame Withstand Ratings1

Withstand Rating
Voltage P-Frame Circuit Breakers R-Frame Circuit Breakers
J K L J K L
240 Vac 100 kA 65 kA 125 kA — 65 kA 125 kA
480 Vac 65 kA 50 kA 100 kA — 50 kA 100 kA
600 Vac 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA — 50 kA 50 kA
1 The withstand rating is the fault current at rated voltage that the molded case switch will withstand without damage when protected
by a circuit breaker with an equal continuous current rating.
13
All Rights Reserved
™
Internal Operating Mechanism
Manually-Operated Circuit Breakers
M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 manually-operated circuit breakers have a single
operating handle that acts directly through the operating mechanism against the contact blades. Multi-
pole circuit breakers have a common trip bar for positive action of all poles on manual and automatic
operation. These circuit breakers have a trip-free mechanism that allows them to trip even though the
operating handle may be restricted (by a handle operating mechanism or padlock attachment) in the
I/ON position. If not restricted, the operating handle moves to a position between I/ON and O/OFF
when the circuit breaker is tripped.
The face of the manually-operated circuit breaker is marked with standard ON/OFF and international
I/O markings to indicate handle position. In addition, the O/OFF portion of the circuit breaker handle is
color coded green.
Electrically-Operated Circuit Breakers
P-frame and NS630b–NS1600 circuit breakers are also available with a two-step stored-energy
mechanism which can be charged manually or using a motor. The closing time is less than five cycles.
Closing and opening operations can be initiated by remote control or by push buttons on the front cover.
An O-C-O (open-close-open) cycle is possible without recharging. Electrically-operated circuit breakers
include a motor, shunt trip, and shunt close of the same voltage plus an overcurrent trip switch (SDE).
The face of electrically-operated circuit breakers is also marked ON/OFF and I/O, and equipped with a
position indicator to show contact position.
Push-to-Trip Button
The push-to-trip button located on the face of each manually-operated circuit breaker is a standard
feature on these circuit breakers. This allows the user to manually trip the circuit breaker without
risking exposure to live parts. During normal on-off operation, the handle opens and closes the circuit
breaker contact but does not exercise the tripping mechanism.
Use the push-to-trip button to:
• Exercise the circuit breaker mechanism
• Check the auxiliary and alarm switch circuits
Circuit Breaker Mounting and Connections
Table 9: Circuit Breaker Mounting and Connections
Unit-Mount Construction I-Line Drawout

Circuit Breaker
Cable Connection Bus Connection Construction Construction
M-Frame X X X —
P-Frame X X X X
R-Frame X1 X X2 —
NS630b–NS1250 X X — X
NS1600–NS3200 — X — —
1 Must use RLTB or RL3TB terminal pad kit.
2 Through 1200 A 100% rated only.
14
All Rights Reserved
™
Unit-Mount Circuit Breakers
Unit-mount M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 circuit breakers are individually-mounted
using supplied mounting screws. The four mounting screws are inserted through mounting holes
molded into the circuit breaker case and threaded into the circuit breaker mounting enclosure. To
properly support the circuit breaker, all four mounting screws must be used.
Unit-mount M-frame, P-frame and NS630b–NS1250 circuit breakers can be ordered with mechanical line
and load side lugs. The standard lugs can be removed for the installation of compression-type lugs or
bus connections. All lugs are UL Listed for their proper application and marked for use with aluminum
and copper (Al/Cu) or copper only (Cu) conductors. Lugs suitable for copper and aluminum conductors
are made of tin-plated aluminum. Lugs suitable for use with copper conductors only are made of copper.
See individual frame sections for frame-specific connection information.
M-Frame Unit-Mount Electrically Operated

P-Frame Unit-Mount R-Frame Unit-Mount
P-Frame Unit-Mount
I-Line Circuit Breakers
M-frame circuit breakers through 800 A and P-frame and R-frame circuit breakers through 1200 A are
available in I-Line construction for easy installation and removal in I-Line panelboards and
switchboards. I-Line circuit breakers use “blow-on” type line side connectors. In case of a short circuit,
increased magnetic flux causes the plug-on connectors of the circuit breaker to tighten their grasp on
the panelboard or switchboard bus bars. The I-Line connectors and circuit breaker mounting bracket
are integral parts of I-Line circuit breakers and cannot be removed or replaced. I-Line circuit breakers
come with mechanical load side lugs.
M-Frame I-Line P-Frame I-Line R-Frame I-Line
Drawout Circuit Breakers
P-frame manually-operated circuit breakers and switches are also available in drawout construction.
The drawout assembly mechanism allows the circuit breaker to be racked in four positions (connected,
test, disconnect or withdrawn).
P-frame cradles are ordered separately and are available with factory and field-installed accessories.
See Section 10—P-Frame Cradles and Cradle Accessories for details.
P-Frame Drawout
15
All Rights Reserved
™
Catalog Numbering System
The M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 circuit breakers and cradles follow a “smart”
catalog numbering system. The following tables are intended as a tool to decipher existing catalog
numbers. They are not intended for use in building catalog numbers, as some combinations
may not be available. To build a catalog number, please see the Digest, the Product Selector or
contact the local field office.
M-Frame, P-Frame and R-Frame Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers
NOTE: Not all options are available on all frames.
Table 10: Catalog Number for M-, P- and R-Frame (UL/IEC Dual-Rated) Circuit Breakers
Field Position Field Description Options Description

(blank) Square D
1 Brand Name
N Schneider Electric (Formerly Merlin Gerin brand)
M 800 A Max.
2 Circuit Breaker Frame P 1200 A Max.
R 3000 A Max.
G 35 kA @ 480 Vac
J 65 kA @ 480 Vac
3 Interrupting Rating P-Frame: 50 kA @ 600 Vac
K
R-Frame: 65 kA @ 600 Vac
L 100 kA @ 480 Vac
F No Lugs
L Lugs on Both Ends
M Lugs on I/ON End
4 Connection
P Lugs on O/OFF End
A I-Line
D Drawout (Not Available on M and R Frames)
2 2P
5 Poles 3 3P
4 4P
4 480 V
6 Voltage Rating
6 600 V
### Circuit Breaker Rating (120 = 1200 A)
7–9 Ampere Rating
000 Automatic Switch Value
(none) Standard Rated
10 Standard or 100% Rated
C 100% rated
Continued on next page
16
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 10: Catalog Number for M-, P- and R-Frame (UL/IEC Dual-Rated) Circuit Breakers

(none) ET1.0 (M-Frame)
(none) ET1.0I (P-Frame, R-Frame)
U31 Micrologic™ 3.0 Trip Unit
U33 Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit
U41 Micrologic 3.0A Trip Unit
Circuit Breaker Trip System U43 Micrologic 5.0A Trip Unit
U63 Micrologic 5.0P Trip Unit
U73 Micrologic 5.0H Trip Unit
11–14
S60 600 A2
S80 800 A2
S10 1000 A2
S12 1200 A
Automatic Switch Trip System1
S16 1600 A
S20 2000 A
S25 2500 A
S30 3000 A
M68 1200–10000 A2
Motor Circuit Protector Trip
M69 1500–10000 A2
System
M70 1800–10000 A2
15 Rating Plug A–H See Table 80
16-17 Modbus® Communication E1 Modbus BCM
18 I-Line™ Phasing See Digest, Product Selector
For Factory-Installed Accessories, See Product Selector
1 For more information on P-frame switches, see page 78. For more information on R-frame switches, see page 89.
2 Not available on R-frame.
17
All Rights Reserved
™
NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers
Table 11: Catalog Number for NS630b–NS3200 (IEC-Rated) Circuit Breakers

(Blank) Square D
1 Brand Name
N Schneider Electric
R 3200 A Max.
2 Circuit Breaker Frame
P 1600 A Max.
N Standard Interrupting Rating
H High Interrupting Rating
3 Interrupting Rating
L Current Limiting
R1 200 kA Interrupting
F No lugs
L Lugs on Both Ends
M Lugs on I/ON End
4 Connection
P Lugs on O/OFF End
D Drawout
S Rear Connected
5 Certification E IEC
3 3P
6 Poles
4 4P
4 440 Vac
7 Voltage Rating
6 690 Vac
### Circuit Breaker Rating (120 = 1200 A)
8–10 Ampere Rating
000 Switch Value
U32 Micrologic™ 2.0 Trip Unit
U33 Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit
11–14 Circuit Breaker Trip System U44 Micrologic 6.0A Trip Unit
Z63 630 A
Z80 800 A
Non-Automatic Switch Trip
Z10 1000 A
System
Z12 1250 A
Z16 1600 A
15 Rating Plug R–T See Table 79
16–17 Modbus® Communications E1 Modbus BCM
For Accessories, See Product Selector
1 R interruption only valid with rear-connected (S) termination.
18
All Rights Reserved
™
Cradle Catalog Numbers
P-frame and NS630b–NS1600 manually-operated circuit breakers and switches are available in
drawout construction (factory installed only). The circuit breakers may be ordered using the circuit
breaker catalog numbering systems described above. The cradles must be ordered separately.
Table 12: Cradle Catalog Number

1 Cradle C Cradle
S P-Frame 3P
2 Frame Size
D P-Frame 4P
L Square D Brand UL/IEC Dual-Rated
3 Brand/Certification
G Schneider Electric IEC Rated Only
4 Circuit Breaker Interruption Rating E P-Frame “G”,“J”, “K”, or “L” Interrupting Rating
V Rear-Connected T Vertical (RCTV)
5 Cradle Connections Top Terminals H Rear-Connected T horizontal (RCTH)
E Front-Connected Flat (FCF)
V Rear-Connected T Vertical (RCTV)
6 Cradle Connections Bottom Terminals H Rear-Connected T Horizontal (RCTH)
E Front-Connected Flat (FCF)
9 None (Standard for P-Frame Circuit Breakers)
7 Shutters and Associated Options
3 Shutters with Padlocking Provision
8 Circuit Breaker Mismatch and Cradle Interlock A See Product Selector
9 Metering CT X Not Applicable on P-Frame Cradle
10 Cradle Secondary Disconnects Wiring X See Product Selector
11–18 Miscellaneous Cradle Options X See Product Selector
19
All Rights Reserved
™
Testing Requirements
UL, NEMA, CSA, and NMX requirements
The UL, NEMA, CSA and NMX labels on a circuit breaker indicate that the circuit breaker meets the
requirements of UL Standard 489, NEMA Standard AB-1, CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5 and NMX standard
J266. The labels also mean that the production procedure is monitored by UL, CSA and ANCE inspectors
to ensure continued compliance to these standards. These requirements include the following tests:
• 200% Overload Calibration—each pole of the circuit breaker must trip within a specified time limit
when carrying 200% of its continuous current rating.
• 135% Overload Calibration—with all poles connected in series, the circuit breaker must trip within a
specified time limit while carrying 135% of its continuous current rating.
• Overload—the circuit breaker must make and break 600% of its continuous current rating at rated
voltage. Circuit breaker frame sizes 125–1600 A must perform 50 operations at 600%. Circuit
breaker frame sizes 2000–2500 A must perform 25 operations at 600%.
• Temperature Rise—while carrying 100% of rated current and mounted in open air, temperature
rise on a wiring terminal must be within specified limits. For 100% rating, the circuit breaker is
mounted in an enclosure.
• Endurance—UL489 requires that the circuit breaker must complete, at minimum, the following
number of operations:
Table 13: Endurance Operations
Operations
Frame Size
With Current 1 Without Current
1200–2500 500 2000
1 UL requires the circuit breaker to operate 10% of the “with current” operations with a shunt trip.
• Calibration—both the 200% and 135% overload calibration tests are repeated after endurance
testing.
• Short Circuit—the circuit breaker shall be subjected to test currents based on voltage rating and
frame size, with the type and number of operations based on the number of poles, frame rating and
voltage rating. Example: a 3P, 600 Vac, 2500 A frame circuit breaker is subjected to one 20 kA
single-phase closing of the circuit on the circuit breaker per pole and one 30 kA three-phase closing
of the circuit on the circuit breaker for a total of seven short circuit tests.
• Trip Out—the 200% thermal calibration test is repeated following the short-circuit tests.
• Dielectric—the circuit breaker must withstand, for one minute, twice its rated voltage plus 1000 V:
— Between line and load terminals with the circuit breaker in the open, tripped and OFF positions.
— Between terminals of opposite polarity with the circuit breaker closed.
— Between live parts and the overall enclosure with the circuit breaker both open and closed.
No conditioning of the circuit breaker can take place during or between tests. There can be no failure of
functional parts at the conclusion of the sequences.
After qualifying a set of circuit breakers to the standard tests, a manufacturer can have additional
circuit breaker samples tested on higher than standard available fault currents. The following
performance requirements apply:
• Short-Circuit Test—with the load side terminals connected by 10-inch lengths of specified cable (or
a shorting bar), the circuit breaker is exposed to a short-circuit current for a set time interval. After
safe interruption, the circuit breaker is reset and closed again on the short circuit.
20
All Rights Reserved
™
• Dielectric Withstand—the circuit breaker is subjected to twice the voltage rating at which the
interrupting test was conducted, but not less than 900 V.
— Between line and load terminals with the circuit breaker in the tripped and in the OFF positions.
— Between terminals of opposite polarity with the circuit breaker closed.
— Between live parts and the overall enclosure with the circuit breaker both open and closed.
When the sample circuit breakers pass these tests, circuit breakers of the same construction can be
marked or labeled with the current interrupting rating for the higher fault currents.
IEC Requirements
The IEC markings on a circuit breaker indicates that the circuit breaker meets the requirements of IEC
Standard 60947-2 for circuit breakers and 60947-3 for automatic switches. These requirements
include the following tests:
Table 14: IEC Test Sequence
Sequence Category of Devices Tests

• Tripping Limits and Characteristics
• Dielectric Properties
General
• Mechanical and Electrical Endurance
Performance
All Circuit Breakers • Overload
Characteristics
• Dielectric Voltage Withstand
(Sequence 1)
• Temperature Rise
• 145% Calibration (3 Poles in Series or 3-Phase Test)
• Rated service short circuit breaking capacity (O-t-CO-t-CO)
Rated Service
• Electrical Endurance (5% of with Current Operations of
Short-circuit
Sequence 1)
Breaking Capacity All Circuit Breakers
(Ics)
(Sequence 2)
• 145% Calibration (3 poles in series or 3-phase test)
Rated Ultimate
• 200% Calibration (Each Pole Separately)
Short-circuit Circuit Breakers of Utilization Category A • Rated Ultimate Short Circuit Breaking Capacity (O-t-CO)
Breaking Capacity
Circuit Breakers of Utilization Category B • Dielectric Voltage Withstand
(Icu)
(Sequence 3)
• Rated Short-Time Withstand Current
Rated Short-time
Withstand Current
Circuit Breakers of Utilization Category B • Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity at Maximum Short-Time
(Icw)
Withstand Current (O-t-CO)
(Sequence 4)
• Rated Short-Time Withstand Current Icw
Circuit Breakers of Utilization Category B:
• Rated Service Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity at Ics
Combined When Icw = Ics Replaces Sequences 2 and 4 (O-CO-CO) at Maximum Relay Temp.
Sequence • 145% Calibration (3 Poles in Series or 3-Phase Test)
When Icw = Ics = Icu Replaces Sequences
2, 3 and 4 • Dielectric Voltage Withstand
Individual Pole
• Individual Pole Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity
Short-Circuit Test
Circuit Breakers for Use in IT Systems • Dielectric Voltage Withstand
Sequence
(Annex H)
21
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 2—Energy Management
Energy Management Using the Smart System
Use the Smart System to connect your building to real savings in three steps:
A. Measure
Embedded and stand-alone metering and control
B. Connect
— Integrated communication interfaces
— Ready to connect to energy management platforms
C. Save
— Data-driven energy efficiency actions
— Real-time monitoring and control
— Access to energy and site information through on-line services
CLOUD
22
All Rights Reserved
™
Measure
Smart System communications mean visible information.

Grouping most of the electrical protection, command and metering components, the switchboards
are now significant sources of data locally displayed and sent via communication networks.
Connect
Smart Systems use reliable, simple-to-install-and-use displays, and Ethernet and Modbus
interfaces.
Information is safely transmitted through the most efficient networks:
— Modbus SL inside switchboards, between components,
— Ethernet, on cable or WiFi, inside the building and connecting switchboards and computers,
— Ethernet or GPRS, for access to on-line services by Schneider Electric.
Energy experts, no matter where they are located, can now provide advise based on the updated
data of the building.
Save
CLOUD
On-Site Real-Time Monitoring and Control
The FDM128 touch screen display connected to

the Ethernet:
• shows essential electrical information and On-Line Energy Management Services
alarms concerning the electrical network,
StruXureWare Energy Operation automates data
• allows control (open, close, reset…) of collection using an open, scalable, and secure
various equipment. energy management information system.
The FDM128 touch screen provides real-time With the help of the Schneider Electric energy
value checking and control, directly on the front management services team, data is turned into
panel of the main switchboard. information to enable customers to understand
On a PC display with common browser: their facilities’ performance on an ongoing basis.
• shows monitoring web pages hosted into the Energy Operation leverages companies’ current
local Ethernet interface, investments in their existing systems, and can be
used to communicate advanced results and
• alarm events generate automatic email
performance to a broad audience for a shared
notifications,
understanding throughout an organization.
• allows control (open, close, reset…) of
various equipment.
The data is displayed graphically or recorded into
files for optimizing the use of energy in the building.
As an example, the data can help validate the
change of temperature settings, time scheduling
in a Building Management System or other
automated devices.
23
All Rights Reserved
™
Smart System Communication Components

PowerPact and Compact Circuit Breakers with Micrologic Trip Units
Ammeter A
• 2.0 basic protection (IEC)
• 3.0 basic protection (UL)
• 5.0 selective protection
• 6.0 selective + ground-fault protection
Power Meter P
Harmonic Meter H
See page 40 for more information.
Displays
FDM121
• One-to-one front display module

• See page 25 for more information
Power Meter
FDM128
• One-to-eight front display module

• See page 25 for more information
Operating Assistance
Functions
Communication
• PowerPact and Compact circuit breakers in a communication network

• I/O application module
• IFE: Ethernet interface module
• IFM: Modbus interface module
• Com’X 200: Energy server
Communication
IFE Module IFM Module Com’X 200

I/O Module
24
All Rights Reserved
™
See page 54 for more information.
Power Meter Functions
In addition to protection functions, Micrologic A/P/H trip units offer all the functions of Power Meter
products as well as operating assistance for the circuit breaker.
Micrologic A/P/H trip unit measurement functions are made possible by the Micrologic trip unit’s
intelligence and the accuracy of the sensors. They are handled by a microprocessor that operates
independent of protection functions.
Display Function
FDM121 Display Unit (One to One)

Display Function
The FDM121 switchboard display unit can be connected to a communication (COM) option (Breaker
Communication Module [BCM ULP]) using a circuit breaker ULP cord to display all measurements on a
screen. The LCD screen is 3.78 x 3.78 in. (96 x 96 mm). The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 Vdc
power supply. The COM option (BCM ULP) unit is supplied by the same power supply via the circuit
breaker ULP cord connecting it to the FDM121. See page 30 for more information.
Main Menu I V 4/7 PQS E

I1 310 A I2 315 A
Quick view
402 V % 100 120 P 64 kW Ep 14397 kWh
U1
Metering
Q 38 kVar Eq 8325 kVarh
% % 398 V % 100 120
Control I3 302 A IN 23 A U2 S 51 kVA Es 13035 kVAh
Alarms 401 V % 100 120
U3
Services % %
ESC OK ESC ESC ESC ESC
FDM121 Display FDM121 Display FDM121 Display: FDM121 Display: FDM121 Display:
Navigation Current Voltage Power Consumption
FDM128 Display Unit (One to Eight)
The FDM128 display unit uses an IFE Ethernet interface for low-voltage circuit breakers.
20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05
S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1
Quick view Quick view I U-V PQS E Quick view I U-V PQS E
Open Auto Quick view I U-V PQS E Quick view I U-V PQS E
I Current VL L
VL-L
Measures Measures Measures PQS E cumul
Measures Measures Reset
Alarm history Alarm history

I1 431 A Alarm history
V12 406 V Ptot 127 kW EpIn 165 kWh
Alarm history
I2 385 A V23 415 V Qtot 13 kVAr
Alarm history
EpOut 45 kWh
Control Control Control
I3 426 A V31 409 V Control
Stot 129 kVA Control
Maintenance Ir 000 A I1 000 A Maintenance IN 2 A Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
ESC 1/7 ESC 1/10 ESC 1/10 ESC 1/12 ESC 1/3
FDM128 Display FDM128 Display FDM128 Display: FDM128 Display: FDM128 Display:
Navigation Current Voltage Power Consumption
For all FDM, in addition to the information displayed on the Micrologic trip unit LCD, the FDM screen
shows demand, power quality, and maximum/minimum ammeter values along with histories and
maintenance indicators.
25
All Rights Reserved
™
Measurement Function
Instantaneous RMS Measurements

Measurement Function
The Micrologic trip unit continuously displays the RMS value of the highest current of the three phases
and neutral (Imax). The navigation buttons can be used to scroll through the main measurements.
In the event of a fault trip, the trip cause is displayed.
The Micrologic A trip unit measures phase, neutral, and ground fault currents.
Micrologic P/H trip units offer voltage, power, power factor, frequency, and cos φ in addition to the
measurements provided by Micrologic A trip units.
Maximum / Minimum Ammeter
Every instantaneous measurement provided by Micrologic A trip units can be associated with a
maximum/minimum ammeter. The maximum for the highest current of the three phases, neutral, and
demand current can be reset using the FDM display unit or the communication system.
Energy Metering
The Micrologic P/H trip units also measures the energy consumed since the last reset of the meter.
The active energy meter can be reset using the Micrologic trip unit keypad, the FDM display unit, or the
communication system.
Demand and Maximum Demand Values
Micrologic P/H trip units also calculate demand current and power values. These calculations can be
made using a block or sliding interval that can be set from five to sixty minutes in steps of one minute.
The window can be synchronised with a signal sent through the communication system. Whatever the
calculation method, the calculated values can be recovered on a PC through the communication
network.
Ordinary spreadsheet software can be used to provide trend curves and forecasts based on this data.
They provide a basis for load shedding and reconnection operations used to adjust consumption to the
subscribed power.
Power Quality
The Micrologic H trip unit calculates power quality indicators taking into account the presence of
harmonics up to the fifteenth harmonic, including the total harmonic distortion (THD) of current and
voltage.
26
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 15: Micrologic A/P/H Trip Units Integrated Power Meter Functions
Display
Micrologic A/P/H Integrated Power Meter Functions Type Micrologi FDM
c LCD Display
Display of protection settings
Pick-ups (A) and delays All settings can be displayed Ir, tr, Isd, tsd, Ii, Ig, tg A/P/H X —
Measurements
Instantaneous rms measurements
Phases and neutral IA, IB, IC, IN A/P/H X X
Average of phases Iavg = (IA + IB + IC) / 3 A/P/H — X
Currents (A) Highest current of the 3 phases and neutral Imax of IA, IB, IC, IN A/P/H X X
Ground fault (Micrologic 6) % Ig (pick-up setting) A/P/H X X
Current unbalance between phases % Iavg P/H — X
Phase-to-phase VAB, VBC, VCA P/H X X
Phase-to-neutral VAN, VBN, VCN P/H X X
Average of phase-to-phase voltages Vavg = (VAB + VBC + VCA) / 3 P/H — X
Voltages (V)
Average of phase-to-neutral voltages Vavg = (VAN + VBN + VCN) / 3 P/H — X
Ph-Ph and Ph-N voltage unbalance % Vavg P/H — X
Phase sequence ABC, ACB P/H X X1
Frequency (Hz) Power system f P/H X X
P, total P/H X X
Active (kW)
P, per phase P/H X X
Q, total P/H X X
Reactive (kVAR)
Q, per phase P/H X X
S, total P/H X X
Power Apparent (kVA)
S, per phase P/H X X
PF, total P/H X X
Power Factor
PF, per phase P/H X X
Cos φ, total P/H X X
Cos φ
Cos φ, per phase P/H X X
Maximum/Minimum Reset using the FDM display unit and Micrologic
Associated with instantaneous rms measurements A/P/H X X
Ammeter keypad
Energy Metering
Energy Energy Active (kW), reactive (kVARh), apparent (kVAh) Total since last reset P/H X X
Demand and Maximum Demand Values
Present value on the selected window P/H X X
Demand Current (A) Phases and neutral P
Maximum demand since last reset P/H X X
Present value on the selected window P/H X X
Demand Power Active (kWh), reactive (kVAR), apparent (kVA)
Maximum demand since last reset P/H X X
Calculation Window Sliding, fixed or com-synchronised Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes in 1 minute steps2 P/H — —
Power Quality
Total Harmonic Of voltage with respect to rms value THDU,THDV of the Ph-Ph and Ph-N voltage H X X
Distortion (%) Of current with respect to rms value THDI of the phase current H X X
1 FDM121 only.
2 Available via the communcation system only.
27
All Rights Reserved
™
Histories
• Trip indications in clear text in a number of user-selectable languages
• Time-stamping: date and time of trip.
Maintenance Indicators
Micrologic trip units have indicators for, among other items, the number of operating cycles, load
profile, and operating times (operating hours counter).
It is possible to assign an alarm to the operating cycle counter to plan maintenance.
The various indicators can be used together with the trip histories to analyze the level of stresses the
device has been subjected to.
Contact Wear
Contact wear algorithms only function on Masterpact circuit breakers , and contact wear cannot be
selected for PowerPact or Compact circuit breakers.
Each time a Masterpact circuit breaker opens, the Micrologic P/H trip unit measures the interrupted
current and increments the contact-wear indicator as a function of the interrupted current, according to
test results stored in memory. Breaking under normal load conditions results in a very slight increment.
The indicator value may be read on the FDM display.
It provides an estimation of contact wear calculated on the basis of the cumulative forces affecting the
circuit breaker. When the indicator reaches 100%, it is advised to visually inspect the contacts per the
instructions in the circuit breaker user guide.
Circuit Breaker Load Profile
Micrologic A/P/H trip units calculate the load profile of the circuit breaker protecting a load circuit. The
profile indicates the percentage of the total operating time at four current levels (% of circuit breaker
In):
• 0 to 49% In
• 50 to 79% In
• 80 to 89% In
• ≥ 90% In.
This information can be used to optimize use of the protected equipment or to plan ahead for
maintenance interval extensions.
28
All Rights Reserved
™
Management of Installed Devices
Each circuit breaker equipped with a COM option (BCM ULP) can be identified using the
communication system:
• serial number
• firmware version
• hardware version
• device name assigned by the user.
This information together with the previously described indications provides a clear description of the
installed devices.
Table 16: Micrologic A/P/H Trip Units Operating Assistance Functions
Display
Micrologic A/P/H Operating Assistance Functions Type Micrologic FDM
LCD Display
Operating Assistance
Trip History
Trips Cause of tripping Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig, IDn A/P/H X X
Maintenance Indicators
Mechanical cycles Assignable to an alarm A/P/H — X
Counter Electrical cycles Assignable to an alarm A/P/H — X
Hours Total operating time (hours)1 A/P/H — —
Indicator Contact wear % P/H X X
% of hours in four current ranges:
Load Profile Hours at different load levels P/H — X
0-49% In, 50-79% In, 80-89% In and ≥ 90% In
1 Available through the communication system only.
29
All Rights Reserved
™
FDM121 Display
Micrologic trip unit measurement capabilities come into full play with the FDM121 display. It connects
to the COM option (BCM ULP) with a circuit breaker ULP cord and displays the Micrologic trip unit
information. The result is a true integrated unit combining a circuit breaker and a power meter.
Additional operating assistance functions can also be displayed.
An FDM121 display unit can be connected to ULP communication devices using a prefabricated cord
to display all measurements, alarms, histories and event tables, maintenance indicators, and
management of installed devices on a screen.
The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 Vdc power supply.
The FDM121 is a display that can be integrated with the PowerPact H/J/L/P/R or Masterpact NW/NT
circuit breaker systems. It uses the sensors and processing capacity of the Micrologic trip unit. It is
easy to use and requires no special software or settings. It is immediately operational when connected
to the circuit breaker by a ULP cord.
It also provides monitoring and control with the use of the I/O application module, the motor
mechanism module, or the circuit breaker communication module (BCM ULP).
The FDM121 has a large display, but requires very little depth. The anti-glare graphic screen is backlit
for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at sharp angles.
Display of Micrologic Trip Unit Measurements and Alarms
The FDM121 is intended to display Micrologic trip unit measurements, alarms and operating
information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.
Measurements can be easily accessed using a menu. All user-defined alarms are automatically
displayed. The display mode depends on the priority level selected during alarm set-up:
• high priority: a pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the alarm and the orange
Alarm LED flashes;
• medium priority: the orange Alarm LED goes continuously on;
• low priority: no display on the screen.
All faults resulting in a trip automatically produce a high-priority alarm, without any special settings
required. In all cases, the alarm history is updated. The Micrologic trip unit saves the information in its
non-volatile memory in the event of an FDM121 power loss.
30
All Rights Reserved
™
Status Indications and Remote Control

When the circuit breaker is equipped with the Breaker Communications Module (BCM ULP), the
FDM121 display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions:
• O/F: ON/OFF
• SD: trip indication
• SDE: fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, or ground fault).
When the circuit breaker system is equipped with the I/O application module, the FDM121 can monitor
and control:
• cradle management
FDM121 Display
• circuit breaker operation
• light and load control
• custom applications.
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the COM option (BCM ULP) (including connection to shunt
close [XF] and shunt trip [MX1] communication voltage releases), the FDM121 display can also be
used to control (open/close) the circuit breaker.
Two operating mode are available:
Surface Mount
• local mode: open/close commands are enabled from the FDM121 while disabled from the
Accessory communication network;
• remote mode: open/close commands are disabled from the FDM121 while enabled from the
communication network.
Main Characteristics
• A 3.78 x 3.78 x 1.18 in. (96 x 96 x 30 mm) screen requiring 0.39 in. (10 mm) behind the door (or
0.79 in. [20 mm] when the 24 V power supply connector is used).
• White backlighting.
• Wide viewing angle: vertical ±60°, horizontal ±30°.
• High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols.
• Alarm LED: flashing orange for alarm pick-up, steady orange after operator reset if the alarm
condition persists.
• Operating temperature range: +14°F (-10°C) to +131°F (+55°C).
• CE / UL / CSA marking.
Connection with FDM121 • 24 Vdc power supply, with tolerances 24 V -20% (19.2 V) to 24 V +10% (26.4 V).
Display Unit
When the FDM121 is connected to the communication network, the 24 Vdc can be supplied by the
communication system wiring system. Consumption is 40 mA.
Mounting
The FDM121 is easily installed in a switchboard.

• Standard door cut-out is 3.6 x 3.6 in. (92 x 92 mm).
• Attached using clips.
To avoid a cut-out in the door, an accessory is available for surface mounting by drilling only two
0.87 in. (22 mm) diameter holes.
31
All Rights Reserved
™
Connection
The FDM121 is equipped with a 24 Vdc terminal block:

• A plug-in type terminal block with two wire inputs per point for easy daisy-chaining.
• A power supply range of 24 Vdc -20% (19.2 V) to 24 Vdc +10% (26.4 V).
A 24 Vdc type auxiliary power supply must be connected to a single point on the ULP system. The
FDM121 display has a two-point screw connector on the rear panel of the module for this purpose.
The ULP module to which the auxiliary power supply is connected distributes the supply via the
ULP cable to all the ULP modules connected to the system and therefore also to Micrologic trip
unit. See wiring diagram later in this section.
• Two RJ45 jacks.
The Micrologic trip unit connects to the internal communication terminal block on the PowerPact or
Compact circuit breaker with the circuit breaker ULP cord. Connection to one of the RJ45 connectors
on the FDM121 automatically establishes communication between the Micrologic trip unit and the
FDM121 and supplies power to the Micrologic trip unit measurement functions.
When the second connector is not used, it must be fitted with a line terminator.
Navigation
Five buttons are used for intuitive and fast navigation.

The “Context” button may be used to select the type of display (digital, bar graph, analogue).
The user can select the display language (Chinese, English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, etc.).
I
1 Escape
I1 310 A I2 315 A
2 Down
3 OK
% %
I3 302 A IN 23 A 4 Up
5 Context
% %
ESC
6 Alarm LED
1 2 3 4 5 6
Produit Id Metering NonResettableEnergy 1/3 Load Profile 2/3

Micrologic 5.3A I EpIN 5111947 kWh 0..49% 610 H
U-V EpOut 12345678 kWh 50...79% 15 H
Serial number: P07451
LU432091 PQS 80..89% 360 H

Part number:
E 90..100% 3H
Firmware: 1.02
F - PF - cos F
ESC ESC OK ESC ESC
Product Identification Metering: Submenu Metering: Meter Services
Screens
Main Menu
When powered up, the FDM121 screen automatically displays the ON/OFF status of the device.
Quick View Metering Control Alarms Services
When not in use, the screen is not backlit. Backlighting can be activated by pressing one of the
buttons. It goes off after three minutes.
32
All Rights Reserved
™
Fast Access to Essential Information
• “Quick view” provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential operating
information (I, U-V, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker ON/OFF).
Access to Detailed Information
• “Metering” can be used to display the measurement data (I, U-V, f, P, Q, S, E, THD, PF) with the
corresponding min/max values.
• “Alarms” displays active alarms and the alarm history.
• “Services” provides access to the operation counters, energy and maximum ammeter reset
function, maintenance indicators, identification of modules connected to the internal bus, and
FDM121 internal settings (language, contrast, etc.).
Communication Components and FDM121 Connections
The FDM121 degree of protection is IP54 in front. IP54 is maintained after switchboard mounting by
using the supplied gasket during installation.
Figure 1: FDM121 Connections
Modbus-SL Ethernet
External power supply External power supply
24 Vdc A
A 24 Vdc
B
- + - +
B
D0 = A’ / Rx-, A / Tx-
D1 = B’ / Rx+, B / Tx+
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFM D
D IFE D
D
4.3 ft. 9.8 ft.
(1.3 m) (3 m) OR
E
E E
E
0.98 ft.
(0.35 m) C F
F C FF
C C
Red Black White Blue Red Black White Blue
LV434195 LV434196 LV434197 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6

24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
Circuit Breaker ULP Cord
Connections
PowerPact and Compact circuit Customer Terminal Block Customer Terminal Block
breakers are connected to the ULP
devices (FDM121 display, IFM, IFE or
I/O unit) via the circuit breaker ULP A. Modbus Network
cord. B. Ethernet Network
C. Circuit Breaker ULP Cord
• Cord is available in three lengths: D. FDM Display
0.98 ft. (0.35 m), 4.3 ft. (1.3 m) and E. ULP Termination
9.8 ft. (3 m). F. ULP Cable
• Lengths up to 32.9 ft. (10 m) are
possible using extensions.
33
All Rights Reserved
™
FDM128 Display
The Micrologic trip unit measurement capabilities are fully utilized with the FDM128 display. The
FDM128 display connects to Ethernet communication using the RJ45 port and displays Micrologic trip
unit information. The result is an integrated unit combining a circuit breaker with a power meter.
Additional operating assistance functions can also be displayed.
The FDM128 display unit can be connected to a Micrologic COM option (BCM ULP through an IFE). It
uses the sensors and processing capacity of the Micrologic trip unit and requires no special software or
settings. The FDM128 is a large display, but requires very little depth. The anti-glare graphic screen is
backlit for easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at sharp angles.
The FDM128 display is designed to manage up to eight devices (PowerPact H/J/L/P/R or Masterpact
NW/NT circuit breakers).
Display of Micrologic Trip Unit Measurements and Trips
The FDM128 is intended to display Micrologic A/P/H trip unit measurements, trips, and operating
information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.
• Measurements may be easily accessed using a menu.
• Trips are automatically displayed.
• A pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the trip.
Status Indications
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the COM option (BCM ULP) (including its set of sensors) the
FDM128 display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions:
• O/F: ON/OFF
• SDE: Fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, ground fault)
• PF: ready to close
• CH: charged (spring loaded).
• CE, CD, CT cradle management with I/O application module.
Remote Control
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the COM option (BCM ULP) (including connection to shunt
close [XF] and shunt trip [MX1] communication voltage releases), the FDM128 display can also be
used to operate (open/close) the circuit breaker.
Two operating mode are available:
• Local mode: open/close commands are enabled from the FDM128 while disabled from the
• Remote mode: open/close commands are disabled from the FDM128 while enabled from the
34
All Rights Reserved
™
Main Characteristics
• 4.54 x 3.40 in. (115.2 x 86.4 mm) with 5.7 in. (145 mm) QVGA display 320 x 240 pixels.
• Color TFT LCD, with LED backlight.
• Wide viewing angle: vertical ±80°, horizontal ±70°.
• High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols.
• Operating temperature range: +14°F (-10°C) to +131°F (+55°C).
• CE / UL / CSA marking.
• 24 Vdc power supply, -10%/+20% (limit 20.4 - 28.8 Vdc).
FDM128 Display
• Consumption 6.8 W.
Mounting
The FDM128 is easily installed in a switchboard.

• Standard door hole Ø 0.87 in. (22 mm).
• The FDM128 degree of protection is IP65 at the touch screen cover. IP54 is maintained after
installation by using the supplied gasket.
Surface Mount Accessory
Connection
The FDM128 is equipped with:

• a 24 Vdc terminal block:
— power supply range of 24 Vdc (limit 20.4 - 28.8 Vdc).
— The FDM128 display unit has a 2-point screw connector on the rear panel of the module for this
purpose.
Connection with Display • One RJ45 Ethernet jacks.
Unit
The Micrologic trip unit connects to the internal communication terminal block on the Masterpact circuit
breakers through the circuit breaker ULP cord and Ethernet connection through the IFE.
Navigation
• A touch screen is used for intuitive and fast navigation.

• The user can select the display language (Chinese, English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, etc.).
20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05
S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1
Quick view Product ID Information Reset all Quick view Energy Quick view Product ID Information Reset all
Counter Load profile
Measures Measures Measures
Operation xxx
Ep 11 318 kWh 0 to 49%
Alarm history Alarm history Alarm history
Trip SDE xxx Eq 257 kVArh 50 to 79%
Control
Control
Close command xxx
Control
Es 13 815 kVAh 80 to 89%
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance 90 to 100%
ESC 3/3 ESC 6/7 ESC 2/3
Product Identification Metering: Meter Services
Screens
Main Menu
Quick View Metering Control Alarms Services
When not in use, the screen is automatically shifted to low back-lighting.
35
All Rights Reserved
™
Fast Access to Essential Information
• “Quick view” provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential operating
information (I, U-V, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker On / Off).
Access to Detailed Information
• "Metering" can be used to display the measurement data (I, U-V, f, P, Q, S, E, THD, PF) with the
corresponding min/max values.
• “Alarms” displays the trip history.
• “Services” provides access to the operation counters, energy and maximum ammeter reset
function, maintenance indicators, identification of modules connected to the internal bus and
FDM128 internal settings (language, contrast, etc.).
Communication Components and FDM128 Connections
The FDM128 degree of protection is IP65 at the touch screen cover. IP54 is maintained after
installation by using the supplied gasket.
Figure 2: FDM128 Connections
B
4.3 ft 9.8 ft
(1.3 m) (3 m)
A. FDM128
B. Ethernet Network
0.98 ft D. UFE
(0.35 m) DD
D E. ULP Termination
E
LV434195 LV434196 LV434197 E
E
Circuit Breaker ULP Cord C
C C
Connections
PowerPact and Compact circuit
devices (FDM display, IFM, IFE or I/O
unit) via the circuit breaker ULP cord.
• Cord is available in three lengths:
0.98 ft. (0.35 m), 4.3 ft. (1.3 m) and
9.8 ft. (3 m).
36
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 3: Panelboard and Switchboard Connections
E E
E E
F
ULP
ULP F
PowerPact
t
PowerPact and Compac
B
Internet
(cloud)
A
Table 17: Smart System Communication Devices and Displays
Port Bin. Analog. Bin.

Name Function
To Device To Server Input Input Output
Energy Server with

Ethernet Cable
A Com’X 200 Ethernet Gateway® Modbus Master 6 2 —
+ WiFI
Function
Ethernet LCD Color

B FDM128 — Ethernet — — —
Touch Screen
LCD Display for

C FDM121 ULP — — — —
Circuit Breaker
37
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 17: Smart System Communication Devices and Displays (continued)
Port Bin. Analog. Bin.

Name Function
To Device To Server Input Input Output
IFE Interface Ethernet Interface & Modbus Master &

Ethernet — — —
+ Gateway Gateway ULP
Ethernet Interface for

IFE Interface ULP Ethernet — — —
Circuit Breakers
Modbus Interface for

E IFM ULP Modbus Slave — — —
Circuit Breakers
Input/Output
F I/O Application Module ULP ULP 6 1 1
for Circuit Breakers
38
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 3—Electronic Trip Systems
M-frame circuit breakers are available with the type ET 1.0 electronic trip system. P-frame and R-frame
circuit breakers are available with either the ET1.0I basic electronic trip system or the Micrologic™
electronic trip system. The NS630b–NS3200 circuit breakers are available with the Micrologic
electronic trip system. The sensing system responds to the flow of current through the circuit breaker.
Thermal Imaging
The thermal imaging function protects the cables or bus bars from overheating in case of low
amplitude repetitive faults. Such overheating can be due to repetitive motor startings, fluctuating load,
intermittent ground faults, or subsequent closing after a fault. Traditional electronic protection does not
protect against repetitive faults because the duration of each overload above the pickup setting is too
short to achieve effective tripping. Nevertheless, each overload involves a temperature rise in the
installation, the cumulative effect of which could lead to overheating of the system.
The thermal imaging function remembers and integrates the thermal heating caused by each pickup
setting overrun. Before tripping, the integrated heating value will reduce the associated time delay and,
therefore, the reaction of the trip unit will be closer to the real heating of the power network system. After
tripping, the function will also reduce the time delay when closing the circuit breaker on an overload.
True RMS Current Sensing
The sensing system responds to the flow of current through the circuit breaker. The trip unit samples
the current waveform to provide true RMS protection through the fifteenth harmonic. This true RMS
sensing gives accurate values for the magnitude of a non-sinusoidal waveform. Therefore, the heating
effects of harmonically distorted waveforms are accurately evaluated.
The Micrologic H trip unit provides additional sampling of the waveforms to measure and provide
waveform capture of harmonic distortion to the thirty-first harmonic.
Type ET Electronic Trip System
Type ET trip units are available with M-frame, P-frame and R-frame UL/IEC circuit breakers. Circuit
breakers with type ET trip units have a fixed ampere rating. The trip units are not field-interchangeable
and will not accept any communications or other trip unit accessories. The trip system uses a set of
current transformers (called CTs or sensors) to sense current, a trip unit to evaluate the current, and a
tripping solenoid to trip the circuit breaker.
ET1.0 (M-Frame only)
The ET1.0 trip system is available on M-frame circuit breakers and is equipped with fixed long-time and
adjustable instantaneous tripping functions only. The long-time pickup is fixed at 1.0 x sensor rating (In),
while the instantaneous pickup is adjustable (dial settings from 2–10 x In) with no intentional time delay.
ET1.0I (P-Frame and R-Frame only)
The ET1.0I trip system is available on both P-frame and R-frame circuit breakers and is equipped with fixed
long-time and adjustable instantaneous tripping functions only. The long-time pickup is fixed at 1.0 x sensor
rating (In), while the instantaneous pickup is adjustable (dial settings from 1.5–12 x In) with no intentional
time delay.
ET1.0M (P-Frame only)
The ET1.0M trip system is only available on P-frame motor circuit protectors and provides protection for
short circuit conditions only. The trip unit has a single adjustment for instantaneous pickup that, if
39
All Rights Reserved
™
exceeded, will trip the circuit breaker with no intentional delay. Instantaneous trip dial settings are
2–16 x In for 600 A circuit breakers and 1.5–12 x In for 800–1200 A circuit breakers.
Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Systems
The P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 electronic trip circuit breakers can be equipped with the
optional Micrologic trip systems listed below:
Table 18: Micrologic Trip Systems
(LI) (LSI) (LSIG)

(LS0)
Long-time + Long-time + Long-time + Short-time
Long-time +
Instantaneous Short-time + + Instantaneous
Model Short-time +
Protection Instantaneous Protection + Equipment
Zero delay
(UL Listed, Protection Ground-fault Protection
(IEC Rated Only)
IEC Rated) (UL LIsted, IEC Rated) (UL LIsted, IEC Rated)
Micrologic Basic Trip Unit 2.0 3.0 5.0 —
Micrologic A Trip Unit 2.0A 3.0A 5.0A 6.0A
Micrologic P Trip Unit — — 5.0P 6.0P
Micrologic H Trip Unit — — 5.0H 6.0H
Trip units are designed to protect power circuits and loads. Micrologic trip systems use a set of current
transformers (called CTs or sensors) to sense current, a trip unit to evaluate the current, and a tripping
solenoid to trip the circuit breaker. Adjustable rotary switches on the trip unit allow the user to set the
proper overcurrent or equipment ground-fault current protection required in the electrical system. If
current exceeds a set value for longer than its set time delay, the trip system opens the circuit breaker.
Alarms may be programmed for remote indications. Measurements of current, voltage, frequency,
power, and power quality optimize continuity of service and energy management.
Integration of protection functions in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) electronic
component used in all Micrologic trip units guarantees a high degree of reliability and immunity to
conducted or radiated disturbances. On Micrologic P and H trip units, advanced functions are
managed by an independent microprocessor.
Circuit breakers are shipped with the trip unit long-time pickup switch set at 1.0 and all other trip unit
adjustments set at their lowest settings. Actual settings required for a specific application must be
determined by a qualified consultant or plant engineer. A coordination study is recommended to
provide coordination between all circuit breakers in the distribution system.
Table 19: Micrologic™ Trip Unit Features
Micrologic Trip Unit (X = Standard Feature O = Available Option)
Feature Standard Ammeter Power Harmonics
2.0 3.0 5.0 2.0A 3.0A 5.0A 6.0A 5.0P 6.0P 5.0H 6.0H
Field-Installable X X X X X X X X X X X
LI X X
LS0 X X
LSI X X X X
LSIG/Ground-Fault Trip1 X X X
Ground-Fault Alarm/No Trip1, 2 X X
Ground-Fault Alarm and Trip1, 2 X X
Adjustable Rating Plugs X X X X X X X X X X X
True RMS Sensing X X X X X X X X X X X
UL Listed X X X X X X X X X
Thermal Imaging X X X X X X X X X X X
40
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 19: Micrologic™ Trip Unit Features (continued)
Micrologic Trip Unit (X = Standard Feature O = Available Option)
Feature Standard Ammeter Power Harmonics
2.0 3.0 5.0 2.0A 3.0A 5.0A 6.0A 5.0P 6.0P 5.0H 6.0H
Phase-Loading Bar Graph X X X X X X X X
LED for Long-Time Pick-Up X X X X X X X X X X X
LED for Trip Indication X X X X X X X X
Digital Ammeter X X X X X X X X
Zone-Selective Interlocking3 X X X X X X X
Communications O O O O X X X X
LCD Dot Matrix Display X X X X
Advanced User Interface X X X X
Protective Relay Functions X X X X
Neutral Protection1 X X X X
Contact Wear Indication X X X X
Incremental Fine Tuning of Settings X X X X
Selectable Long-Time Delay Bands X X X X
Power Measurement X X X X
Power Quality Measurements X X
Waveform Capture X X
1 3Ø, 4W circuits require either a neutral current transformer or a 4-pole breaker.
2 Requires M6C Programmable Contact Module.
3 Not available for 2.0A trip units as upstream devices.
Micrologic 3.0A Micrologic .0 A Micrologic 6.0A

Micrologic 3.0 Micrologic .0
t I n t I n t I n
tsd tr MA tsd tr MA MA
tsd tr
Isd s Isd s Isd
Ii Ir Ii Ir
s
A A Ii Ir A
Ig Ig Ig
tg tg tg
00 00 00
40 40 40
menu menu menu
long time long time long time

long time long time
Ir tr alarm alarm Ir tr alarm
Ir tr alarm .63 8 Ir .63 tr 8 .63 8 Ir tr alarm
.63 8 .6 .7 (s) 4 12 .6 .7 (s) 4 .6 .7 (s) 4 12 .63 8
.6 .7 (s) 4 12 12 .6 .7 (s) 4 12
.5 .8 2 16 .5 .8 2 16 .5 .8 2 16
.5 .8 2 16 .5 .8 2 16
.45 .9 1 20 .45 .9 1 20 .45 .9 1 20
.45 .9 1 20 .45 .9 1 20
.4 1 .5 24 .4 1 .5 24 .4 1 .5 24
.4 1 .5 24 x In 6 Ir x In 6 Ir x In 6 Ir .4 1 .5 24
x In 6 Ir x In 6 Ir
instantaneous short instantaneous instantaneous short instantaneous

Isd Ii Isd tsd Ii short instantaneous
tsd Im
Im 4 .4 .4 .3 6 8 10 4 5 6
4 (s) .4 .4 .3 4 Isd tsd
.4 .4 .3
Ii
4 5 6
(s) 3 5 3 5 4
3 5
.3 .2 3 5 (s) 6 8 10
3 8 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 3 8 2.5 6 2.5 6 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12
2 10 2 8 .2 . 3 15 2 10 2 8 .2 . 2 8
2 8 .2 . 15
.1 3
1.5 12 1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off 1.5 10 1.5 10 0 1.5 10 .1 2 0
Ir
Ir on I t off In Ir Ir on I2t off In 1.5
Ir
10
on I t off
2
In
off
setting delay setting setting delay
setting setting delay
test
Ig tg
D
E
F (s) .4 .4 .3
C G .3 .2
H .2 .
A .1 2 0
on I t off
ground fault
Micrologic 3.0 and 5.0 Basic Trip Units Micrologic 3.0A, 5.0A and 6.0A Trip Units
41
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic .0 P Micrologic 6.0P Micrologic 5.0H Micrologic 6.0
I(A) I(A)
Trip Trip
I (A) I (A)
5000A 5000A
V (V) ()
24s 24s
P (kW) P (k )
30kA
0.4s
30kA E (kWh) E (k h)
0.4s
85kA 85kA Harmonics armonics
long time long time long time long time

Ir .63 tr 8
alarm
Ir tr alarm Ir .63 tr 8
alarm
Ir tr alarm
.6 .7 (s) 4 12 .63 (s)
8 .6 .7 (s) 4 12 .63 8
.6 .7 4 12 .6 .7 (s) 4 12
.5 .8 2 16 .5 .8 2 16 .5 .8 2 16 .5 .8 16
2
.45 .9 1 20 .45 .9 1 20 .45 .9 1 20 .45 .9 1 20
.4 1 .5 24 .4 1 .5 24 .4 1 .5 24 24
x In 6 Ir x In 6 Ir x In 6 Ir .4 1 .5
x In 6 Ir
short instantaneous short instantaneous short instantaneous short instantaneous
Isd tsd Ii Isd Isd tsd Ii
.4 .4 .3
tsd Ii
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10 3
4
5 (s) 6 8 10
Isd
4
tsd
(s) .4 .4 .3
Ii
6 8 10
2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 2.5
3 5
6 .3 .2 4 12
2 8 .2 . 3 15 2 8 .2 . 3 15 2 8 .2 .1 3 15 2 8 .2 . 3 15
1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off
1.5 10 .1 0 2 off 1.5 10 .1 0 2 off
1.5 10 .1 0 2 off
Ir on I t off In Ir on
2
I t off In x Ir on I2t off x In Ir on
2
I t off In
setting delay setting delay setting delay
test setting delay
test
Ig tg Ig tg
D
E (s) .4 .4 .3 D
E (s) .4 .4 .3
C G .3 .2 C G .3 .2
H .2 . H .2 .
A .1 2 0 A .1 2 0
on I t off on I t off
ground fault ground fault
Micrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Units Micrologic 5.0H and 6.0H Trip Units
Micrologic™ 2.0, 3.0 and 5.0 Basic Trip Units

Micrologic 5.0
The Micrologic 2.0, 3.0, and 5.0 basic trip units protect power circuits.
Protection Settings
Ir
long time
tr alarm 3 Protection thresholds and delays are set using the rotary switches. A full-range of long-
.8 8
.6
.7 .9 (s) 4
.95 2
12
16
time settings are available via field-installable adjustable rating plugs.
.5 .98 1 20 4
.4
In
1 .5 24
6 Ir • Overload protection
short time instantaneous
Isd
3
4
5
tsd
(s) . 4 . 4 .3
Ii
6 8 10
— True RMS long-time protection
2 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12
2 8 .2 .1 3 15 — Thermal imaging: Active thermal imaging before and after tripping
1.5 10 .1 0 2 2 off
Ir on off
I t In
setting delay • Short-circuit protection
— Short-time RMS
6
— Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay
• Instantaneous protection
• Neutral protection on four-pole circuit breakers
1—Long-time current setting and tripping delay
2—Short-time pickup and tripping delay
3—Overload signal (LED)
4—Long-time rating plug screw
5—Instantaneous pickup
6—Test connector
Table 20: Micrologic 2.0 and 3.0 Basic Trip Unit Settings
•
t
Ir 2.0: 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00
Current Setting (A)
Tripping between 1.05 Ir = ln x ... 3.0: 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 0.63 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
and 1.20 x Ir Other ranges are available by changing rating plug
Long-Time
tr tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
Protection Maximum Time Delay (s)
tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to –20%
tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Ii Thermal Imaging 20 minutes before or after tripping
0 I Current Setting (A)
Short-Time
Accuracy: ±10% Isd = Ir x ... 2.0: 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Protection
No delay
Instantaneous Current Setting (A)
Ii = In x ... 3.0: 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
Protection Accuracy: ±10%
42
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 21: Micrologic 5.0 Basic Trip Unit Settings

t
Ir IEC: 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00
Current Setting (A)
Tripping Between 1.05 Ir = ln x ... UL: 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 0.63 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
tr and 1.20 x Ir Other Ranges are Available by Changing Rating Plug
Long-Time
tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
lsd Protection Maximum Time Delay (s)
tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
tsd Accuracy: 0 to –20%
tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
li
Thermal Imaging 20 Minutes Before or After Tripping
lsd = Ir x ... 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Accuracy: ±10%
I2t OFF 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Settings
Short-Time I2t ON 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Protection Maximum Time Delay (s) Min. Trip
at 10 x Ir 20 80 140 230 350
Time (ms)
tsd
Max. Trip
80 140 200 320 500
Time (ms)
Ii = In x ... 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
43
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic™ 2.0A, 3.0A, 5.0A and 6.0A Trip Units with Ammeter
Micrologic A trip units protect power circuits and provide current measurements,
Micrologic 6.0 A overload protection, and short-circuit protection. In addition, the 6.0A trip units also
6 provide ground-fault protection for equipment.
Protection Settings
t I n
tsd tr MA Protection thresholds and delays are set using the rotary switches. The selected
Isd s
Ii Ir A values are momentarily displayed in amperes and in seconds. A full-range of
Ig
tg long-time settings are available via the field-installable rating plug:
• Overload protection (true RMS long-time protection)
• Thermal imaging (active thermal imaging before and after tripping)
• Short-circuit protection:
00
— Short-time RMS
8
— I2t ON or OFF for short-time delay
40
• Instantaneous protection
• Ground-fault protection for equipment:
2
— Residual ground-fault protection for equipment
menu — Source ground-return ground-fault protection for equipment
— Modified differential ground-fault protection (MDGF) for equipment
long time
Ir .8 tr
(s) 4
8
alarm • Neutral protection on four-pole circuit breakers
.7 .9 12
.6 .95 2 16
3 .5 .98 1 20
0 • ZSI: Zone-selective interlocking:
.4 1 .5 24
x In 6 Ir
short time instantaneous — ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of trip units to
Isd tsd Ii
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10 provide total discrimination for short-time and equipment ground-fault
2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12
4
2 8 .2 . 3 15 protection, without delay for tripping).
1.5 10 .1 2
0 2 off
Ir
setting
on I t off
delay
In — Not available for 3.0A trip units or for 2.0A trip units installed as upstream
test
Ig
E
tg
(s) .4 .4 .3 2
devices.
D F
C G .3 .2
H .2 . 3 Ammeter Measurements
A .1 2
0
on I t off
ground fault
Micrologic A trip units measure the true RMS value of currents. They provide
continuous current measurement from 0.2 to 20 x In with an accuracy of 1.5%
1—Indication of tripping cause (including sensors). No auxiliary source is needed where I > 0.2 x In. The optional
2—Navigation buttons external power supply (24 Vdc) makes it possible to display currents where
3—Long-time current setting and tripping delay
I < 0.2 x In and to store values of the interrupted current.
5—Ground-fault pickup and tripping delay
6—Test lamp and reset
A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax)
7—Digital display or displays the IA, IB, IC, Ig, and (on 4P circuit breakers only) IN stored current and
8—Three-phase bar graph and ammeter setting values by successively pressing the navigation button.
11—Instantaneous pickup Communication Network
12—Electronic push-to-trip
13—Test connector In conjunction with an optional communication network, the trip unit transmits the
following parameters:
• Setting values
• All ammeter measurements
• Tripping causes
44
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 22: Micrologic 2.0A and 3.0A Trip Unit Settings

t
Ir Current Setting (A) 2.0A: 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00
Tripping Between 1.05 Ir = ln x... 3.0A: 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 0.63 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
and 1.20 x Ir Other Ranges are Available by Changing Rating Plug
tr Long-Time
tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0–20%
Ii tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
0 I Thermal Imaging 20 Minutes Before or After Tripping

Short-Time Current Setting (A)
Isd = Ir x... 2.0A: 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Protection Accuracy: ±10%, No delay
Ii = In x... 3.0A: 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
Table 23: Micrologic 5.0A and 6.0A Trip Unit Settings

t IEC: 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00
Ir Current Setting (A)
Tripping Between 1.05 Ir = ln x... UL: 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 0.63 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
tr and 1.20 x Ir Other ranges are available by changing rating plug
Long-Time
tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
lsd tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
tsd Accuracy: 0–20%
tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
li
Thermal Imaging 20 minutes before or after tripping
lsd = Ir x... 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Accuracy: ±10%
Short-Time I2t OFF 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Settings
Protection Maximum Time Delay (s) I2t ON 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
at 10 x Ir Min. trip time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
tsd
Max. trip time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Ii = In x... 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
Table 24: Micrologic 6.0A Trip Unit Ground-Fault Settings

t Ig = ln x... A B C D E F G H J
I2t on
Ground-Fault Pickup (A) ln d 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
lg
Accuracy: ±10% 400 A < ln d 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
I2 t off
tg ln > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200
I2t OFF 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Settings
Maximum Time Delay (s) at I2t ON 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0 I
1 x Ig Minimum Trip Time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
tg
Maximum Trip Time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
External Power Supplies for Micrologic Trip Units
Current-based protection functions require no auxiliary power source.

Table 25: Micrologic A Use of External 24 Vdc Power Supply
Function Without 24 Vdc Power Supply at F1 and F2 With 24 Vdc Power Supply at F1 and F2
Fault Protection for LSIG Functions Yes Yes
LED Trip Indication Yes Yes
Ammeter and bar graph displays Yes Yes
Trip Setting and Max. Current Readings Can Be Yes, If Current Flow on One Phase is Equal To or Greater Than:
Accessed on the Display by Using Navigation Sensor Plug Value (In) Minimum Ground-fault Pickup
Buttons 100–250 A 30% of sensor rating Yes
Ground-Fault Push-to-Trip Button Works for 400–1200 A 20% of sensor rating
Testing Ground Fault1 1600–6300 A 500 A
Yes, with separate 24 Vdc power supply for
Modbus® Communications (Optional) No
the circuit breaker communication module
Back-lit Display No Yes
1 Ground fault Push-to-trip button will also be functional if hand-held test kit or full-function test kit is powering the trip unit.
45
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic™ 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Units with Power Metering
Micrologic P trip units provide power metering and extended protection in addition
Micrologic 6.0 P to the adjustable protection functions of the Micrologic A trip unit.
Protection Settings
The adjustable protection functions of the 5.0P and 6.0P trip units are identical to
I(A) those of Micrologic A trip unit (overloads, short circuits, equipment ground-fault
protection; see page 44). These units also feature:
Trip
• Fine adjustment
5000A
2 24s Within the range below the rotary switch setting, fine adjustments of
pickups/delays in steps of 1 A/s (except for short-time and ground-fault) are
30kA possible on the keypad or remotely by the communication network.
0.4s
• Inverse definite minimum time lag (IDMTL) setting.
85kA
Coordination with fuse-type or medium-voltage protection systems is
0
optimized by adjusting the long-time delay curve around 6 x Ir axis. This setting
ensures better coordination with certain loads.
3 • Neutral protection
4 On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using the keypad or
remotely using the communication network to one of four positions: OFF, 1/2N
(1/2 x In), 1N (1 x In), or 1.6N (2 x In).
Ir
long time
tr alarm 2 NOTE: Neutral protection is disabled if long-time curve is set to one of the
.8 8
.6
.7 .9 (s) 4
.95 2
12
16
IDMTL protection settings.
3
.5 .98 1 20
.4
x In
1 .5 24
6 Ir • Configuring Alarms and Other Protection Functions
Isd tsd
.4 .4 .3
Ii When the cover is closed, the keypad may no longer be used to change the
3
4
5 (s) 6 8 10
6 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 4 protection settings, but it still provides access to the displays for
2 8 .2 . 3 15
1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off measurements, histories, indicators, etc. Depending on the thresholds and
Ir on I t off In
setting delay
test time delays set, the Micrologic P trip unit monitors current, voltage, power,
Ig tg
D
E
F (s) .4 .4 .3 frequency, and phase sequence. Each threshold overrun may be signalled
C G .3 .2
8
H .2 . 6 remotely via the communication network.
A .1 2
0
on I t off
ground fault Each threshold overrun may be combined with tripping (protection) or an
indication carried out by an optional M6C programmable contact (alarm), or both
(protection and alarm).
1—Indication of tripping cause
2—High resolution screen
3—Measurement display Maintenance Record
4—Navigation buttons
5—Long-time current setting and tripping delay The maintenance record can be consulted using the full-function test kit or
7—Hole for settings lockout pin
remotely via the communication network. It can be used as an aid in
8—Ground-fault pickup and tripping delay troubleshooting and to assist scheduling for device maintenance operations.
9—Test lamp and indication reset Recorded indications include:
10—Maintenance indicators
11—Protection settings • Highest current measured
• Operation counter (cumulative total and total since last reset)
14—Instantaneous pickup
15—Electronic push-to-trip
16—Test connector
• Number of test kit connections
• Number of trips in operating mode
Load Shedding and Reconnection Parameters
Load shedding and reconnection parameters can be set according to the power or the current flowing
through the circuit breaker. Load shedding is carried out by a remote computer via the communication
network or by an M6C programmable contact.
46
All Rights Reserved
™
Indication Option Via Programmable Contacts
The M6C programmable contact may be used to signal threshold overruns or status changes. It can be
programmed using the keypad on the Micrologic P trip unit or remotely using the communication
network. The contact is required to obtain data from the protective relay functions on Type P and
Type H trip units.
Table 26: Micrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Unit Settings

t
Ir Ir = ln x... IEC 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00
Current Setting (A)
Tripping Between 1.05 Ir = ln x... UL 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 0.63 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
tr and 1.20 x Ir Other Ranges are Available by Changing Rating Plug
Long-Time tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
Isd
(RMS) Maximum Time Delay (s)
IDMTL tsd Protection tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to –20%
tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Ii
IDMTL Setting Curve slope SIT VIT EIT HV Fuse DT
0 Ir Isd Ii I Thermal Imaging 20 Minutes Before or After Tripping
Current Setting (A)
lsd = Ir x... 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
Accuracy: ±10%
Short-Time I2t OFF 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
(RMS) Settings
Maximum Time Delay (s) I2t ON 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Protection
at 10 x Ir Min. Trip Time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
tsd
Max. Trip Time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Ii = IN x... 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
Table 27: Micrologic 6.0P Trip Unit Ground-Fault Settings

Ig = ln x... A B C D E F G H J
t
I2t on Ground-Fault Pickup (A) ln d 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
lg Accuracy: ±10% 400 A < ln d 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
I2 t off ln > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200
tg
I2t OFF 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Settings
Time Delay (s) I2t ON 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
0 I at 1 x In Min. Trip Time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
tg
Max. Trip Time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Table 28: Micrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Unit Settings for Protection Functions
Threshold Time Delay

Current Imbalance 0.05 to 0.6 x Imax 1 to 40 s
Current
Maximum Current Imax: IA, IB, IC, IN, Ig 0.2 to 1.0 x In 15 to 1500 s
Voltage Imbalance 0.02 to 0.3 x Vn 1 to 40 s
Voltage Minimum Voltage Vmin 100 to 725 V (Phase Total) 0.25 to 0.5 s
Maximum Voltage Vmax 100 to 1200 V (Between Phases) 0.20 to 5.0 s
Maximum Power Pmax 5 to 500 kW 0.2 to 20 s
Power
Reverse Power Pr 0.02 to 0.2 x Pn 0.5 to 20 s
Minimum Frequency Fmin 45 to 65 Hz 0.2 to 5 s
Frequency
Maximum Frequency Fmax 45 to 540 Hz 0.2 to 5 s
Phase Sequence 'Ø ØA-ØB-ØC or ØA-ØC-ØB Instantaneous
Table 29: Micrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Unit Settings for Current and Power Load-Shedding
Pickup Drop-out
Threshold Time Delay Threshold Time Delay

Current I 0.5 to 1.0 x Ir Per Phase 20% to 80% x tr 0.3 to 1.0 x Ir per phase 10 to 600 s
Power P 200 kW to 10 MW 10 to 3600 s 100 kW to 10 MW 10 to 3600 s
Micrologic P trip units are designed to be used with an external 24 Vdc power supply. Current-based
protection functions require no auxiliary power source.
47
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 30: Micrologic P Use of External 24 Vdc Power Supply
Without 24 Vdc Power With 24 Vdc Power Supply at F1

Function
Supply at F1 and F2 and F2
LCD Display and Backlight are Functional Yes1 Yes
Ground-Fault Push-to-Trip Button Works for Testing
Yes1 Yes
Ground Fault2
Metering, Monitoring, and History Logs are Functional Yes1 Yes
Communications Between Trip Unit and M2C and
No Yes
M6C Programmable Contact Modules
Operation of M6C Programmable Contact Module No
the module
Modbus Communications No
the circuit breaker communication module
1 If circuit breaker has 100 Vac or more between two phases or phase to neutral and is bottom fed or closed in a top fed application.
2 Ground-fault push-to-trip button will also be functional if hand-held test kit or full-function test kit is powering the trip unit.
Tripping and Alarm Histories
The last ten trips and ten alarms are recorded in two separate history files that can be displayed on the
screen (sample displays are shown).
The following information is contained in these files:
Trip Trip
history
03/08/1999
11 04 18 am Trip History Alarm History
Ir
03/08/1999 Ir 4000 A • Type of fault • Type of alarm
• Date and time of fault • Date and time of alarm
Isd I1 4800 A
27/07/1999 • Values measured at time of
I2 5600 A • Interrupted current
alarm
max I3 4000 A
30/06/1999
IN 200 A
Trip History Alarm History
Metering
The Micrologic P trip unit calculates in real time the electrical values V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh,
VAh, Hz, power factor and crest factor. It also calculates demand current and power over an adjustable
time period.
I(A) Iinstant.
Trip
max inst. Pinst. (H ) Pdemand
A 460 P (k ) P (k )
5000 A IA 4800 A C 464 2180 2180
24s CA 461
I 4600 A
IC 4000 A
(k A ) 60.0 (k A )
30kA AN 270 - 650 - 650
0.4s IN 200 A N 279
85kA I 13 A CN 273 S (k A) S (k A)
2280 2280
Current Metering Maximum Current Voltage Metering Power Metering Frequency Power Demand
48
All Rights Reserved
™
Real-Time Metering
The value displayed on the screen is refreshed every second. Minimum and maximum measurement
values are stored in memory.
Table 31: Real-Time Metering
Type of Measurement Unit of Measurement Measurement Source

IRMS A ØA, ØB, ØC or N
Current IAVERAGE A (ØA + ØB + ØC) / 3
IPEAK/2 A ØA, ØB, ØC or N
VRMS V (ØA–ØB), (ØB–ØC) and (ØC–ØA)
Voltage VRMS V (ØA–N), (ØB–N) and (ØC–N)
'VIMBALANCE % VRMS
P, Q and S W, VAR, VA Total
Power EP, EQ and ES Wh, VARh, VAh Total
Power factor Total
Frequency F Hz 50/60
Demand Metering
The demand is calculated over a fixed or sliding time window that can be programmed from five to sixty
minutes. Depending on the contract signed with the power supplier, specific programming makes it
possible to avoid or minimize the cost of overrunning the subscribed power. Maximum demand values
are systematically stored and time stamped.
Table 32: Demand Metering

Current IDEMAND A ØA, ØB, ØC or N
Power P, Q and SDEMAND W, VAR, VA Total
Communication Network
The communication network may be used to:

• Remotely read parameters for the protection functions.
• Transmit all the measurements and calculated values.
• Signal the causes of tripping and alarms.
• Consult the history files and the maintenance indicator record.
In addition, an event log of the last 100 events and a maintenance record, which is stored in the trip
unit memory but not available locally, may be accessed via the communication network.
This Modbus communication system is compatible with the Powerlogic™ System Manager™ software
(SMS).
Event Log
The event log may be accessed by a remote computer via the communication network. All events are
time stamped and include:
• Trips
• Beginning and end of alarms
• Modifications to settings and parameters
• Loss of time
• Test kit connections
• Counter resets
• System faults (thermal self-protection, major fault and minor fault alarms)
49
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic™ 5.0H and 6.0H Trip Units with Harmonic Metering
In addition to the P functions, the Micrologic H trip units offer:

Micrologic 6.0
• In-depth analysis of power quality including calculation of harmonics and the fundamentals.
• Diagnostics aid and event analysis through waveform capture.
• Customized alarm programming to analyze and track down a disturbance on the ac power
system.
I (A) • Systematic time stamping of all events and creation of logs.
() Metering
The Micrologic H trip unit offers all the measurements carried out by the Micrologic P trip unit, with
P (k ) the addition of phase-by-phase measurements of power and energy as well as calculation of:
E (k h) • Current and voltage total harmonic distortion (THD, thd)
• Current, voltage and power fundamentals (50/60 Hz)
armonics • Harmonic components (amplitude and phase) up to the 31st current and voltage harmonic
• Real-time metering: The value displayed on the screen is refreshed every second. The
table below shows what is measured in real-time metering
Table 33: Measurements

IRMS A ØA, ØB, ØC or N
IAVERAGE A (ØA + ØB + ØC) / 3
Current
long time
alarm
IPEAK/2 A ØA, ØB, ØC or N
Ir .8 tr 8
.6
.7 .9 (s) 4
.95 2
12
16
'IIMBALANCE % ØA, ØB, ØC or N
.5 .98 1 20 VRMS V
.4 1 .5 24 (ØA–ØB), (ØB–ØC) and (ØC–ØA)
x In 6 Ir
short time instantaneous Voltage (ØA–N), (ØB–N) and (ØC–N)

Isd tsd Ii VRMS V
4 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10 VRMS
2.5
3 5
6 .3 .2 4 12 'VIMBALANCE %
2 8 .2 . 3 15 P, Q and S W, VAR, VA Total
1.5 10 .1 2
0 2 off
Ir on I t off In
setting delay
Power EP, EQ and ES Wh, VARh, VAh Total
test
Ig lg Power factor Total
D
E
F
(s) .4 .4 .3
C G .3 .2 Frequency F Hz ØA, ØB, or ØC
H .2 .
A .1 2
0
on I t off Fundamentals 50/60 Hz component V, I, P, Q, and S
ground fault Power Quality
THD % V/I
Indicators
V and I harmonics Amplitude to phase 1, 2, 3, 4...50
• Demand Metering: Similar to the Micrologic P trip unit, demand values are calculated over a fixed
or sliding time window that can be set from five to sixty minutes.
Table 34: Demand Metering

Current IDEMAND A ØA, ØB, ØC or N
Power P, Q and SDEMAND W, VAR, VA Total
Waveform Capture
The Micrologic H trip units can capture and store current and voltage waveforms using digital sampling
techniques similar to those used in oscilloscopes. Using the information available in the captured
waveform, it is possible to determine the level of harmonics as well as the direction and amplitude of
the flow of harmonic power.
The Micrologic™ H trip unit can record manually via the keypad the following waveforms:
• Currents IA, IB, IC and IN
• Phase-to-phase voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA
50
All Rights Reserved
™
Waveforms may be displayed on the graphic screen of the control unit or communicated over a
networked system. The recording takes place over one cycle with a measurement range of 1 to 1.5 In
for current and 0 to 690 volts for voltage. Resolution is 64 points per cycle.
Customized Alarm Programming
The instantaneous value of each measurement can be compared to user-set high and low thresholds.
Overrun of a threshold generates an alarm. Programmable action can be linked to each alarm, including
circuit breaker opening, activation of an M6C contact, recording of measurements in a log, etc.
Event Logs
Each event is recorded with:

• The date, time, and name of the event
• The event characteristics
Micrologic H trip units are designed to be used with an external 24 Vdc power supply. Current-based
protection functions require no auxiliary power source.
Table 35: Micrologic H Use of External 24 Vdc Power Supply
Without 24 Vdc Power With 24 Vdc Power Supply

Function
Supply at F1 and F2 at F1 and F2
LCD Display and Backlight are Functional Yes1 Yes
Ground-Fault Push-to-Trip Button Works for Testing Ground Fault2 Yes1 Yes
Metering, Monitoring, and History Logs are Functional Yes1 Yes
Communications Between Trip Unit and M2C and M6C
No Yes
Programmable Contact Modules
Yes, with Separate 24 Vdc
Operation of M6C Programmable Contact Module No
Power Supply for the Module
Yes, with Separate 24 Vdc
Modbus™ Communications No Power Supply for the Circuit
Breaker Communication Module
1 If circuit breaker has 100 Vac or more between two phases or phase to neutral and is bottom fed or closed in a top fed application.
2 Ground-fault push-to-trip button will also be functional if hand-held test kit or full-function test kit is powering the trip unit.
Additional Characteristics for Type P and H Trip Units
• Setting the display language: System messages can be displayed in six different languages
(English - US, English - UK, French, German, Spanish, and Italian). The desired language is
selected via the keypad.
• Protection functions: All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. Voltage-
based protection functions are connected to ac power via a voltage measurement input built into
the circuit breaker on the bottom side. An optional external voltage measurement is available as a
factory-installed option.
• Accuracy of measurements (including sensors):
— Voltage (V) 1%
— Current (A) 1.5% (higher accuracy [1%] may be achieved with special calibration on the current
transformer [CT characterization option])
— Frequency (Hz) 0.1 Hz
— Power (W) and energy (Wh) 2.5%
The Micrologic H trip unit uses a dedicated metering data chain separate from the protection data
chain so that a greater number of data samples can be used for metering. This increases the
number of samples taken per time period, which in turn gives the H trip unit a higher degree of
metering accuracy.
51
All Rights Reserved
™
• Stored information: The fine setting adjustments, the last 100 events and the maintenance record
remain in the trip unit memory even when power is lost.
• Reset: An individual reset, via the keypad or remotely, will reset alarms, minimum and maximum
data, peak values, counters and indicators.
Micrologic™ Trip Unit Functions
Long-time
Long-Time Trip Functions
Pickup
Long-time The long-time pickup switch sets the maximum current level the circuit breaker will
long time Delay
Ir .8 tr
(s) 4
8
alarm carry continuously. The maximum current level (Ir) is the long-time pickup setting
.7 .9 12
.6 .95 2 16
Alarm
multiplied by the sensor plug amperage (In). If the current exceeds this value for longer
.5 .98 1 20
.4
x In
1 .5 24
6 Ir Indicator than the long-time delay time, the circuit breaker will trip.
Isd
4
tsd
(s) .4 .4 .3
Ii
6 8 10
The long-time delay switch sets the length of time that the circuit breaker will carry a
3 5
2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12
sustained overload before tripping. Delay bands are labeled in seconds of overcurrent
2 8 .2 . 3 15
1.5
Ir
10
on
.1 0
I2t off
2
In
off at six times the ampere rating. For maximum coordination, there are eight delay bands.
setting delay
test Long-time delay is an “inverse time” characteristic in that the delay time decreases as
Ig tg
D
E
F (s) .4 .4 .3 the current increases.
C G .3 .2
H .2 .
A
on
.1 0
I2t off
The trip unit includes an alarm indicator that will be lit continuously when the current is
ground fault
above 100% of the pickup setting.
Long-time Trip Functions
Short-Time Trip Functions

Short-time The short-time pickup switch sets the short-circuit current level at which the circuit
long time Pickup
Ir
.7
.8
.9
tr
(s) 4
8
12
alarm breaker will trip after the set short-time delay. The short-time current (Isd) equals the
Short-time
.6
.5
.95 2
.98 1
16
20 Delay short-time pickup setting multiplied by the long-time pickup (Ir).
.4 1 .5 24
x In 6 Ir Instantaneous
The short-time delay switch sets the length of time the circuit breaker will carry a short
Isd tsd Ii
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10 circuit within the short-time pickup range. The delay (based on 10 times the ampere
2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12
2 8 .2 . 3 15 rating Ir) can be adjusted to four positions of I2t ramp operation (I2t ON) or five
.1 0
1.5
Ir
10
on I2t off
2
In
off
positions of fixed time delays (I2t OFF). I2t ON delay is an “inverse time” characteristic
setting delay
test
Ig
E
tg
(s) .4 .4 .3
in that the delay time decreases as the current increases. Short-time delay for the 2.0
D F
C G .3 .2 trip unit is fixed at a delay band of 20 to 80 ms.
H .2 .
A .1 0
on I2t off
ground fault Instantaneous Trip Function
The instantaneous pickup switch sets the short-circuit current level at which the circuit
Short-time Trip Functions breaker will trip with no intentional time delay. The instantaneous current (Ii) is equal to
the instantaneous pickup setting multiplied by the sensor plug amperage (In).
The instantaneous function will override the short-time function if the instantaneous
pickup is adjusted at the same or lower setting than the short-time pickup. In trip units
with both adjustable short-time and instantaneous trip functions, the adjustable
instantaneous trip can be disabled by setting Instantaneous pickup to OFF.
52
All Rights Reserved
™
Ground-Fault Trip Functions
The ground-fault pickup switch sets the current level at which the circuit breaker will trip
long time
Ir
.7
.8
.9
tr
(s) 4
8
12
alarm after the set ground-fault delay. Ground-fault pickup values (Ig) are based on circuit
.6
.5
.95 2
.98 1
16
20
breaker sensor plug (In) only, not on the rating plug multiplier (Ir). Changing the rating
.4
x In
1 .5
6 Ir
24 plug multiplier has no effect on ground-fault pickup values.
short time instantaneous Ground-fault
Isd
3
4
5
tsd
(s) .4 .4 .3
Ii
6 8 10
Pickup The ground-fault delay switch sets the length of time the circuit breaker will carry
2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12
2 8 .2 . 3 15 Ground-fault ground-fault current which exceeds the ground-fault pickup level before tripping. The
.1 0
1.5
Ir
10
on I2t off
2
In
off Delay delay, based on the sensor plug amperage (In), can be adjusted to four positions of I2t
setting delay
Ig tg
test
ramp operation (I2t ON) or five positions of fixed time delays (I2t OFF). I2t ON delay is
D
E
F (s) .4 .4 .3
C G .3 .2 an “inverse time” characteristic in that the delay time decreases as the current
H .2 .
A
on
.1 0
I2t off
increases.
ground fault
53
All Rights Reserved
™
Smart System Communication Wiring System
Wiring System ULP
The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power switchboards. Installation does not require
special tools or training. The prefabricated wiring ensures both data transmission (Modbus protocol)
and 24 Vdc power distribution for the communications modules on the Micrologic trip units.
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
H
H
H
I I
I
J
J
K K K
A. FDM128 display for 8 LV devices G. PowerPact H-, J-, or L-frame circuit breaker
B. IFE Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker and gateway H. ULP line terminator
C. IFM Modbus-SL interface for LV circuit breaker I. ULP cable
D. FDM121 display for LV circuit breaker J. Breaker ULP cord
E. IO input/output interface module for LV circuit breaker K. NSX cord
F. Masterpact NT/NW circuit breaker L. PowerPact P/R or Compact NS
54
All Rights Reserved
™
Four Functional Levels

The PowerPact and Compact devices can be integrated into Ethernet and Modbus communication
environment.
There are four possible functional levels that can be combined.
Functional Level Switch Circuit Breaker

Status Indications
ON/OFF (O/F) X A P H
Spring charged X A P H
Ready to close X A P H
Fault-trip SDE X A P H
Connected / disconnected / test position CE/CD/CT (CCM only) — A P H
Controls
MX1 shunt trip X A P H
XF shunt close X A P H
Measurements
Instantaneous measurement information — A P H
Averaged measurement information — — H
Maximum / minimum Ammeter — A P H
Energy metering — — P H
Demand for current and power — — P H
Power quality — — — H
A: Micrologic trip unit with Operating Assistance
ammeter
Protection and alarm settings — — P H
P: Micrologic trip unit
“Power” Histories — — P H
H: Micrologic trip unit Time stamped event tables — — P H
“Harmonics” Maintenance indicators — A P H
NOTE: See the section on
the Micrologic trip units for
details about the trip units. Modbus Principle
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating Modbus devices
(Masterpact NW with Modbus COM, Power Meter PM700, PM800, PowerPact P/R-frame, etc.) are
installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus.
Addresses
The Modbus communication parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered using the keypad on
the Micrologic A, P, or H trip unit. For a switch, it is necessary to use the Electrical Asset Manager or
Remote Setting Utility (RSU) Micrologic utility.
Number of Devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus depends on the type of
device (PowerPact circuit breaker with Modbus COM, PM700, PM800, Masterpact circuit breaker,
etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data exchanged and the desired response
time. The RS 485 physical layer offers up to thirty-two connection points on the bus (one master, thirty-
one slaves).
Length of Bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 3940 feet (1200 meters).
Bus Power Source
A 24 Vdc power supply is required (less than 20% ripple, insulation class II).
55
All Rights Reserved
™
Ethernet Principle
Ethernet is a data link and physical layer protocol defined by IEEE 802 10 and 100 Mbps specifications
that connects computer or other Ethernet devices. Ethernet is an asynchronous Carrier Sense Multiple
Access with Collision detection (referred as CSMA/CD) protocol. Carrier Sense means that the hosts
can detect whether the medium (coaxial cable) is idle or busy.
Multiple Access means that multiple hosts can be connected to the common medium. Collision
Detection means a host detects whether its transmission has collided with the transmission of another
host (or hosts).
IFE Ethernet interface can be connected to a PC or a laptop over Ethernet. The maximum length of
Ethernet cable is 325 feet (100 meters). IFE Ethernet interface + gateway provides a Modbus TCP/IP
gateway over Ethernet to enable Modbus TCP communication from a Modbus TCP master to any
Modbus slave devices connected to it. The maximum active Modbus TCP client connection is twelve.
IFE Ethernet interface has an embedded web server (web page).
COM Option in PowerPact and Compact Circuit Breakers
All PowerPact and Compact devices can be fitted with the communication function thanks to the COM
option. PowerPact and Compact uses the Ethernet or Modbus communications protocol for full
compatibility with the supervision management systems.
For fixed and drawout devices, the common communication option is made up of:
• A BCM ULP module, installed behind the Micrologic trip unit and supplied with a set of switches
(OF, SDE, PF and CH switches), a kit for connection to shunt close (XF) and shunt trip (MX1)
communicating voltage releases (for electrically operated devices), and a COM terminal block
(inputs E1 to E6).
This module is independent of the trip unit and receives and transmits information on the
communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the trip unit and the
communication module.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
BCM ULP Module and
• The IFM module, the Modbus interface for connection to the network, contains the Modbus address
(1 to 99) declared by the user using the two dials in front. It automatically adapts (baud rate, parity)
to the Modbus network in which it is installed.
or
• The IFE module, the Ethernet interface for low-voltage circuit breakers, enables an intelligent
modular unit (IMU) such as a Masterpact NT/NW or PowerPact circuit breaker to be connected to
an Ethernet network. Each circuit breaker has its own IFE and a corresponding IP address.
For drawout device the Cradle Management option must be added:
The I/O (Input/Output) application module for low-voltage circuit breakers is delivered with the drawout
devices ordered with the COM option for cradle management. It must be installed on a steel DIN rail
that is properly grounded near the device. The I/O module must be connected to the ULP system and
to the cradle position contacts (CD, CT, CE) that transmit the position of the circuit breaker in the
cradle.
For communicating remote control for electrically operated devices, shunt close (XF) and shunt trip
I/O Application Module (MX1) communicating voltage releases must be added:
The shunt close (XF) and shunt trip (MX1) communicating voltage releases are equipped for
connection to the communication module.
The remote-tripping function shunt trip (MX2) and undervoltage release (MN) are independent of the
communication option. They are not equipped for connection to the communication module.
56
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 4: Communication Connections
Fixed Devices Drawout Devices
Ethernet Modbus Ethernet Modbus Ethernet Modbus
DB417123.eps
DB417122.eps
24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
C
24VD C
C 24VD
24VD
ETH2
E TH2
ETH2 ET H2
JJ JJ
ETH2
II
ETH1
ETH2 E TH1
JJ
ETH1 ETH1 ETH1
II
E TH1
II
set)
(factory set)
Y.ZZ set) (factory
IFE_
XX.Y (factory XX.Y
Y.ZZ
CT Y.ZZ IFE_
00/A XX.Y CT
10-1 IFE_ 00/A
1 LK/ 00/A
CT 10-1
IFE ETH
00/A
CT 10-1 1 LK/
2 LK/
10-1 ETH
1 LK/
CT IF E ETH
00/A
CT
ETH us IFE 00/A 2 LK/
10-1
ule Stat 2 LK/
10-1 ETH us
Mod ETH us ule Stat
us ule Stat Mod
k Stat Mod us
Networ us k Stat
bus-SL k Stat Networ
Mod Networ bus-SL
bus-SL Mod
Mod
11
LV4340 11
11 LV4340
LV4340
or or
or
I6
I6 C
C I5
I5 I4
C
ULP system
I4 I3
C I2
I3 C
I2 I1
C
I1
I6
I6 C
C I5
I5 I4
I4 C
C I3
I3 I2
I2 C
C I1
I1
+ C
+ C 24VD
24VD
A1
A1
A1
O1
O1 I1
I1 O2
O2 I2
I2 O3
O3 I3
I3 APP
APP I4
I4
I5
I5
I6
I6
ule
odule IO Mod
H
IO M
HH O3 T1
A1
T2 O3 T1
A1
T2
H
34
34 O2 33
F
O2 33 24
24 O1 23
O1 23 14
14 13
13
F
G
G G
G
FF FF
B
B E E
E
E
C CC
AA C
D
B
D
B A BD
AA
A
A. BCM ULP
B. OF, SDE, SD, PF, CH (tripped, Open/closed, overcurrent trip, ready to close, charged Switches
C. COM Terminal Block (E1 to E6)
D. Shunt Trip (MX1) and Shunt Close (XF)
E. CE, CD, and CT (connected, disconnected, test) Contacts
F. Circuit Breaker ULP Cord
G. I/O Application Module
H. ULP Cable
I. IFE Module
J. IFM Module
57
All Rights Reserved
™
IFE Ethernet Interface

IFE Interface, IFE Interface + Gateway Description
Introduction
The IFE interface and IFE interface + gateway enable low-voltage circuit breakers such as
Masterpact NT/NW or PowerPact P/R-frame to be connected to an Ethernet network.
IFE Interface
Provides Ethernet access to a single low-voltage circuit breaker.

Function: Interface - one circuit breaker is connected to the IFE interface using its ULP port.
IFE Interface IFE Interface + Gateway
Provides Ethernet access to one or several low-voltage circuit breakers.

Functions:
• Interface - one circuit breaker is connected to the IFE interface using its ULP port.
• Gateway: several circuit breakers on a Modbus network are connected using the IFE interface +
gateway master Modbus port.
IFE Interface, IFE Interface + Gateway Features
• Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
• Device profile web service for discovery of the IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway on the LAN.
IFE Interface + Gateway
• Ethernet interface for Masterpact and PowerPact circuit breakers.
• Gateway for Modbus-SL connected devices (IFE interface + gateway only).
• Embedded set-up web pages.
• Embedded monitoring web pages.
• Embedded control web pages.
• Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
Figure 5: IFE Interface, IFE Interface + Gateway Screen
58
All Rights Reserved
™
Mounting
The IFE interface and IFE interface + gateway are DIN rail mounting devices. A stacking accessory
enables the user to connect several IFMs (ULP to Modbus interfaces) to an IFE interface + gateway
without additional wiring.
24 Vdc Power Supply
The IFE interface and the IFE interface + gateway must always be supplied with 24 Vdc.
The IFMs stacked to an IFE interface + gateway have power supplied by the IFE interface + gateway,
thus it is not necessary to supply them separately. It is recommended to use a UL listed and
recognized limited voltage/limited current or a class 2 power supply with a 24 Vdc, 3 A maximum.
Required Circuit Breaker Communication Modules
The connection to an IFE interface or IFE interface + gateway requires a communication module
embedded into the circuit breaker:
• PowerPact and Compact circuit breakers: BCM ULP communication module
• Drawout PowerPact and Compact circuit breakers: BCM ULP and its respective I/O (Input/Output)
application module.
All connection configurations for the circuit breakers require the circuit breaker ULP cord. The
insulated NSX cord is mandatory for system voltages greater than 480 Vac. When the second ULP
RJ45 connector is not used, it must be closed with a ULP terminator (TRV00880).
Table 36: Network Communication Interface
Characteristic Value
Modbus RTU, RS485 serial connection
Type of interface module
Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet
• Transfer rate: 9,600–19,200 Baud
Modbus RS485 • Medium Double shielded twisted pair
• Impedance 120
Transmission
Transfer rate: 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet
Medium STP, Cat5e, straight cable
Type Modbus, Ethernet
Structure
Method Master/Slave
Modbus Master
Device type
Ethernet Server
Modbus 10 ms
Turnaround time
Ethernet 1 ms
Modbus 1000 m
Maximum length of cable
Ethernet 100 m
Modbus 4-pin connector
Type of bus connector
Ethernet RJ45 (Shielded)
59
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 37: Characteristics
General Characteristics IFE Web Page Description

Environmental Characteristics Monitoring Web Page
Conforming to standards UL 508, UL 60950, IEC 60950, 60947-6-2 Real time data X
Certification cUIUs, FCC, CE Device logging X
Storage: -40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C) Control Web Page
Ambient temperature
Operation: -13 to +158°F (-25 to +70°C) Single device control X
Protective Treatment ULVO, conforming to IEC 60068-2-30 Diagnostics Web Page
Pollution Level 3 Statistics X
Mechanical Characteristics Device information X
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 15g/11ms, 1/2 sinusoidal IMU (circuit breaker) information X
Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Read device registers X
Electrical Characteristics Communication check X
Power Supply 24 Vdc, -20%/+10% (19.2 to 26.4 Vdc) Maintenance Web Page
Typical: 4 Vdc, 120 mA at 68°F (20°C) Maintenance log X
Consumption
Maximum with gateway: 26.4 Vdc, 3 A at 140°F (60°C) Maintenance counters X
Physical Characteristics Setup Web Page
Dimensions 2.83 x 4.13 x 2.79 in. (72 x 105 x 71 mm) Device localization/name X
Mounting Mounting DIN rail Ethernet configuration (dual port) X
Weight 182.5 g (0.41 lb) IP configuration X
On the front panel (wall mounted enclosure): IP4x Modbus TCP/IP filtering X
Degree of protection of the installed module Connectors: IP2x Serial port X
Other parts: IP3x Date and time X
Connections Screw type terminal blocks E-mail server configuration X
Technical Characteristics - 24 Vdc Power Supply Alarms to be e-mailed X
Power supply type Regulated switch type Device list X
Rated power 72 W Device logging X
100–120 Vac for single phase Device log export X
Input voltage
200–500 Vac phase-to-phase SNMP parameters X
PFC filter With IEC 61000-3-2 Documentation links X
Output voltage 24 Vdc Preferences X
Power supply out current 3A Advanced services control X
User accounts X
NOTE: Use a UL Listed/UL Recognized limited voltage/limited current or a Class 2 power supply with a 24 Vdc, 3 A maximum.
A. Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 communication

II J
J K
K
port
B. 24 Vdc power supply terminal block
ETH1 ETH2
C. Ethernet communication LEDs:
• yellow: 10 Mb
• green: 100 Mb
24VDC
D. Module status LED:
IFE • steady off: no power
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT C • steady green: device operational

ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
C • steady red: major fault
Modbus-SL
Module Status D
D • flashing green: standby
ETH1 ETH2
Network Status
E • flashing red: minor fault
E • flashing green/red: self-test
T LV434011
E. Network status LED:
FF • steady off: no power/no valid IP address
• steady green: connected, valid IP address
R • steady orange: default IP address
A • steady red: duplicated IP address
A BB LL • flashing green/red: self-test
F. Sealable transparent cover
H
H G
G G. ULP status LED
H. Test button (accessible closed cover)
I. Locking pad
J. Modbus traffic status LED (IFE Interface +
Gateway only)
K. Device name label
L. ULP ports
60
All Rights Reserved
™
IFM Modbus Communication Interface
Function
An IFM Modbus communication interface is required for connection of a Masterpact or PowerPact
circuit breaker to a Modbus network as long as this circuit breaker is provided with a ULP (Universal
Logic Plug) port. The port is available on the BCM ULP.
Once connected, the circuit breaker is considered as a slave by the Modbus master. Its electrical
values, alarm status, open/close signals can be monitored or controlled by a Programmable Logic
Controller or any other system.
Characteristics
ULP Port
Two RJ45 sockets, internal parallel wiring.

• Connection of a single circuit breaker.
IFM Modbus • A ULP line terminator or an FDM121 display unit must be connected to the second RJ45 ULP
Communication Interface.
socket.
Ref.: TRV00210
• The RJ45 sockets deliver a 24 Vdc supply fed from the Modbus socket.
• Built-in test function, for checking the correct connection to the circuit breaker and FDM121 display
unit.
Modbus Slave Port
• Top socket for screw-clamp connector, providing terminals for:

— 24 Vdc input supply (0 V, +24 V)
— Modbus line (D1, D2, Gnd) 2-wire Modbus system.
• Lateral socket, for DIN-rail stackable connector. Both top and lateral sockets are internally parallel
wired.
• Multiple IFMs can be stacked, thus sharing a common power supply and Modbus line without
individual wiring.
• On the front face:
— Modbus address setting (1 to 99): two coded rotary switches
— Modbus locking pad: enables or disable the circuit breaker remote control and modification of
IFM parameters.
• Self-adjusting communication format (Baud rate, parity).
61
All Rights Reserved
™
A. Modbus Screw Clamp Connector

B. Modbus Address Switches
A
A C. Modbus Traffic LED
D. Modbus Locking Pad
E. ULP Activity LED
F. Test Button
G. Mechanical Lock
H. ULP RJ45 Connectors
I. Stacking Accessory Connection
BB
5
4 7
3 8
2 9
1 0
6
5
4 7
3 8
2
1 0
9
C
C
DD
Test E
E
FF
I
I HH G
G
Technical Characteristics
Table 38: IFM Modbus Communication Interface

Dimensions 0.71 x 2.83 x 3.78 in. (18 x 72 x 96 mm)
Maximum number of stacked IFM 12
Part projecting beyond the escutcheon IP4x
Degree of protection of the
Other module parts IP3x
installed module
Connectors IP2x
Operating temperature -25 to +70°C
Power supply voltage 24 Vdc -20%/+10% (19.2–26.4 Vdc)
Typical 21 mA/24 Vdc at 68°F (20°C)
Consumption
Maximum 30 mA/19.2 Vdc at 140°F (60°C)
CE IEC/EN 60947-1
UL UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment
No. 142-M1987 - Process Control Equipment
Certification
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M91 - General
CSA requirements - Canadian Electrical Code Part
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 - Industrial Control
Equipment
62
All Rights Reserved
™
Simplified IFM Installation
Stacking an IFM
Stacking Accessories
Up to 12 Stacked IFM
Stacking an IFE Interface + Gateway with IFMs
63
All Rights Reserved
™
I/O Application Module

Description
The I/O (Input/Output) application module for an low-voltage circuit breaker is part of an ULP system
with built-in functions and applications to enhance the application needs. The ULP system architecture
can be built without any restrictions using the wide range of circuit breakers.
The I/O application module is compliant with the ULP system specifications.
Two I/O application modules can be connected in the same ULP network.
The ranges of low-voltage circuit breakers enhanced by the I/O application module are:
• Masterpact NW
• Masterpact NT
I/O Application Module • PowerPact R-Frame
• PowerPact P-Frame
• Compact NS
I/O (Input/Output) Application Module for Low-Voltage Circuit Breaker Resources
The I/O application module resources are:

• Six digital inputs that are self powered for either NO and NC dry contact or pulse counter.
• Three digital outputs that are a bistable relay (5 A maximum).
• One analog input for PT100 temperature sensor.
Pre-Defined Application
The pre-defined application adds new functions to the I/O application module by:
• Selection by the application rotary switch on the I/O application module, defining the application
with pre-defined input/output assignment and wiring diagram.
• No additional setting with the customer engineering tool required.
The resources not assigned to the pre-defined application are free for additional user-defined applications:
• cradle management
• circuit breaker operation
• cradle management + ERMS (Energy Reduction Maintenance Setting)
NOTE: Use only Micrologic P or H trip units with the blue ERMS label for energy reduction
maintenance setting systems. Review the I/O module user guide 0613IB1317 and ERMS
installation instructions NHA67346 for details on installation, testing, and operation of the ERMS
system.
• light and load control
• custom
64
All Rights Reserved
™
User-Defined Applications
User-defined applications are processed by the I/O application module in addition to the pre-defined
application selected.
The user-defined applications are available depending on:
• the pre-defined application selected
• the I/O application module resources (inputs and outputs) not used by the application.
The resources required by user-defined applications are assigned using the customer engineering tool:
• protection
• control
• energy management
• monitoring
Mounting
The I/O application module is a DIN rail mounted device. Install on a steel DIN rail that is properly
grounded near the device.
Application Rotary Switch

The application rotary switch enables the selection of the pre-defined application. It has nine positions
4 5 6
and each position is assigned to a pre-defined application. The factory set position of the switch is pre-
defined application one.
3 7
2 8
1 9
Setting Locking Pad
The setting locking pad on the front panel of the I/O application module enables the setting of the I/O
application module by the customer engineering tool.
65
All Rights Reserved
™
General Characteristics
Conforming to standards UL 508, UL 60950, IED 60950, 60947-6-2
Certification cULus, EAC, FCC, CE
Environmental Storage: -40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C)
Ambient temperature
Characteristics Operation: -13 to +158°F (-25 to +70°C)
Protective Treatment ULVO, conforming to IEC 60068-2-30
Pollution Level 3
I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 15g/11ms,
Mechanical Shock resistance
1/2 sinusoidal
Characteristics
Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Power Supply 24 Vdc, -20%/+10% (19.2 to 26.4 Vdc)
Electrical
Characteristics Typical: 24 Vdc, 165 mA at 20°C
Consumption
A Maximum with gateway: 26.4 Vdc, 420 mA at 60°C
A B
B
Dimensions 2.83 x 4.52 X 2.79 in. (72 x 115 x 71 mm)
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 0.51 lb. (229.5 g)
Physical
24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
Characteristics • On the front panel (wall mounted enclosure): IP4x
Degree of protection of the installed
• I/O parts: IP3x
I/O application module
• Connectors: IP2x
CC
Connections Screw type terminal blocks
4 5 6
MM 3
2
7
8
I1
AI D
D Power supply type Regulated switch type
1 9 I2
APP
I3 O1
Rated power 72 W
LL I4 O2 E
E • 100–120 Vac for single phase
I5
Technical Input voltage
O3
• 200–500 Vac phase-to-phase maximum
I6 FF Characteristics
KK T PFC filter With IEC 61000-3-2
G
G 24 Vdc power
JJ IO LV434063
supply Output voltage 24 Vdc
Power supply out current 3A
NOTE: It is recommended to use an UL listed/UL listed recognized limited voltage/limited
current or a class 2 power supply with a 24 Vdc, 3 A maximum.
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2 Self powered digital input with current limitations as
Digital input type
per IEC 61131-2 type 2 standards (7 mA)
Input limit values at state 1 (close) 19.8–25.2 Vdc, 6.1–8.8 mA
Input limit values at state 0 (open 0–19.8 Vdc, 0 mA
II H
H Digital Inputs
Maximum cable length 33 ft (10 m)
NOTE: For a length greater than 10 m (33 ft) and up to 300 m (1,000 ft), it is mandatory to
use a shielded twisted cable. The shield cable is connected to the I/O functional ground of
the I/O application module.
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2 Digital output type Bistable relay
Rated load 5 A at 250 Vac
Rated carry current 5A
Maximum switching voltage 380 Vac, 125 Vdc
1
2
Maximum switch current 5A
Maximum switching power 1250 VA, 150 W
Digital Outputs
Minimum permissible load 10 mA at 5 Vdc
Contact resistance 30 m
O
O NN
• 18000 operations/hr (Mechanical)
A. 24 Vdc power supply terminal block. Maximum operating frequency
• 1800 operations/hr (Electrical)
B. Digital input terminal block:
6 inputs, 3 commons and 1 shield. Digital output relay protection by an
External fuse of 5 A or less
C. 6 input status LEDs. external fuse
D. Analog input status LED.
Maximum cable length 10 m (33 ft)
E. 3 output status LEDs.
F. I/O application module identification labels. The I/O application module analog input can be connected to a Pt100 temperature sensor
G. Sealable transparent cover.
Range -22 to 392°F (-30 to 200°C)
H. Analog input terminal block.
I. Digital output terminal blocks. Analog Inputs -22 to 68°F (-30 to 20°C): ±3.6°F (2°C)
J. ULP status LED. Accuracy 68 to 284°F (20 to 140°C): ±1.8°F (1°C)
K. Test/reset button (accessible with cover closed). 284 to 392°F (140 to 200°C): ±3.6°F (2°C)
L. Setting locking pad.
Refresh interval 5s
M. Application rotary switch: 1 to 9.
N. Switch for I/O addressing (I/O 1 or I/O 2).
O. ULP connectors.
66
All Rights Reserved
™
Electrical Asset Manager Configuration Engineering Tool (Ecoreach™)
Introduction
The Ecoreach engineering tool is a software application that helps the user to manage a project as part
of designing, testing, site commissioning, and maintenance of the project life cycle. It enables the user
to prepare the settings of the devices offline (without connecting to the device) and configure them
when connected with the devices. It also provides other value-added features for the user to manage
the project such as: safe repository in cloud, attach artifacts to each device or at the project level,
organize devices in switchboard, manage a hierarchical structure of the installation, etc.
Compatible Devices (Configuration and Device Management)
The Ecoreach engineering tool is compatible with the following devices:

• Compact NSX100-630 (IEC) circuit breakers
• PowerPact (UL) circuit breakers
• Compact NS630b-3200 (IEC) circuit breakers
• Masterpact NT/NW (IEC and UL) circuit breakers
• Compatible devices (Device Management in the project)
• Switches (Compact NSX, Masterpact & PowerPact Family)
• Third party devices
References:
The Ecoreach software package can be downloaded from our website:
www.schneider-electric.com
67
All Rights Reserved
™
Features
The Ecoreach engineering tool includes the Schneider Electric customer engineering tools such as the
Remote Setting Utility (RSU) and Remote Control Utility (RCU) with additional features.
The Ecoreach engineering tool supports the connection of Schneider Electric communicable devices to:
• create projects by device discovery, selection of devices, and importing a Bill of Material (BOM)
• monitor the status of protection and I/O status
• read information (alarms, measurements, parameters)
• check protection discrimination between two devices
• upload and download of configuration or settings in batch mode to multiple devices.
• carry out commands and tests
• generate and print a device settings report and communication test report
• manage multiple devices with a electrical and communication hierarchy model
• manage artifacts (project documents)
• check consistency in settings between devices on a communication network
• compare configuration settings between PC and device (online)
• download latest firmware
The Ecoreach engineering tool enables the user to access the advanced features of the software once
the project is saved in the Schneider Electric cloud.
68
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 4—PowerPact M-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Performance
PowerPact M-frame molded case circuit breakers provide improved performance and a compact solution
for applications up to 800 A. They complement the existing PowerPact P- and R-frame circuit breakers,
and replace the traditional MA/MH circuit breakers with a smaller footprint and competitive cost.
• Available in 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, and 800 A ratings
• Available in two- and three-pole unit-mount and I-Line versions
Table 39: Termination Options
Termination
Frame Termination Option
Letter
M-Frame Unit-Mount F No Lugs
L Lugs both ends
M-Frame
M Lugs ON end Terminal Nut Kit Off end
P Lugs OFF end Terminal Nut Kit On end
For factory-installed termination, place termination letter

in the third block of the circuit breaker catalog number.
M G L 3 6 4 0 0 or D G L 3 6 4 0 0 E 2 0
Termination
Letter
M-Frame I-Line
• Built-in electronic trip unit type ET 1.0 provides better accuracy than standard thermal-magnetic trip
units. The ET 1.0 trip unit cannot be field replaced, nor does it allow adjustment of the trip point
setting. (It is considered an electronic equivalent of a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.)
• FIxed long-time and adjustable instantaneous protection (2 to 10 times nominal ampere rating) is
standard.
• Same dimensions, common mounting, bussing, cabling and door cut-out as PowerPact P-frame
circuit breakers.
• Approximately 15% smaller installed volume than the MA/MH circuit breakers.
• A full range of electrical accessories are available:
— Shunt trip (various AC and DC voltages are available)
— Undervoltage trip (various AC and DC voltages are available)
— Time delayed undervoltage trip (various AC and DC voltages are available)
— Auxiliary switches (up to 3A/3B); low-level switches are also available (voltage and amperage)
— Alarm switch (1A/1B); low-level switches are also available (voltage and amperage)
— Overcurrent trip switch (SDE)
• A full range of mechanical accessories are available:
— Standard mechanical lugs (aluminum or copper)
— Crimp (compression) lugs (aluminum or copper)
— Power distribution lugs (aluminum only)
— Bus connector kit
— Inter-phase barriers
— Door escutcheons (for toggle or accessory cover)
— Padlocking device (removable or fixed version), complies with OSHA requirements
— Key-lock device (Kirk® or Schneider Electric™ keylocks)
69
All Rights Reserved
™
Catalog Numbers
Table 40: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable 1.0 Electronic Trip (Fixed Long-Time and Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Settings)
Current Rating
Type Poles
300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A
MG 2 MGL26300 MGL26350 MGL26400 MGL26450 MGL26500 MGL26600 MGL26700 MGL26800
MJ 2 MJL26300 MJL26350 MJL26400 MJL26450 MJL26500 MJL26600 MJL26700 MJL26800
MG 3 MGL36300 MGL36350 MGL36400 MGL36450 MGL36500 MGL36600 MGL36700 MGL36800
MJ 3 MJL36300 MJL36350 MJL36400 MJL36450 MJL36500 MJL36600 MJL36700 MJL36800
Table 41: UL/IEC Rated, I-Line™, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable 1.0 Electronic Trip (Fixed Long-Time and Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Settings)
Current Rating
Type Poles
300 A 350 A 400 A 450 A 500 A 600 A 700 A 800 A
MG1 2 MGA263002 MGA263502 MGA264002 MGA264502 MGA265002 MGA266002 MGA267002 MGA268002
MJ1 2 MJA263002 MJA263502 MJA264002 MJA264502 MJA265002 MJA266002 MJA267002 MJA268002
MG2 3 MGA36300 MGA36350 MGA36400 MGA36450 MGA36500 MGA36600 MGA36700 MGA36800
MJ2 3 MJA36300 MJA36350 MJA36400 MJA36450 MJA36500 MJA36600 MJA36700 MJA36800
1 Suffix 2 is for AC phasing (standard offer), or use 5 for CA phasing (option).
2 No suffix is for ABC phasing (standard offer), or use 6 for CBA phasing (option).
Interrupting Ratings
Table 42: Interrupting Ratings
Circuit IEC 60947-2

Mounting UL/CSA/NMX
Breaker 240 Vac 380/415 Vac
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Icu Ics Icu Ics
Individually- MG 65 kA 35 kA 18 KA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
Mounted MJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
M-Frame Unit-Mount MG 65 kA 35 kA 18 KA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
I-Line
MJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
Termination Information
Unit-mount circuit breakers have mechanical lugs standard on both ends. I-Line circuit breakers have
lugs standard on the O/OFF end. These lugs accept aluminum or copper wire. See Table 91 on page
114 for more lug options.
Accessories
M-Frame I-Line
Accessories are available either factory- or field-installed. They can be installed in accessory compartments
behind the circuit breaker accessory cover. See Table 67 on page 100 for available accessories.
70
All Rights Reserved
™
Control Wiring
Control wiring is connected to terminals located under the circuit breaker accessory cover.
NOTE: All diagrams show circuit breaker in open position.
Figure 6: Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams
Function Connector Description

Open/Closed Circuit Breaker
Auxiliary OF
Position Contacts
Contacts
SD Bell Alarm
Remote MN Undervoltage Trip Device
Operation MX Shunt Trip
Remote Operation Alarm Contacts
Tripped
Closed
OF1
MN/M
Open
11 12 14
Fault
D1/C1 OF2
21 22 24
D2/C2
C2
D2
OF3
31 32 34
32
34
22
24
12
14
82
84
92
94
SD
91 92 94
MN M
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD
81
82 or
84
SDE
D1
C1
31
21
11
81
91
71
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 5—PowerPact P-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Performance
Providing unparalleled performance and control, the P-frame circuit breakers features the exclusive
Micrologic electronic trip units, which allow for a range of sophisticated applications for metering and
monitoring. In addition, trip units can be interchanged in the field to allow for maximum flexibility.
The compact size and small footprint of the P-frame circuit breaker permits high density installations in
I-Line panelboards and switchboards. These circuit breakers are available in 100% rated construction
for all unit-mount circuit breakers and up to 800 A in I-Line circuit breakers to meet a broad range of
commercial and industrial application needs.
• Both standard (80%) and 100% rated construction circuit breakers are available in 1200 A with a
sensor size range of 250–1200 A.
• Interrupting ratings (AIR):
P-Frame Unit-Mount Voltage G J K L
240 Vac 65 kA 100 kA 65 kA 125 kA
480 Vac 35 kA 65 kA 50 kA 100 kA
600 Vac 18 kA 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA
• The P-frame circuit breakers with K interrupting rating are recommended for applications having
high inrush and/or non-linear loads such as large motors, transformers, motors with soft starts, etc.
• Compact circuit breaker size allows for small footprint installations using I-Line panelboards and
switchboards. Nine inch width provides increased density installation.
P-Frame I-Line • Most field-installable accessories are common to all frame sizes for easier stocking and installation
• Selection of four interchangeable Micrologic trip units available, with Powerlogic power metering
and monitoring capabilities available in advanced trip units.
• Field-installable sensor plugs (after January 2007). See Table 79 on page 108.
• Compatible with Powerlogic systems and high amperage power circuit breakers.
• Built-in Modbus protocol provides an open communications platform and eliminates the need to
purchase additional, proprietary network solutions.
• Connection options include bus, cable or I-Line for installation flexibility.
• Additional options are available for 5-cycle closing, stored energy mechanisms and drawout-
P-Frame Drawout mounting.
72
All Rights Reserved
™
Catalog Numbers
Table 43: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount1, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with Basic
Electronic Trip and Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Unit
Circuit Breaker Catalog Number2

Trip Unit
Current Rating (Sensor Rating)
Type 250 A3 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A

ET1.0I — — PGL36060 PGL36080 PGL36100 PGL36120
Basic Electronic
Trip Unit 2P4, 3P — — PJL36060 PJL36080 PJL36100 PJL36120
(Not Fixed — — PKL36060 PKL36080 PKL36100 PKL36120
Interchangeable) Long-time
— — PLL34060 PLL34080 PLL34100 PLL34120
PGL36025U31A PGL36040U31A PGL36060U31A PGL36080U31A PGL36100U31A PGL36120U31A
3.0 (LI)
PJL36025U31A PJL36040U31A PJL36060U31A PJL36080U31A PJL36100U31A PJL36120U31A
3P,
PKL36025U31A PKL36040U31A PKL36060U31A PKL36080U31A PKL36100U31A PKL36120U31A
Micrologic 4P5 (G & K only)
Interchangeable PLL34025U31A PLL34040U31A PLL34060U31A PLL34080U31A PLL34100U31A PLL34120U31A
Standard Trip PGL36025U33A PGL36040U33A PGL36060U33A PGL36080U33A PGL36100U33A PGL36120U33A
Unit 5.0 (LSI)
3P
4P5 (G & K only)
PLL34025U33A PLL34040U33A PLL34060U33A PLL34080U33A PLL34100U33A PLL34120U33A
3.0A (LI)
3P
4P5 (G & K only)
Micrologic 5.0A (LSI)
Interchangeable PJL36025U43A PJL36040U43A PJL36060U43A PJL36080U43A PJL36100U43A PJL36120U43A
3P
Ammeter Trip PKL36025U43A PKL36040U43A PKL36060U43A PKL36080U43A PKL36100U43A PKL36120U43A
Unit6 4P5 (G & K only)
6.0A (LSIG)
3P
4P5 (G & K only)
PGL36025U63AE1 PGL36040U63AE1 PGL36060U63AE1 PGL36080U63AE1 PGL36100U63AE1 PGL36120U63AE1
5.0P (LSI)
PJL36025U63AE1 PJL36040U63AE1 PJL36060U63AE1 PJL36080U63AE1 PJL36100U63AE1 PJL36120U63AE1
3P
Micrologic PKL36025U63AE1 PKL36040U63AE1 PKL36060U63AE1 PKL36080U63AE1 PKL36100U63AE1 PKL36120U63AE1
4P5 (G & K only)
Interchangeable PLL34025U63AE1 PLL34040U63AE1 PLL34060U63AE1 PLL34080U63AE1 PLL34100U63AE1 PLL34120U63AE1
Power Trip Unit
with Modbus® PGL36025U64AE1 PGL36040U64AE1 PGL36060U64AE1 PGL36080U64AE1 PGL36100U64AE1 PGL36120U64AE1
6.0P (LSIG)
Communications PJL36025U64AE1 PJL36040U64AE1 PJL36060U64AE1 PJL36080U64AE1 PJL36100U64AE1 PJL36120U64AE1
3P
PKL36025U64AE1 PKL36040U64AE1 PKL36060U64AE1 PKL36080U64AE1 PKL36100U64AE1 PKL36120U64AE1
4P5 (G & K only)
PLL34025U64AE1 PLL34040U64AE1 PLL34060U64AE1 PLL34080U64AE1 PLL34100U64AE1 PLL34120U64AE1
PGL36025U73AE1 PGL36040U73AE1 PGL36060U73AE1 PGL36080U73AE1 PGL36100U73AE1 PGL36120U73AE1
5.0H (LSI)
PJL36025U73AE1 PJL36040U73AE1 PJL36060U73AE1 PJL36080U73AE1 PJL36100U73AE1 PJL36120U73AE1
Micrologic 3P
Interchangeable 4P5 (G & K only)
Harmonic Trip PLL34025U73AE1 PLL34040U73AE1 PLL34060U73AE1 PLL34080U73AE1 PLL34100U73AE1 PLL34120U73AE1
Unit with PGL36025U74AE1 PGL36040U74AE1 PGL36060U74AE1 PGL36080U74AE1 PGL36100U74AE1 PGL36120U74AE1
Modbus 6.0H (LSIG)
Communications PJL36025U74AE1 PJL36040U74AE1 PJL36060U74AE1 PJL36080U74AE1 PJL36100U74AE1 PJL36120U74AE1
3P
4P5 (G & K only)
PLL34025U74AE1 PLL34040U74AE1 PLL34060U74AE1 PLL34080U74AE1 PLL34100U74AE1 PLL34120U74AE1
1 Catalog numbers are for circuit breakers with lugs on line and load ends. Consult the Product Selector for catalog numbers for circuit breakers with alternate terminations.
2 The L interrupting rating at 600 Vac is 25 kA.
3 250 A is not available as a four-pole circuit breaker.
4 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (PGL36025 becomes PGL26025).
5 For 4P (available in G and K interrupting levels only), replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (PGL36040U31A becomes PGL46040U31A).
6 Add E1 suffix for Modbus communications.
73
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 44: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount1, Manually-Operated, 100%-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with
Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units
Trip Unit,
Interchangeable Circuit Breaker Catalog Number2
3P, 4P
Type 250 A3 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A

Micrologic Interchangeable Standard Trip Unit
PGL36025CU31A PGL36040CU31A PGL36060CU31A PGL36080CU31A PGL36100CU31A PGL36120CU31A
3.0 (LI)
PJL36025CU31A PJL36040CU31A PJL36060CU31A PJL36080CU31A PJL36100CU31A PJL36120CU31A
3P
PKL36025CU31A PKL36040CU31A PKL36060CU31A PKL36080CU31A PKL36100CU31A PKL36120CU31A
4P4 (G & K only)
PLL34025CU31A PLL34040CU31A PLL34060CU31A PLL34080CU31A PLL34100CU31A PLL34120CU31A
5.0 (LSI)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
Micrologic Interchangeable Ammeter Trip Unit5
3.0A (LI)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
5.0A (LSI)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
6.0A (LSIG)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
Micrologic Interchangeable Power Trip Unit with Modbus® Communications
PGL36025CU63AE1 PGL36040CU63AE1 PGL36060CU63AE1 PGL36080CU63AE1 PGL36100CU63AE1 PGL36120CU63AE1
5.0P (LSI)
PJL36025CU63AE1 PJL36040CU63AE1 PJL36060CU63AE1 PJL36080CU63AE1 PJL36100CU63AE1 PJL36120CU63AE1
3P
PKL36025CU63AE1 PKL36040CU63AE1 PKL36060CU63AE1 PKL36080CU63AE1 PKL36100CU63AE1 PKL36120CU63AE1
4P4 (G & K only)
PLL34025CU63AE1 PLL34040CU63AE1 PLL34060CU63AE1 PLL34080CU63AE1 PLL34100CU63AE1 PLL34120CU63AE1
6.0P (LSIG)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
Micrologic Interchangeable Harmonic Trip Unit with Modbus Communications
5.0H (LSI)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
6.0H (LSIG)
3P
4P4 (G & K only)
1 Catalog numbers are for circuit breakers with lugs on line and load ends. Consult the product selector for catalog numbers for circuit breakers with alternate
terminations.
3 250 A is not available as a four pole circuit breaker.
4 For 4P (available in G and K interrupting levels only), replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (PGL36040CU31A becomes
PGL46040CU31A).
74
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 45: UL/IEC Rated, I-Line, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with Basic
Electronic Trip and Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units

Trip Unit
Type2 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A
ET1.0I — — PGA36060 PGA36080 PGA36100 PGA36120

Basic Electronic
Trip Unit 2P3, 3P — — PJA36060 PJA36080 PJA36100 PJA36120
Not Fixed — — PKA36060 PKA36080 PKA36100 PKA36120
Interchangeable Long-time — — PLA34060 PLA34080 PLA34100 PLA34120
PGA36025U31A PGA36040U31A PGA36060U31A PGA36080U31A PGA36100U31A PGA36120U31A
3.0 (LI) PJA36025U31A PJA36040U31A PJA36060U31A PJA36080U31A PJA36100U31A PJA36120U31A
3P PKA36025U31A PKA36040U31A PKA36060U31A PKA36080U31A PKA36100U31A PKA36120U31A
Micrologic
Interchangeable PLA34025U31A PLA34040U31A PLA34060U31A PLA34080U31A PLA34100U31A PLA34120U31A
Standard Trip PGA36025U33A PGA36040U33A PGA36060U33A PGA36080U33A PGA36100U33A PGA36120U33A
Unit
5.0 (LSI) PJA36025U33A PJA36040U33A PJA36060U33A PJA36080U33A PJA36100U33A PJA36120U33A
PLA34025U33A PLA34040U33A PLA34060U33A PLA34080U33A PLA34100U33A PLA34120U33A
3.0A (LI) PJA36025U41A PJA36040U41A PJA36060U41A PJA36080U41A PJA36100U41A PJA36120U41A
Micrologic
Interchangeable 5.0A (LSI) PJA36025U43A PJA36040U43A PJA36060U43A PJA36080U43A PJA36100U43A PJA36120U43A
Ammeter Trip 3P PKA36025U43A PKA36040U43A PKA36060U43A PKA36080U43A PKA36100U43A PKA36120U43A
Unit4
6.0A (LSIG) PJA36025U44A PJA36040U44A PJA36060U44A PJA36080U44A PJA36100U44A PJA36120U44A
PGA36025U63AE1 PGA36040U63AE1 PGA36060U63AE1 PGA36080U63AE1 PGA36100U63AE1 PGA36120U63AE1
5.0P (LSI) PJA36025U63AE1 PJA36040U63AE1 PJA36060U63AE1 PJA36080U63AE1 PJA36100U63AE1 PJA36120U63AE1
Micrologic 3P PKA36025U63AE1 PKA36040U63AE1 PKA36060U63AE1 PKA36080U63AE1 PKA36100U63AE1 PKA36120U63AE1

Interchangeable PLA34025U63AE1 PLA34040U63AE1 PLA34060U63AE1 PLA34080U63AE1 PLA34100U63AE1 PLA34120U63AE1
Power Trip Unit
with Modbus® PGA36025U64AE1 PGA36040U64AE1 PGA36060U64AE1 PGA36080U64AE1 PGA36100U64AE1 PGA36120U64AE1
Communications 6.0P (LSIG) PJA36025U64AE1 PJA36040U64AE1 PJA36060U64AE1 PJA36080U64AE1 PJA36100U64AE1 PJA36120U64AE1
3P PKA36025U64AE1 PKA36040U64AE1 PKA36060U64AE1 PKA36080U64AE1 PKA36100U64AE1 PKA36120U64AE1
PLA34025U64AE1 PLA34040U64AE1 PLA34060U64AE1 PLA34080U64AE1 PLA34100U64AE1 PLA34120U64AE1
PGA36025U73AE1 PGA36040U73AE1 PGA36060U73AE1 PGA36080U73AE1 PGA36100U73AE1 PGA36120U73AE1
5.0H (LSI) PJA36025U73AE1 PJA36040U73AE1 PJA36060U73AE1 PJA36080U73AE1 PJA36100U73AE1 PJA36120U73AE1
Micrologic 3P PKA36025U73AE1 PKA36040U73AE1 PKA36060U73AE1 PKA36080U73AE1 PKA36100U73AE1 PKA36120U73AE1
Interchangeable
Harmonic Trip PLA34025U73AE1 PLA34040U73AE1 PLA34060U73AE1 PLA34080U73AE1 PLA34100U73AE1 PLA34120U73AE1
Unit with PGA36025U74AE1 PGA36040U74AE1 PGA36060U74AE1 PGA36080U74AE1 PGA36100U74AE1 PGA36120U74AE1
Modbus
Communications 6.0H (LSIG) PJA36025U74AE1 PJA36040U74AE1 PJA36060U74AE1 PJA36080U74AE1 PJA36100U74AE1 PJA36120U74AE1
3P PKA36025U74AE1 PKA36040U74AE1 PKA36060U74AE1 PKA36080U74AE1 PKA36100U74AE1 PKA36120U74AE1
PLA34025U74AE1 PLA34040U74AE1 PLA34060U74AE1 PLA34080U74AE1 PLA34100U74AE1 PLA34120U74AE1
2 For 3P, no suffix is for ABC phasing (standard offer), or use 6 for CBA phasing (option).
3 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (PGA36025 becomes PGA26025). Add the suffix 2 for AC phasing (standard offer),
or use 5 for CA phasing (option).
75
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 46: UL/IEC Rated, I-Line, Manually-Operated, 100%-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with Micrologic™
Electronic Trip Units
Trip Unit, Circuit Breaker1

Interchangeable Current Rating (Sensor Rating)
Type2 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A

PGA36025CU31A PGA36040CU31A PGA36060CU31A PGA36080CU31A
3.0 (LI) PJA36025CU31A PJA36040CU31A PJA36060CU31A PJA36080CU31A
3P PKA36025CU31A PKA36040CU31A PKA36060CU31A PKA36080CU31A
Micrologic PLA34025CU31A PLA34040CU31A PLA34060CU31A PLA34080CU31A
Interchangeable
Standard Trip Unit PGA36025CU33A PGA36040CU33A PGA36060CU33A PGA36080CU33A
5.0 (LSI) PJA36025CU33A PJA36040CU33A PJA36060CU33A PJA36080CU33A
PLA34025CU33A PLA34040CU33A PLA34060CU33A PLA34080CU33A
3.0A (LI) PJA36025CU41A PJA36040CU41A PJA36060CU41A PJA36080CU41A
Micrologic 5.0A (LSI) PJA36025CU43A PJA36040CU43A PJA36060CU43A PJA36080CU43A
Interchangeable
Ammeter Trip Unit3 3P PKA36025CU43A PKA36040CU43A PKA36060CU43A PKA36080CU43A
6.0A (LSIG) PJA36025CU44A PJA36040CU44A PJA36060CU44A PJA36080CU44A
PGA36025CU63AE1 PGA36040CU63AE1 PGA36060CU63AE1 PGA36080CU63AE1
5.0P (LSI) PJA36025CU63AE1 PJA36040CU63AE1 PJA36060CU63AE1 PJA36080CU63AE1
Micrologic 3P PKA36025CU63AE1 PKA36040CU63AE1 PKA36060CU63AE1 PKA36080CU63AE1
Interchangeable PLA34025CU63AE1 PLA34040CU63AE1 PLA34060CU63AE1 PLA34080CU63AE1
Power Trip Unit with
Modbus® PGA36025CU64AE1 PGA36040CU64AE1 PGA36060CU64AE1 PGA36080CU64AE1
Communications 6.0P (LSIG) PJA36025CU64AE1 PJA36040CU64AE1 PJA36060CU64AE1 PJA36080CU64AE1
3P PKA36025CU64AE1 PKA36040CU64AE1 PKA36060CU64AE1 PKA36080CU64AE1
PLA34025CU64AE1 PLA34040CU64AE1 PLA34060CU64AE1 PLA34080CU64AE1
PGA36025CU73AE1 PGA36040CU73AE1 PGA36060CU73AE1 PGA36080CU73AE1
5.0H (LSI) PJA36025CU73AE1 PJA36040CU73AE1 PJA36060CU73AE1 PJA36080CU73AE1
Micrologic 3P PKA36025CU73AE1 PKA36040CU73AE1 PKA36060CU73AE1 PKA36080CU73AE1
Interchangeable PLA34025CU73AE1 PLA34040CU73AE1 PLA34060CU73AE1 PLA34080CU73AE1
Harmonic Trip Unit
with Modbus PGA36025CU74AE1 PGA36040CU74AE1 PGA36060CU74AE1 PGA36080CU74AE1
Communications 6.0H (LSIG) PJA36025CU74AE1 PJA36040CU74AE1 PJA36060CU74AE1 PJA36080CU74AE1
3P PKA36025CU74AE1 PKA36040CU74AE1 PKA36060CU74AE1 PKA36080CU74AE1
PLA34025CU74AE1 PLA34040CU74AE1 PLA34060CU74AE1 PLA34080CU74AE1
2 No suffix is for ABC phasing (standard offer), or use 6 for CBA phasing (option).
Table 47: P-Frame Termination Options For factory-installed termination, place Table 48: P-Frame Interrupting Ratings
termination letter in the third block of
P-Frame Interrupting Rating
F = No Lugs (Includes terminal nut kit on both ends) the circuit breaker catalog number. Voltage
L = Lugs both ends G J K L
M = Lugs I/ON end, terminal nut kit O/OFF end PGL36040U41A
P = Lugs O/OFF end, terminal nut kit I/ON end Termination Letter 240 Vac 65 kA 100 kA 65 kA 125 kA
D = Drawout 480 Vac 35 kA 65 kA 50 kA 100 kA
A = I-Line
600 Vac 18 kA 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA
76
All Rights Reserved
™
Continuous Current Rating
All circuit breakers marked as 100% rated can be continuously loaded to 100% of their rating.
Because of additional heat generated when applying circuit breakers at 100% of continuous current rating,
the use of specially-designed enclosures and 90°C (194°F) wire is required. The 90°C (194°F) wire must be
sized according to the ampacity of the 75°C (167°F) wire column in the NEC. Minimum enclosure size and
ventilation specifications are indicated on the circuit breaker and in it’s instruction bulletin and in Table 5 on
page 11.
Circuit breakers with 100% rating can also be used in applications requiring only 80% continuous loading.
Ampere Rating (A) Interrupting Ratings
IEC 60947-2
Circuit Basic UL/CSA/NMX
Mounting Micrologic™ 240 Vac 380/415 Vac
Breaker Electronic
Trip Units
Trip Units 240 480 600
Icu Ics Icu Ics
Vac Vac Vac
PG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
Individually- PJ 600, 800, 250, 400, 600, 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
Mounted PK 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA
PL 125 kA 100 kA 25 kA1 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45kA
PG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
PJ 600, 800, 250, 400, 600, 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
I-Line™
PK 1000, 1200 800, 1000, 1200 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA
PL 125 kA 100 kA 25 kA1 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA
1 Non-standard AIR.
77
All Rights Reserved
™
Automatic Molded Case Switches1
Automatic molded case switches are available in individually-mounted and I-Line constructions from
600–1200 A. Automatic switches are similar in construction to electronic trip circuit breakers except
that long-time tripping is not present. The switches open instantaneously at a non-adjustable magnetic
trip point calibrated to protect only the molded case switch itself. They must be used in conjunction with
a circuit breaker or fuse of equivalent rating.
Table 50: Automatic Switch Information
Withstand Rating
Circuit Ampere Voltage Catalog Trip Point
Breaker Rating Rating Number (±10%)
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
600 600 Vac PJL36000S60 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 10 kA
PJ 800 600 Vac PJL36000S80 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 10 kA
2P1, 3P 1000 600 Vac PJL36000S10 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 10 kA
1200 600 Vac PJL36000S12 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 10 kA
600 600 Vac PKL36000S60 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 24 kA
PK 800 600 Vac PKL36000S80 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 24 kA
2P, 3P, 4P2 1000 600 Vac PKL36000S10 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 24 kA
1200 600 Vac PKL36000S12 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 24 kA
600 480 Vac PLL34000S60 125 kA 100 kA — 10 kA
PL 800 480 Vac PLL34000S80 125 kA 100 kA — 10 kA
2P, 3P 1000 480 Vac PLL34000S10 125 kA 100 kA — 10 kA
1200 480 Vac PLL34000S12 125 kA 100 kA — 10 kA
1 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (PJL36000S60 becomes PJL26000S60). Add the
suffix 2 for AC phasing (standard offer), or use 5 for CA phasing (option).
2 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (PKL36000S60 becomes PKL46000S60).
1 Catalog numbers for automatic switches are designated by “000” in positions 7–9 (ampere rating) and S60, S80, S10, or S12 in
positions 11–14 (trip system). See Table 10.
78
All Rights Reserved
™
Motor Circuit Protectors2
Motor circuit protectors are similar in construction to thermal-magnetic circuit breakers, but have only
instantaneous trip functions provided by the ET1.0M trip unit. These motor circuit protectors comply
with NEC requirements for providing short-circuit protection when installed as part of a listed
combination controller having motor overload protection. Interrupting ratings are determined by testing
the motor circuit protector in combination with a contactor and overload relay.
Motor circuit protectors are available in PJ and PL individually-mounted and I-Line™ construction.
According to the NEC, the instantaneous trip of the motor circuit protector may be set to a maximum of
8 to 17 times motor Full Load Amps (FLA), but a setting as close as possible to inrush current (without
nuisance tripping) results in the best protection. The instantaneous trip pickup level is adjustable within
the ranges shown below.
Table 51: Motor Circuit Protector Trip Range
Catalog Number
Ampere Adjustable Trip
Rating Range J-Interrupting—600 Vac L-Interrupting—480 Vac
600 A 1200–10,000 A PJL36060M68 PLL34060M68
800 A 1200–10,000 A PJL36080M68 PLL34080M68
1000 A 1500–10,000 A PJL36100M69 PLL34100M69
1200 A 1800–10,000 A PJL36120M70 PLL34120M70
NOTE: Continuous currents larger than the ampere rating can damage the motor circuit protector.
Select motor circuit protectors as follows:
1. Determine motor horsepower (hp) rating from the motor nameplate. The selection table is suitable
for motors with locked-rotor indicating code letters per NEC Table 430-7 (b) as follows:
Horsepower Motor Code Letters
30–150 A–G
150 or More A–F
For other motors contact the field office.

2. Select a motor circuit protector with an ampere rating recommended for the hp and voltage
involved.
3. Select an adjustable trip setting of at least 800% but not to exceed 1300% (1700% for high-
efficiency motors) of the motor full load amperes (FLA).
4. The NEC 1300% maximum setting (1700% for high-efficiency motors) may be inadequate for
motor circuit protectors to withstand current surges typical of the magnetization current of auto-
transformer type reduced voltage starters or open transition wye-delta starters during transfer from
“start” to “run,” constant hp multi-speed motors and motors labeled “high efficiency”.
5. Part-winding motors, per NEC 430-3, should have two motor circuit protectors selected from the
above at not more than one-half the allowable trip setting for the horsepower rating. The two circuit
protectors should operate simultaneously as a disconnecting means per NEC 430-103.
2 Catalog numbers for motor circuit protectors are designated by M68, M69, or M70 in positions 11–14 (trip system). See Table 10.
79
All Rights Reserved
™
Electrically-operated P-frame circuit breakers are available in I-Line and unit-mount construction up to
1200 A and are denoted in the catalog number by an “M_” suffix. These come equipped with a two-
step stored energy mechanism and come standard with a motor assembly. These are available
factory-installed only.
Motor assemblies provide on and off control from remote locations. The assemblies contain a spring-
charging motor (MCH), a shunt trip (MX) and a shunt close (XF) and are available in standard or
communicating versions. An SDE overcurrent trip switch is also included for trip indication. When
remote indication of the circuit breaker status is required, use of a circuit breaker with an OF auxiliary
switch for on-off indication. See Table 74 on page 105 for details.
Table 52: Motors Assembly Voltage Ratings (Vn)

Voltage Type Voltage Ratings (Vn)
Vac 50/60 Hz 48, 100–130, 220–240, 380–415
Vdc 24–30, 48–60, 110–130, 200–250
Unit-mount circuit breakers and switches have mechanical lugs standard on both ends. I-Line circuit
breakers have lugs standard on the O/OFF end. These lugs accept aluminum or copper wire.
Manually-operated P-frame circuit breakers are also available in drawout construction. See Table 91
on page 114 for more lug options.
Control Wiring
Control wiring for unit-mount and I-Line construction is connected to terminals located under the circuit
breaker accessory cover. Control wiring for drawout construction is connected to terminals located on
the cradle.
80
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 7: Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams for Manually-Operated Circuit Breakers

Power Trip Unit Remote Operation Alarm Contacts
Tripped
Closed
Upstream Downstream
Open
Fault
N A C
5
1
2
3
4
C2
D2
N
1
2
3
1
5
2
3
4
32
34
22
24
12
14
82
84
92
94
A
MN M
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD
TripUnit
or
B
T4/F1-
M1
M2
T1/M3
T2
T3
D1
C1
F2
31
21
11
81
91
C 24 D
T1
T3
T4
T2
A–Do not remove factory-installed jumpers between Z3, Z4 and Z5 unless ZSI is connected.
B–Do not remove factory-installed jumper between T1 and T2 unless neutral CT is connected. Do not install jumper between T3 and T4.
C–For proper wiring of neutral CT, refer to Instruction Bulletin 48041-082-01 shipped with it.
D–24 Vdc power supply for trip unit must be separate and isolated from 24 Vdc power supply for communication modules.
Trip Unit Type

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 MN/MX Basic A P H Connector Description
24 Vdc OF1
11 12 14
- + D1/C1 — • • • Com: E1-E6 Circuit breaker communication module
M1 M2 M3 F1 F2
C3 OF2 E1 = +24 Vdc
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T2 T3 T4 21 22 24
E2 = Common
D2/C2
VN OF3 E3 = A/Tx- D0
31 32 34
E4 = B/Tx+ D1
SD E5 = A/Rx- D0
91 92 94
E6 = B/Rx+ D1
— • • • Z Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)
V1 Z1 = ZSI OUT signal
V2 Z2 = ZSI OUT
81 Z3 = ZSI IN signal
V3
82 Z4 = ZSI IN short-time delay
Z5 = ZSI IN ground fault
84
SDE — • • • T External neutral sensor
Connector Recommended Wire Size — • • • F 24 Vdc external power supply

V1, V2, V3, Vn 22–16 AWG (0.3–1.5 mm2) — — • • Vn1 External neutral voltage takeoff
22 AWG (0.3 mm2) MIN shielded pair cable or
E1–E2 — — • • V1, V2, V3 External phase voltage takeoff
twisted pair copper wires
6 programmable contacts
T 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) stranded shielded cable — — • • M6C2: Q1, Q2, Q3
24 Vdc external power supply required
M Refer to MDGF instructions Function Connector Description
22 AWG (0.3 mm2) shielded twisted pairs with drain Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch
E3–E6, Q1, Q2, Q3 OF
(Belden 8723 or equal)3 position contacts
OF, SD, SDE 18–16 AWG (0.8–1.5 mm2) Auxiliary Contacts SD Bell alarm
MN, MX 18–14 AWG (0.8–2.5 mm2) SDE Electrical fault alarm contact
F Size per aux 24 Vdc power supply MN Undervoltage trip device
Remote Operation
Z1–Z5 22–18 AWG (0.3–0.8 mm2) MX Shunt trip
1 Neutral voltage supplied with flying leads.

2 Optional M6C programmable contacts are supplied with flying leads.
81
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 8: Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams for Electrically-operated Circuit Breakers

Closed
Upstream Downstream
Open
Fault
N A C
5
1
2
3
4
Open Close
N
C2
1
2
3
D2
1
5
2
3
4
32
34
22
24
12
14
82
84
A
A4
A2
4
Motor Mechanism
Module
MN M
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE
TripUnit E
or
B
T4/F1-
M1
M2
T1/M3
T2
T3
F2
D1
C1
A1
31
21
11
81
C 24 D
T1
T3
T4
T2
E–Motor mechanism includes opening and closing coils.
Trip Unit Type
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
24 dc MN/M
Basic A P H Connector Description
-
— • • • Com: E1-E6 Circuit breaker communication module
M1 M2 M3 F1 F2 D1/C1
1 2 3 4 5 T1 T2 T3 T4 E1 = +24 Vdc
D2/C2
E2 = Common
N, 1, 2, 3 E3 = A/Tx- D0
E4 = B/Tx+ D1
SDE O 3 O2 O E5 = A/Rx- D0
81 31 21 11 E6 = B/Rx+ D1
— • • • Z Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)
82 32 22 12
Z1 = ZSI OUT signal
84 34 24 14
Z2 = ZSI OUT
Z3 = ZSI IN signal
Z4 = ZSI IN short-time delay
4 A4 A2 A
— • • • T External neutral sensor
— • • • F 24 Vdc external power supply
— — • • Vn1 External voltage takeoff
Connector Recommended Wire Size — — • • V1, V2, V31 External phase voltage takeoff
22 AWG (0.3 mm2) MIN shielded pair cable or M6C1: 6 programmable contacts
E1–E2 — — • •
twisted pair copper wires Q1, Q2, Q3 24 Vdc external power supply required
V1, V2, V3, Vn 22–16 AWG (0.3–1.5 mm2) Function Connector Description
Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch position
T 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) stranded shielded cable OF
contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
22 AWG (0.3 mm2) shielded twisted pairs with drain
E3–E6, Q1, Q2, Q3 SDE Electrical fault alarm contact
(Belden 8723 or equal)3
M Refer to MDGF instructions MN Undervoltage trip device
Remote Operation
OF, SD, SDE 18–16 AWG (0.8–1.5 mm2) MX Shunt trip
MN, MX 18–14 AWG (0.8–2.5 mm2) A4 Electrical opening
F Size per aux 24 Vdc power supply Motor Mech Module A2 Electrical closing
Z1–Z5 22–18 AWG (0.3–0.8 mm2) B4, A1 Power supply for control devices and gear motor
1 Optional M6C and external voltage takeoff are supplied with flying leads.
82
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 6—PowerPact R-Frame Circuit Breakers
Performance
Providing unparalleled performance and control, the R-frame circuit breakers features the exclusive
Micrologic electronic trip units, which allow for a range of sophisticated applications for metering and
monitoring. In addition, trip units can be interchanged in the field to allow for maximum flexibility.
The compact size and smaller footprint of the R-frame circuit breaker permits higher density
installations using I-Line panelboards and switchboards. These circuit breakers are available in 100%
rated construction up to 3000 A to meet a broad range of commercial and industrial application needs.
• Both standard and 100% rated construction circuit breakers are available in 3000 A with a sensor
R-Frame Unit-Mount size range of 600–3000 A.
Voltage G J K L
240 Vac 65 kA 100 kA 65 kA 125 kA
480 Vac 35 kA 65 kA 65 kA 100 kA
600 Vac 18 kA 25 kA 65 kA 50 kA
• The K interrupting rating is recommended for applications having high inrush and/or non-linear
R-Frame I-Line loads such as large motors, transformers, motors with soft starts, etc.
• Compact circuit breaker size allows for smaller footprint installations using I-Line panelboards and
switchboards. Fifteen-inch width provides increased density installation.
• Most field-installable accessories are common to all frame sizes for easier stocking and installation
• Connection options include bus, cable or I-Line for installation flexibility.
83
All Rights Reserved
™
Catalog Numbers
Table 53: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip
Circuit Breakers with Basic Electronic Trip and Micrologic™ Electronic Trip
Units—600A–1200A
Circuit Breaker Catalog Number

Trip Unit
Type
600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A
Basic Electronic Trip Unit Not interchangeable
— — — RGF36120
ET1.0I
— — — RJF36120
2P1, 3P
— — — RKF36120
Fixed Long-time
— — — RLF36120
RGF36060U31A RGF36080U31A RGF36100U31A RGF36120U31A
3.0
RJF36060U31A RJF36080U31A RJF36100U31A RJF36120U31A
(LI)
RKF36060U31A RKF36080U31A RKF36100U31A RKF36120U31A
3P, 4P2
RLF36060U31A RLF36080U31A RLF36100U31A RLF36120U31A
5.0
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
3.0A
(LI)
3P, 4P2
5.0A
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
6.0A (LSIG) RJF36060U44A RJF36080U44A RJF36100U44A RJF36120U44A
3P, 4P2 RKF36060U44A RKF36080U44A RKF36100U44A RKF36120U44A
RGF36060U63AE1 RGF36080U63AE1 RGF36100U63AE1 RGF36120U63AE1
5.0P
RJF36060U63AE1 RJF36080U63AE1 RJF36100U63AE1 RJF36120U63AE1
(LSI)
RKF36060U63AE1 RKF36080U63AE1 RKF36100U63AE1 RKF36120U63AE1
3P, 4P2
RLF36060U63AE1 RLF36080U63AE1 RLF36100U63AE1 RLF36120U63AE1
6.0P (LSIG) RJF36060U64AE1 RJF36080U64AE1 RJF36100U64AE1 RJF36120U64AE1
3P, 4P2 RKF36060U64AE1 RKF36080U64AE1 RKF36100U64AE1 RKF36120U64AE1
5.0H
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
6.0H (LSIG) RJF36060U74AE1 RJF36080U74AE1 RJF36100U74AE1 RJF36120U74AE1
1 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (RGF36060 becomes RGF26060.)
2 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (RGF36060U31A becomes RGF46060U31A).
84
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 54: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip

Circuit Breakers with Basic Electronic Trip and Micrologic™ Electronic Trip
Units—1600A–3000A

Trip Unit
Type
1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A
Basic Electronic Trip Unit Not interchangeable
RGF36160 RGF36200 RGF36250 —
ET1.0I
RJF36160 RJF36200 RJF36250 —
2P1, 3P
RKF36160 RKF36200 RKF36250 —
Fixed Long-time
RLF36160 RLF36200 RLF36250 —
3.0
(LI)
3P, 4P2
5.0
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
3.0A
(LI)
3P, 4P2
5.0A
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
6.0A (LSIG) RJF36160U44A RJF36200U44A RJF36250U44A RJF36300U44A
3P, 4P2 RKF36160U44A RKF36200U44A RKF36250U44A RKF36300U44A
5.0P
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
6.0P (LSIG) RJF36160U64AE1 RJF36200U64AE1 RJF36250U64AE1 RJF36300U64AE1
5.0H
(LSI)
3P, 4P2
6.0H (LSIG) RJF36160U74AE1 RJF36200U74AE1 RJF36250U74AE1 RJF36300U74AE1
1 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (RGF36060 becomes RGF26060.)
2 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (RGF36060U31A becomes RGF46060U31A).
85
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 55: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, 100%-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit
Breakers with Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units—600 A–1200 A

Trip
Unit Current Rating (Sensor Rating)
Type
600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A
Micrologic Standard Trip Unit Interchangeable, 3P, 4P
RGF36060CU31A RGF36080CU31A RGF36100CU31A RGF36120CU31A
3.0 RJF36060CU31A RJF36080CU31A RJF36100CU31A RJF36120CU31A
(LI) RKF36060CU31A RKF36080CU31A RKF36100CU31A RKF36120CU31A
RLF36060CU31A RLF36080CU31A RLF36100CU31A RLF36120CU31A
(LSI) RKF36060CU33A RKF36080CU33A RKF36100CU33A RKF36120CU33A
Micrologic Ammeter Trip Unit2 Interchangeable, 3P, 4P
3.0A RJF36060CU41A RJF36080CU41A RJF36100CU41A RJF36120CU41A

(LSIG) RKF36060CU44A RKF36080CU44A RKF36100CU44A RKF36120CU44A
Micrologic Power Trip Unit with Modbus® Communications Interchangeable, 3P, 4P
RGF36060CU63AE1 RGF36080CU63AE1 RGF36100CU63AE1 RGF36120CU63AE1
5.0P RJF36060CU63AE1 RJF36080CU63AE1 RJF36100CU63AE1 RJF36120CU63AE1
(LSI) RKF36060CU63AE1 RKF36080CU63AE1 RKF36100CU63AE1 RKF36120CU63AE1
RLF36060CU63AE1 RLF36080CU63AE1 RLF36100CU63AE1 RLF36120CU63AE1

(LSIG) RKF36060CU64AE1 RKF36080CU64AE1 RKF36100CU64AE1 RKF36120CU64AE1
Micrologic Harmonic Trip Unit with Modbus Communications Interchangeable, 3P, 4P
5.0H RJF36060CU73AE1 RJF36080CU73AE1 RJF36100CU73AE1 RJF36120CU73AE1

1 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (RGF36060CU31A becomes RGF46060CU31A).
86
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 56: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, 100%-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit
Breakers with Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units—1600 A–3000 A

Trip
Unit Current Rating (Sensor Rating)
Type
1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3000 A
Micrologic Standard Trip Unit Interchangeable, 3P, 4P
Micrologic Ammeter Trip Unit2 Interchangeable, 3P, 4P

(LSIG) RKF36160CU44A RKF36200CU44A RKF36250CU44A RKF36300CU44A
Micrologic Power Trip Unit with Modbus® Communications Interchangeable, 3P, 4P

Micrologic Harmonic Trip Unit with Modbus Communications Interchangeable, 3P, 4P

1 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (RGF36060CU31A becomes RGF46060CU31A).
87
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 57: UL/IEC Rated, I-Line, Manually-Operated, 100%-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit
Breakers with Micrologic™ Electronic Trip Units

Trip Unit, Interchangeable
Current Rating
Type 1000 A 1200 A

RGA36100CU31A RGA36120CU31A
RJA36100CU31A RJA36120CU31A
3.0 (LI)
RKA36100CU31A RKA36120CU31A
RLA36100CU31A RLA36120CU31A
Micrologic Standard Trip Unit
5.0 (LSI)
3.0A (LI)
Micrologic Ammeter Trip Unit1 5.0A (LSI)
6.0A (LSIG)
RGA36100CU63AE1 RGA36120CU63AE1
RJA36100CU63AE1 RJA36120CU63AE1
5.0P (LSI)
RKA36100CU63AE1 RKA36120CU63AE1
Micrologic Power Trip Unit with RLA36100CU63AE1 RLA36120CU63AE1

Modbus® Communications RGA36100CU64AE1 RGA36120CU64AE1
6.0P (LSIG)
RLA36100CU64AE1 RLA36120CU64AE1
RGA36100CU73AE1 RGA36120CU73AE1
5.0H (LSI)
Micrologic Harmonic Trip Unit RLA36100CU73AE1 RLA36120CU73AE1

with Modbus Communications RGA36100CU74AE1 RGA36120CU74AE1
6.0H (LSIG)
RLA36100CU74AE1 RLA36120CU74AE1
88
All Rights Reserved
™
Ampere Rating (A) Interrupting Ratings
Circuit IEC 60947-2

Mounting Basic UL/CSA/NMX
Breaker Micrologic
Electronic 240 Vac 380/415 Vac
Trip Units
Trip Units
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac Icu Ics Icu Ics
RG 65 kA 35 kA 18 KA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
600, 800, 1000,
Individually- RJ 1200, 1600, 1200, 1600, 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
Mounted RK 2000, 2500 2000, 2500, 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 85 kA 65 kA 70 kA 55 kA
3000
RL 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA
RG 65 kA 35 kA 18 KA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA
RJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA
I-Line™ NA 1000, 1200
RK 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 85 kA 65 kA 70 kA 55 kA
RL 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA
Automatic Molded Case Switches
Automatic molded case switches are available in unit-mount construction from 1200–3000 A.
Automatic switches are similar in construction to electronic trip circuit breakers except that long-time
protection is not present. The switches open instantaneously at a non-adjustable magnetic trip point
calibrated to protect only the molded case switch itself. They must be used in conjunction with a circuit
breaker or fuse of equivalent rating.
NOTE: Catalog numbers for automatic switches are designated by “000” in positions 7–9 (ampere
rating) and S12, S16, S20, S25, or S30 in positions 11–14 (trip system). See Table 10.
Table 59: Automatic Switch Information
Withstand Rating
Circuit Ampere Trip Point
Catalog Number1
Breaker Rating (±10%)
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
1200 RKF36000S12 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 57 kA
1600 RKF36000S16 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 57 kA
RK
2000 RKF36000S20 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 57 kA
2P1, 3P
2500 RKF36000S25 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 57 kA
3000 RKF36000S30 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 57 kA
1200 RLF36000S12 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 39 kA
1600 RLF36000S16 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 39 kA
RL
2000 RLF36000S20 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 39 kA
2P, 3P
2500 RLF36000S25 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 39 kA
3000 RLF36000S30 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 39 kA
1 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (RKP36000S12 becomes RKP26000S12).
89
All Rights Reserved
™
I-Line circuit breakers have lugs standard on the O/OFF end. Unit-mount circuit breakers and switches
are equipped for direct bus connection.
For cable connections, optional terminal pad RLTB or equivalent bus structure is required. RLTB kits
are included with 2500 A 100% rated circuit breakers. The RL3TB kits are included with the 3000 A,
80% and 100% rated circuit breakers. For other circuit breakers, order terminal pad kit RLTB and
optional lugs separately. Refer to Section 11—Circuit Breaker Dimensional Drawings for terminal pad
kit dimensions.
Table 60: RLTB Terminal Pad Kit
Table 61: Terminal Pad Kits for R-Frame Circuit Breakers

Terminal Pad Kit Lugs Field-Installable Kits
R-Frame
per 3P (One 4P (One
Circuit Breaker Usage Phase End Only) End Only)
3000 A, 100% Rated Required for Cable or Bus 9 RL3TB1 RL3TB4

3000 A, Standard (80% Rated) Required for Cable or Bus 8 RL3TB1 RL3TB4
2500 A, 100% Rated Required for Cable or Bus 8 RLTB1 RLTB4
2500 A, Standard (80% Rated) Required for Cable, Optional for Bus 8 RLTB RLTB4
All Other R-Frame Circuit Breakers Required for Cable, Optional for Bus 8 RLTB RLTB4
1 Supplied as standard with the R-frame circuit breaker.
For cable connection to RLTB, use AL2500RK lug. See page 114.
Continuous Current Rating
All circuit breakers marked as 100% rated can be continuously loaded to 100% of their rating.
100%-rated circuit breakers are available in unit-mount construction up to 3000 A and in I-Line
construction up to 1200 A.
Because of the additional heat generated when applying circuit breakers at 100% of continuous
current rating, the use of specially-designed enclosures and 90°C (194°F) wire is required. The 90°C
(194°F) wire must be sized according to the ampacity of the 75°C (167°F) wire column in the NEC.
Minimum enclosure size and ventilation specifications are indicated on a label on the circuit breaker, in
the circuit breaker instruction bulletin and in Table 5 on page 11.
Circuit breakers with 100% rating can also be used in applications requiring only 80% continuous
loading.
Control Wiring
90
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 9: Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams

Tripped
Upstream Downstream
Closed
Open
N A C
Fault
5
1
2
3
4
C2
D2
N
1
2
3
1
5
2
3
4
A
32
34
22
24
12
14
82
84
92
94
MN M
TripUnit OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD

or
B
T4/F1-
M1
M2
T1/M3
T2
T3
D1
C1
F2
C 24 D
31
21
11
81
91
T1
T3
T4
T2
Trip Unit Type

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 M6C ext MN M Basic A P H Connector Description
3 1 D1/C1 — • • • Com: E1-E6 Circuit breaker communication module
M1M2M3 F1 F2 1
2 2 C3 E1 = +24 Vdc
1 2 3 4 5 T1 T2 T3 T4
1 3 D2/C2 E2 = Common
E3 = A/Tx- D0
N
E4 = B/Tx+ D1
E5 = A/Rx- D0
O
11 12 14 E6 = B/Rx+ D1
— • • • Z Zone-selective interlocking
O2
21 22 24 Z1 = ZSI OUT signal
O3 Z2 = ZSI OUT
31 32 34
Z3 = ZSI IN signal
SD Z4 = ZSI IN short-time delay
91 92 94
81 — • • • T External neutral sensor
82 — • • • M Modified differential ground fault (MDGF)
84 — • • • F 24 Vdc external power supply
SDE — — • • Vn2 External neutral voltage takeoff

M6C: 6 programmable contacts
Connector Recommended Wire Size — — • •
Q1, Q2, Q3 24 Vdc external power supply required
V1, V2, V3, Vn 22–16 AWG (0.3–1.5 mm2) — — • • V1, V2, V3 External phase voltage takeoff
22 AWG (0.3 mm2) MIN shielded pair cable or twisted pair
E1–E2
copper wires
Function Connector Description
Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch position
T 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) stranded shielded cable OF
contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
M Refer to MDGF instructions SD Bell alarm
Z1–Z5 22–18 AWG (0.3–0.8 mm2) SDE Electrical fault alarm contact
OF, SD, SDE 18–16 AWG (0.8–1.5 mm2) MN Undervoltage trip device
Remote Operation
MN, MX 18–14 AWG (0.8–2.5 mm2) MX Shunt trip
F Size per aux 24 Vdc power supply
22 AWG (0.3 mm2) shielded twisted pairs with drain
E3–E6, Q1, Q2, Q3
(Belden 8723 or equal)3
1 C3 terminal is not used.
2 Neutral voltage takeoff supplied as flying lead.
91
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 7—Compact NS630b–NS1600 Circuit Breakers
Performance
The Compact NS630b–NS1600 circuit breakers feature the exclusive Micrologic electronic trip units,
which allow for a range of sophisticated applications for metering and monitoring. In addition, trip units
can be interchanged in the field to allow for maximum flexibility.
The compact size and small footprint of the NS circuit breakers permit higher density installations.
These circuit breakers are available in ratings up to 1600 A to meet a broad range of commercial and
industrial application needs.
• Circuit breakers are available in 1600 A construction with a sensor size range of 250–1600 A.
Circuit Interrupting
Compact NS630b–NS1600 Breaker Rating Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
Electrically Operated
NS630b–NS1600 N 50 kA 37 kA 50 kA 37 kA 50 kA 37 kA 40 kA 30 kA 30 kA 22 kA
NS630b–NS1600 H 70 kA 35 kA 70 kA 35 kA 65 kA 32 kA 50 kA 25 kA 42 kA 21 kA
NS630b–NS1000 L 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 130 kA 130 kA 100 kA 100 kA — —
Manually Operated
NS630b–NS1600 N 85 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 40 kA 40 kA 30 kA 30 kA
NS630b–NS1600 H 85 kA 52 kA 70 kA 52 kA 65 kA 48 kA 50 kA 37 kA 42 kA 31 kA
NS630b–NS1000 L 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 150 kA 130 kA 130 kA 100 kA 100 kA — —
NS630b–NS800 R 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 200 kA 100 kA 100 kA 75 kA 75 kA
• Compact circuit breaker size allows for smaller footprint installations. Nine inch width provides
increased density installation.
• Connection options include bus or cable for installation flexibility.
• Additional options are available for five-cycle closing, stored energy mechanisms and drawout-
mounting.
92
All Rights Reserved
™
Drawout Configuration
The drawout configuration makes it possible to:

• extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connectors
• allow for the addition of circuits at a later date
Compact NS630b to NS1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
Rear mounting on rails.

Mounting on a backplate.
Device on mounting plate. Device on rails.
93
All Rights Reserved
™
Catalog Numbers
Table 62: IEC-Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, 3P Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with Micrologic Electronic
Trip Units1
Circuit Breaker
Trip Unit Current Rating
630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A

NPNLE36063U32R NPNLE36080U32R NPNLE36100U32R NPNLE36125U32R NPNFE36160U32R
2.0 NPHLE36063U32R NPHLE36080U32R NPHLE36100U32R NPHLE36125U32R NPHFE36160U32R
(LS0) NPLLE34063U32R NPLLE34080U32R NPLLE34100U32R — —
Micrologic NPRLE34063U32R NPRLE34080U32R — — —
Standard Trip
Unit NPNLE36063U33R NPNLE36080U33R NPNLE36100U33R NPNLE36125U33R NPNFE36160U33R
5.0 NPHLE36063U33R NPHLE36080U33R NPHLE36100U33R PHLE36125U33RN NPHFE36160U33R
(LSI) NPLLE34063U33R NPLLE34080U33R NPLLE34100U33R — —
NPRLE34063U33R NPRLE34080U33R — — —
2.0A NPHLE36063U42R NPHLE36080U42R NPHLE36100U42R NPHLE36125U42R NPHFE36160U42R
(LS0) NPLLE34063U42R NPLLE34080U42R NPLLE34100U42R — —
Micrologic 5.0A NPHLE36063U43R NPHLE36080U43R NPHLE36100U43R NPHLE36125U43R NPHFE36160U43R
Ammeter Trip
Unit2 (LSI) NPLLE34063U43R NPLLE34080U43R NPLLE34100U43R — —
6.0A NPHLE36063U44R NPHLE36080U44R NPHLE36100U44R NPHLE36125U44R NPHFE36160U44R

(LSIG) NPLLE34063U44R NPLLE34080U44R NPLLE34100U44R — —
NPNLE36063U63RE1 NPNLE36080U63RE1 NPNLE36100U63RE1 NPNLE36125U63RE1 NPNFE36160U63RE1
5.0P NPHLE36063U63RE1 NPHLE36080U63RE1 NPHLE36100U63RE1 NPHLE36125U63RE1 NPHFE36160U63RE1
(LSI) NPLLE34063U63RE1 NPLLE34080U63RE1 NPLLE34100U63RE1 — —
Micrologic Power
Trip Unit with NPRLE34063U63RE1 NPRLE34080U63RE1 — — —
Modbus NPNLE36063U64RE1 NPNLE36080U64RE1 NPNLE36100U64RE1 NPNLE36125U64RE1 NPNFE36160U64RE1
Communications
6.0P NPHLE36063U64RE1 NPHLE36080U64RE1 NPHLE36100U64RE1 NPHLE36125U64RE1 NPHFE36160U64RE1
(LSIG) NPLLE34063U64RE1 NPLLE34080U64RE1 NPLLE34100U64RE1 — —
NPRLE34063U64RE1 NPRLE34080U64RE1 — — —
NPNLE36063U73RE1 NPNLE36080U73RE1 NPNLE36100U73RE1 NPNLE36125U73RE1 NPNFE36160U73RE1
5.0H NPHLE36063U73RE1 NPHLE36080U73RE1 NPHLE36100U73RE1 NPHLE36125U73RE1 NPHFE36160U73RE1
(LSI) NPLLE34063U73RE1 NPLLE34080U73RE1 NPLLE34100U73RE1 — —
Micrologic
Harmonic Trip NPRLE34063U73RE1 NPRLE34080U73RE1 — — —
Unit with Modbus NPNLE36063U74RE1 NPNLE36080U74RE1 NPNLE36100U74RE1 NPNLE36125U74RE1 NPNFE36160U74RE1
Communications
6.0H NPHLE36063U74RE1 NPHLE36080U74RE1 NPHLE36100U74RE1 NPHLE36125U74RE1 NPHFE36160U74RE1
(LSIG) NPLLE34063U74RE1 NPLLE34080U74RE1 NPLLE34100U74RE1 — —
NPRLE34063U74RE1 NPRLE34080U74RE1 — — —
1 For 4P, replace the 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (NPNLE35053U43R becomes NPNLE46063U43R).
94
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 63: Compact Non-Automatic Switch
Compact Switch-Catalog Number1 NPNLE36000Z63 NPNLE36000Z80 NPNLE36000Z10 NPNLE36000Z12 NPNFE36000Z162

Amperage 630 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A 1600 A
Number of Poles 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
Toggle
Direct or X X X X X
Manual
Control extended rotary X X X X X
handle
Electric X X X X X
Front connection X X X X X
Connections Fixed
Rear connection X X X X X
Drawout Front connection X X X X X
(on cradle) Rear connection X X X X X
Electrical Characteristics as per IEC 60947-3
Conventional thermal
Ith 60°C 630 800 1000 1250 1600
current (A)
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 800 800 800 800 800
Rated impulse withstand
Uimp 8 8 8 8 8
voltage (V)
Rated operation voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690 690 690 690 690
220/240 V
380/415V
440/480 V3 630 800 1000 1250 1600
500/525 V
660/690 V
Short-circuit making capacity Icm (kA peak) 52 52 52 52 52
(A 0.5s 19.2 19.2 19.2 19.2 19.2
Short-time withstand current Icw
rms) 20s 4 4 4 4 4
Suitability for isolation X X X X X
Mechanical 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Durability (C-O cycles)
Electrical AC 2000 2000 2000 2000 1000
Positive contact indication X X X X X
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
Protections
Add-on earth-leakage Combination with
X
protection Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts X
MX shunt release X
Voltage releases
MN undervoltage release X
Remote communication by bus
Device status indication (communicating auxiliary contacts) X
Device remote operation (communicating motor operator) X
Installation
Terminal extensions and X
spreaders
Accessories Terminal shields and X
interphase barriers
Escutcheons X
Dimensions (mm) 3P 327 x 210 x 147
Fixed
WxHxD 4P 327 x 280 x 147
3P 14
Weight (kg) Fixed
4P 18
1 Installation standards require upstream protection.
2 Not available on 1600 A circuit breaker with “L” termination.
3 Suitable for 480 V NEMA.
95
All Rights Reserved
™
See page 92.
Electrically-operated NS630b–NS1600 circuit breakers are available in unit-mount construction up to

1600 A and are denoted in the catalog number by an “M_” suffix. These come equipped with a two-
step stored energy mechanism and come standard with a motor assembly.
Motor assemblies provide on and off control from remote locations. The assemblies contain a spring-
charging motor (MCH), a shunt trip (MX) and a shunt close (XF) and are available in standard or
communicating versions. An SDE overcurrent trip switch is also included for trip indication. When
remote indication of the circuit breaker status is required, use of a circuit breaker with an OF auxiliary
switch (for on-off indication).
Table 64: Motor Assembly Voltage Ratings (Vn)
Voltage Type Voltage Ratings (Vn)

Vac 50/60 Hz 48, 100–130, 220–240, 380–415
Vdc 24–30, 48–60, 100–130, 200–250
For catalog numbers, see Table 75 on page 105.
Unit-mount circuit breakers and switches have mechanical lugs standard on both ends. These lugs accept
aluminum or copper wire. Manually operated circuit breakers are also available in drawout construction.
Other terminations are available as accessories for non-standard applications. See Table 91 on page
114 for more lug options.
Accessories
Accessories are available either factory-installed or field-installable. They can be installed in accessory
compartments behind the circuit breaker accessory cover. See Table 67 on page 100 for available
accessories.
Control Wiring
Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams for Manually-Operated Circuit Breakers
See Figure 7 on page 81. (Same as PowerPact P-frame circuit breaker.)
Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams for Electrically-Operated Circuit Breakers
See Figure 8 on page 82. (Same as PowerPact P-frame circuit breaker.)
96
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 8—Compact NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breaker
Performance
The Compact NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers feature the exclusive Micrologic electronic trip units,
which allow for a range of sophisticated applications for metering and monitoring. In addition, trip units
can be interchanged in the field to allow for maximum flexibility.
The compact size and smaller footprint of the NS circuit breaker permits higher density installations.
These circuit breakers are available in up to 3200 A construction to meet a broad range of commercial
and industrial application needs.
• Circuit breakers are available in 3200 A construction with a sensor size range of 600–3200 A.
Compact NS1600b–NS3200
Interrupting
Rating Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
N 85 kA 65 kA 70 kA 52 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA
H 125 kA 94 kA 85 kA 64 kA 85 kA 64 kA — — — —
• The N interrupting rating is recommended for applications having high inrush and/or non-linear
loads such as large motors, transformers, motors with soft starts, etc.
• Compact circuit breaker size allows for smaller footprint installations. Fifteen-inch width provides
increased density installation.
• Connection options include bus or cable for installation flexibility.
NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers are equipped for bus connection only. For certain amperages, an
RLTBE terminal pad kit may be required. (Same kit as the PowerPact R-frame circuit breaker.) Refer
to Section 11—Circuit Breaker Dimensional Drawings for terminal pad kit dimensions.
Table 65: Terminal Pad Kits for Compact NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers
Terminal Pad Kit (One End Only)
Circuit Breaker
Usage 3P Kit 4P Kit
3200 A Required Provided Provided
All Other Circuit Breakers Optional RLTBE RLTBE4
Accessories
Accessories are available either factory-installed or field-installable. They can be installed in accessory
compartments behind the circuit breaker accessory cover. (Same accessories as the R-frame circuit
breaker.)
97
All Rights Reserved
™
Control Wiring
Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams
Refer to Wiring Diagrams on page 91. (Same as the R-frame circuit breaker.)
Catalog Numbers
Table 66: IEC-Rated, Unit-Mount, Manually-Operated, 3P Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers
with Micrologic Electronic Trip Units
Circuit Breaker
Trip Unit Current Rating1
1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A
2.0 NRNFE36160U32R NRNFE36200U32R NRNFE36250U32R NRNFE36320U32R

Micrologic (LS0) NRHFE36160U32R NRHFE36200U32R NRHFE36250U32R NRHFE36320U32R
Standard Trip
Unit 5.0 NRNFE36160U33R NRNFE36200U33R NRNFE36250U33R NRNFE36320U33R
(LSI) NRHFE36160U33R NRHFE36200U33R NRHFE36250U33R NRHFE36320U33R
2.0A NRNFE36160U42R NRNFE36200U42R NRNFE36250U42R NRNFE36320U42R

(LS0) NRHFE36160U42R NRHFE36200U42R NRHFE36250U42R NRHFE36320U42R
Micrologic NRNFE36160U43R NRNFE36200U43R NRNFE36250U43R NRNFE36320U43R
5.0A
Ammeter Trip
(LSI) NRHFE36160U43R NRHFE36200U43R NRHFE36250U43R NRHFE36320U43R
Unit2
6.0A NRNFE36160U44R NRNFE36200U44R NRNFE36250U44R NRNFE36320U44R
(LSIG) NRHFE36160U44R NRHFE36200U44R NRHLFE36250U44R NRHFE36320U44R
5.0P NRNFE36160U63RE1 NRNFE36200U63RE1 NRNFE36250U63RE1 NRNFE36320U63RE1

Micrologic Power (LSI)
Trip Unit with NRHFE36160U63RE1 NRHFE36200U63RE1 NRHFE36250U63RE1 NRHFE36320U63RE1
Modbus NRNFE36160U64RE1 NRNFE36200U64RE1 NRNFE36250U64RE1 NRNFE36320U64RE1
Communications 6.0P
(LSIG) NRHFE36160U64RE1 NRHFE36200U64RE1 NRHFE36250U64RE1 NRHFE36320U64RE1
1 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (NRHFE36200U74RE1 becomes
NRHFE46200U74RE1).
2 Add E1 suffix for Modbus Communications.
98
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 9—Accessories
Accessories
M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 circuit breakers can be used with a variety of
internal and external accessories to increase application versatility and meet the demands of modern
electrical distribution systems.
Circuit breaker internal accessories are available either factory installed or field installable. They can
be installed in accessory compartments behind the circuit breaker accessory cover.
Factory-Installed Accessories
Factory-installed accessories are internally mounted by the factory. Accessories only available factory
installed cannot be removed or repaired in the field. Order factory-installed accessories by adding the
correct two-letter suffix to the standard circuit breaker catalog number. To build a catalog number, refer
to the product selector or contact a field office.
Field-Installable Accessories
Field-installable accessories can be installed or replaced in the field without affecting the circuit
breaker ratings. Field-installable accessories are shipped separately from the circuit breakers. Install
and wire field-installable accessories according to the instructions supplied with the circuit breaker and
particular accessory. Order field-installable accessories by the catalog number found in the Schneider
Electric Digest.
99
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 67: Field/Factory-Installed Accessories
P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600

M-Frame R-Frame and
Manually-Operated Electrically- NS1600b–NS3200
Manually-Operated
Circuit Breakers Operated Circuit Circuit Breakers Page
Accessory Circuit Breakers
Breakers No.
Field Factory Field Factory Field Factory Field Factory

Installable Installed Installable Installed Installable Installed Installable Installed
Shunt Trip (MX) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 101
Undervoltage Trip (MN) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 102
Adjustable Time Delay Module for
Y N Y N Y N Y N 103
Undervoltage Trip
Auxiliary Switch (OF) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 103
Alarm Switch (SD) Y Y Y Y N/A N/A Y Y 103
Overcurrent Trip Switch (SDE) N N Y Y Y Y Y Y 103
Spring-Charging Motor N/A NA N/A N/A Y Y N/A N/A 105
Trip Unit Replacement Covers N N Y N Y N Y N 106
Neutral Current Transformer N N/A Y N Y N Y N 107
Ground-Fault Interface Module N N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 107
External Sensor for SGR or MDGF
N N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 107
Protection
Sensor Plugs N N Y Y Y Y Y Y 108
Rating Plugs N N Y Y Y Y Y Y 108
M2C and M6C Programmable Contacts N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 109
Circuit Breaker Communication Module N/A N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 109
Restraint Interface Module N/A N/A Y N Y N Y N 111
External Power Supply Module N N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 111
External Battery Backup Module N N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 111
Hand-Held Test Kit N N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 112
Full-Function Test Kit Y N/A Y Y Y Y Y Y 112
Mechanical Lug Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 113
Compression Lug Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 113
Terminal Pad Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 113
I-Line Jaws Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 113
Power Distribution Connectors Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 114
Control Wire Terminations Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 114
Phase Barriers Y N Y N Y N Y N 116
Electric Joint Compound Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 116
Door-Mounted Operating Mechanism Y Y Y Y Y Y N/A N/A 116
Rotary Handle N/A N/A N Y N/A N/A N/A N/A 117
Replacement Handles Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 117
Long Handle Extension Y Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A N/A 117
Accessory Cover Door Escutcheons Y N Y N Y N Y N 117
Padlock Attachment Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 117
Keylock N Y N Y N Y N Y 117
Keylock Provision N Y N Y N Y N Y 117
Sub-Feed Lugs Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 118
Y = Yes
N = No
N/A = Not Available
100
All Rights Reserved
™
Electrical Accessories
Maximum Wire Length

Maximum Wire Length—The inrush currents for these devices are approximately 200 VA. When low
supply voltages (12, 24 or 48 V) are used, the maximum allowable wire length is dependent on the
voltage and the wire size.
Table 68: Maximum Wire Length1
Percent of Source Voltage

Device
Source Voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 Vdc
14 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG
Wire Size
(2.08 mm2) (1.31 mm2) (2.08 mm2) (1.31 mm2) (2.08 mm2) (1.31 mm2)
159 ft 100 ft 765 ft 472 ft
100% — —
(48.5 m) (30.5 m) (233.2 m) (143.9 m)
UVR (MN)
44 ft 29 ft 205 ft 129 ft
85% — —
(13.4 m) (8.8 m) (62.5 m) (39.3 m)
57 ft 34 ft 314 ft 200 ft 1503 ft 944 ft
100%
Shunt Trip (MX) and (17.4 m) (10.4 m) (95.7 m) (61.0 m) (457.8 m) (287.7 m)
Shunt Close (XF) 27 ft 17 ft 205 ft 126 ft 957 ft 601 ft
85%
(8.2 m) (5.2 m) (62.5 m) (38.4 m) (291.7 m) (183.2 m)
1 The length shown in the table is for each of the two supply wires.
Shunt Trip (MX1) and Shunt Close (XF)
Shunt Trip (MX1): When energized, the shunt trip instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. The
shunt trip may be energized continuously or intermittently.
Shunt Close (XF): Remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged. The shunt
close may be energized continuously or intermittently.This accessory is for electrically-operated
P-frame circuit breaker only.
Communication versions of the MX1 and XF are available for direct connection via the circuit breaker
communication module (BCM).
Table 69: Shunt Trip and Shunt Close Characteristics
Shunt Trip (MX1) and Characteristics MX1 XF Min Max

Shunt Close (XF)
24 Vac 17 Vac 26 Vac
Vac
240 Vac 168 Vac 264 Vac
50/60 Hz
277 Vac 194 Vac 304 Vac
380 Vac 266 Vac 418 Vac
Voltage Ratings (Vn)
480 Vac 336 Vac 528 Vac
12 Vdc 8 Vdc 13 Vdc
Vdc 48 Vdc 34 Vdc 52 Vdc
250 Vdc 175 Vdc 275 Vdc
Operating Threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Vn 0.85 to 1.1 Vn
Power Consumption (VA or W) Steady-State/Inrush 4.5/200
70 ms ±10 (NW d4000 A)
Circuit Breaker Response Time at Vn1 50 ms ±10 80 ms ±10 (NW > 4000 A)
55 ms (NT)
1 Shunt trip (MX1) and shunt close (XF) circuits must be energized for minimum of 200 ms.
101
All Rights Reserved
™
Undervoltage Trip (MN)

This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order.
It is made up of:
• Instantaneous trip
• Fixed undervoltage trip (time delayed) or,
• Adjustable undervoltage trip (time delayed)
As shown in the wiring diagram for the remote tripping function below, the delay unit (installed outside
the circuit breaker) may be disabled by an emergency off button to obtain non-delayed opening of the
circuit breaker.
The undervoltage trip (MN) instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to
Undervoltage Trip (MN)
a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage.
If the undervoltage trip is not energized, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or
electrically. An attempt to close the circuit breaker produces no movement of the main contacts.
Closing is allowed when the supply voltage of the undervoltage trip reaches 85% of rated voltage.
Table 70: Undervoltage Trip Characteristics
Characteristics MN
24 Vac
48 Vac
120 Vac
Vac
240 Vac
50/60 Hz
277 Vac
380 Vac
480 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
Vdc 48 Vdc
125 Vdc
250 Vdc
Power Consumption (VA or W) Constant/Inrush 4.5/200
Opening 0.35 to 0.70 Vn
Operating Threshold
Closing 0.35 Vn
Circuit Breaker Response Time at Vn 90 ms ±5
Figure 10: Wire Diagram for the Remote Tripping Function
Opening Opening Delayed

Order Order Opening
Order 10 12
Delayed
C12 D2 Unit
3 6
Instantane-
ous Opening
M 2 or MN Order
D2
MN
C1 1 D1 D1
102
All Rights Reserved
™
Time-Delay Module for Undervoltage Trip

To eliminate circuit breaker nuisance tripping during temporary voltage dips (micro-breaks), operation
of the undervoltage trip (MN) can be delayed by adding an external time-delay module to the
undervoltage trip circuit. Available as adjustable and non-adjustable module.
Table 71: Time-Delay Module Characteristics
Factory-Installed Field-Installable
Characteristics
Cat. No. Suffix Cat. No.
48-60 — S33680
Vac 50/60 Hz / 100-130 — S33681
Adjustable
Voltage Ratings of Vdc 200-250 — S33682
Time-delay Module 380-480 — S33683
Vac 50/60 Hz / 100-130 — S33684
Non-Adjustable
Vdc 200-250 — S33685
Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Vn
Operating Threshold
Closing 0.85 Vn
4.5 VA/W (holding),
Power Consumption
200 VA/W (inrush)
Adjustable 0.5, 0.9, 1.5, and 3.0 s
Time-Delay Settings
Non-Adjustable 0.25 s
Indication Contacts
Changeover contacts are used to provide remote circuit breaker status information and can be used
for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. All the auxiliary contacts are also available in “low-level”
versions capable of switching very low loads (for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).
Auxiliary Switch (OF):
• remotely indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts.

• can be used to operate indicator lights, relays or other accessories.
• circuit breaker can accommodate up to three 1A/1B auxiliary switches.
Alarm Switch (SD)
• indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:

— an overload
— a short circuit
— an earth-leakage fault
— operation of a voltage release
— operation of the “push-to-trip” button
• Returns to de-energized state when the circuit breaker is reset.
Overcurrent Trip Switch (SDE)
• indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:

— an overload
— a short circuit
— an earth-leakage fault
• Returns to de-energized state when the circuit breaker is reset.
103
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 72: Electrical Characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE Auxiliary Contacts
Contacts Standard Low Level1

Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 24 V
Voltage AC DC AC DC
24 V 6 6 5 5
48 V 6 2.5 5 2.5
110 V 6 0.6 5 0.6
Operational
220/240 V 6 — 5 —
current (A)
250 V — 0.3 5 0.3
380/440 V 6 — 5 —
480 V 6 — 5 —
660/690 V 6 — — —
1 SDE is not available in low level for electrically-operated P-frame circuit breakers.
NOTE: If the maximum voltage and current is exceeded, the low-level functions of the switch will be
lost but the switch will continue to function as a standard switch.
Table 73: Catalog Numbers
Standard Low Level

Min Load = 100 mA with 24 V Min Load = 1 mA with 24 V
Description
Factory-Installed Field-Installable Factory-Installed Field-Installable
Cat. No. Suffix Cat. No. Cat. No. Suffix Cat. No.
1 Auxiliary Switch (OF) 1a1b AA S29450 AE S29452
2 Auxiliary Switch (OF) 1a1b AB 2x S29450 AF 2x S29452
3 Auxiliary Switch (OF) 1a1b AC 3x S29450 AG 3x S29452
Alarm Switch (SD) 1a1b BC S29450 BH S29452
Overcurrent Trip Switch (SDE) 1a1b BD S29450 BJ S29452
Alarm Switch/Overcurrent Trip Switch (SD/SDE) 2a2b BE 2x S29450 BK1 2x S29452
1 Not available on an electrically-operated P-frame circuit breaker.
104
All Rights Reserved
™
Spring-Charging Motors (MCH) for P-Frame Circuit Breakers

The spring-charging motor automatically charges the spring mechanism for closing the circuit breaker
and also recharges the spring mechanism when the circuit breaker is in the ON position.
Instantaneous reclosing of the circuit breaker is thus possible following circuit breaker opening. The
spring-mechanism charging handle is used only as a backup if auxiliary power is absent.
The spring-charging motor is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact (CH) that signals the
charged position of the mechanism (springs charged).
Table 74: Spring-Charging Motor Characteristics
Characteristics MCH
Vac 50/60 Hz 48-60, 100-130, 200-250, 240-277, 380-415, 400-440, 480
Vdc 24-30, 48-60, 100-125, 200-250
Operating Threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Vn
Power Consumption 180 VA
Motor Overcurrent 2–3 x In for 0.1 s
Charging Time 4 s maximum on NW, 3 s maximum on NT
Duty Cycle 3 cycles per minute maximum
10,000 cycles for NW < 4000 A
Endurance
5000 cycles for NW t 4000 A
CH Contact 10 A at 240 V
Table 75: Spring-Charging Motors for Electrically-Operated P-Frame Circuit Breakers

Field- Replacement Coils
Factory
Rated Voltage Replacement
Description Installed Cat.
(+10%/-15%) Spring Charging Factory Installed Opening/Closing
No. Suffix Cat. No. Suffix Coil Cat. No.
Motor Cat. No.
48 ML S47391 SL S33660
100-130 MA S47395 SA S33661
Vac
220-240 MC S47396 SC S33662
Standard Motor for 380-415 MF S47398 SH S33664
Electrically-Operated
Circuit Breakers 24-30 MO S47390 SK S33659
48-60 MV S47391 SL S33660
Vdc
110/130 MR S47392 SA S33661
200/250 MS S47393 SC S33662
48 NL S47391 EL S33034
100-130 NA S47395 EA S33035
Vac
220-240 NC S47396 EC S33036
Communicating Motor
Mechanism for 380-415 NF S47398 EH S33038
Electrically-Operated 24-30 NO S47390 EK S33033
Circuit Breakers
48-60 NV S47391 EL S33034
Vdc
110-130 NR S47392 EA S33035
200-250 NS S47393 EC S33036
105
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic Trip Unit Accessories
Circuit breakers are shipped with trip unit installed, but can have the trip units replaced in the field.
Actual trip units and settings required for specific applications must be determined by a qualified
consultant or plant engineer. A coordination study is recommended to provide coordination between all
circuit breakers in the distribution system.
Table 76: Field-Installable Micrologic Trip Unit
Model Protection Additional Features Field-Installable Cat. No.1

2.0 (IEC only) LSO S132R
3.0 (UL/ANSI only) LI None S131A
5.0 LSI S133A
2.0A (IEC only) LSO S142R
3.0A (UL/ANSI only) LI S141A
Ammeter
5.0A LSI S143A
6.0A LSIG S144A
5.0P LSI S163A 2
Metering, Advanced Protection
6.0P LSIG S164A 2
5.0H LSI Metering, Advanced Protection & S173A 2
6.0H LSIG Harmonic Analysis S174A 2
1 The standard rating plug supplied with a trip unit is the “A” rating plug. To specify an alternative adjustable rating plug, please
add the letter designation to the end of the catalog number. Please refer to the Digest for a complete listing of adjustable
settings available with each plug. (Example: S143B would specify a “B” rating plug instead of the standard "A" plug.) Use suffix
“N” if no rating plug is required.
When replacing a Basic trip unit with Type A (Ammeter), P (Power metering) or H (Harmonic analysis) trip unit, order the 12-
pin connector kit S33101 for the PowerPact P-frame drawout circuit breakers or kit S33100 for PowerPact P-frame unit-mount
and R-frame circuit breakers.
2 Requires Circuit Breaker Communications Module.
Lead-Free Trip Unit Sealing Kit
The MICROTUSEAL lead-free trip unit seal was designed as a RoHS-compliant replacement for lead
seals. It may be used to seal Micrologic trip units and other devices. It is manufactured as a stainless
steel cable and polycarbonate locking mechanism which shows evidence of tampering. The seal is
individually numbered for control purposes.
Order kit number MICROTUSEAL .
Replacement Covers
Table 77: Replacement Covers

Device Cat. No.
Micrologic A Trip Unit Cover, clear S33592
Micrologic P/H Trip Unit Cover, opaque gray S47067
106
All Rights Reserved
™
Neutral Current Transformer (CT)
Current transformers are available for applications requiring ground-fault protection on three-phase,
four-wire systems or for neutral protection and metering. Neutral current transformers are not required
on non-ground-fault circuit breakers, or on three-phase, three-wire systems. The rating of the external
neutral current transformer must be compatible with the rating of the circuit breaker.
Table 78: Neutral Current Transformer Catalog Numbers
Circuit Breaker Sensor Cat. No.
250 S33575
P-Frame
400–1600 S33576
250 S48916
400–1600 S34036
R-Frame
2000 S48896
2500 S48182
All All NCTWIRING 1
12-pin Trip Unit Connector S33100

1 Included with NCT.
NOTE: These neutral current transformers cannot be used for Source Ground-Return (SGR) or
Modified Differential Ground Fault (MDGF) applications.
Ground-Fault Interface Module
The ground-fault interface module (P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 circuit breakers only) is
used to sum the current flow in three-phase, four-wire systems and multiple-sourced systems, using
one or more specially-designed external current sensors to measure current flow. The ground-fault
interface module is commonly used in two applications:
• For a ground-source return ground-fault sensing (SGR) system
• For a modified differential ground-fault (MDGF) system
More complex systems are possible, for information about these, contact a field sales representative.
Order kit number S48891 .
External Sensor for SGR or MDGF Protections

For use on 400 A sensor or higher.
In SGR applications, an external sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral
point to ground. Its secondary is connected to the Micrologic™ 6.0A, 6.0P or 6.0H trip units.
In MDGF applications, a sensor is installed on each phase and neutral conductor. The sensors for
each circuit breaker are connected to an interface module. These, in turn, connect to the Micrologic
6.0A, 6.0P or 6.0H trip units.
Order kit number S33579 .
107
All Rights Reserved
™
Sensor Plugs
Sensor plugs are used to set the current rating (In) of the PowerPact P- and R-frame circuit breakers.
Beginning in January 2007 (date code 07011), the sensor plugs are field-replaceable, down to 50% of
the original rating. Mechanical keying in the circuit breaker prevents changing a rating plug to a higher
rating than the original factory-installed sensor plug.
Table 79: Sensor Plugs
Original Circuit Sensor Plug Sensor Plug

Circuit Breaker
Breaker Amperage Range Catalog No.
250 A 250 A S47052
400 A 400 A S47053
600 A 600 A S48823
UL P-Frame
800 A 600–800 A S33092
1000 A 600–1000 A S33093
1200 A 600–1200 A S48824
630 A 630 A S33091
800 A 600–800 A S33092
IEC P-Frame 1000 A 600–1000 A S33093
1250 A 600–1250 A S33094
1600 A 600–1600 A S33095
600 A 600 A S48823
800 A 600–800 A S33092
1000 A 600–1000 A S33093
1200 A 600–1200 A S48824
UL R-Frame
1600 A 800–1600 A S33095
2000 A 1000–2000 A S33982
2500 A 1200–2500 A S33983
3000 A 1200–3000 A S48825
1600 A 1600 A S33095
2000 A 1600–2000 A S33982
IEC R-Frame
2500 A 1600–2500 A S33983
3200 A 1600–3200 A S33984
Rating Plugs
Interchangeable rating plugs are available to limit the long-time threshold setting range for greater
versatility.
Table 80: Rating Plug Settings
Rating Plug Switch Settings Ir = In x... Cat. No.

Type A 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 0.63 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 S48818
Type B 0.4 0.44 0.5 0.56 0.63 0.75 0.88 0.95 1 S48819
Type C 0.42 0.50 0.53 0.58 0.67 0.75 0.83 0.95 1 S48820
For P-Frame and Type D 0.4 0.48 0.64 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.93 0.95 1 S48836
R-Frame Circuit
Breakers Type E 0.6 0.7 0.75 0.8 0.85 0.9 0.93 0.95 1 S48837
Type F 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.9 0.92 0.94 0.96 0.98 1 S48838
Type G 0.66 0.68 0.7 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.8 0.82 S48839
Type H 0.48 0.5 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.6 0.62 0.64 S48840
Type R1 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 S33542
For NS630b– Type S 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.65 0.7 0.75 0.8 S33543
NS3200 Circuit
Breakers Type T 0.8 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.9 0.92 0.95 0.98 1 S33544
Type P (Off Plug) No Long-Time Protection. S33545
108
All Rights Reserved
™
Modbus Circuit Breaker Communication Module (BCM-ULP)

The circuit breaker communication module is independent of the trip unit. Installed on the circuit
breaker, behind the trip unit, it receives and transmits information on the communication network. An
optical link is used for communication with the Micrologic A, P, and H trip units. Power requirements
are 30 mA, 24 Vdc.
NOTE: The power supply for the circuit breaker communication module must be separate and isolated
from the power supply for the trip unit.
The following may be connected to this module:
• A set of dedicated switches which read the status of the circuit breaker.
• A set of “actuators” (MX shunt trip or motor mechanism) to control the circuit breaker.
Table 81: Circuit Breaker Communication Module Characteristics
.
ID Code, Address
Circuit Breaker Size, Rating, Performance
Identification Type of Trip Unit
Type of Long-Time Rating Plug
On/Off Indication
Status Indication Fault Trip
Controls Opening/Closing
Circuit Breaker and Trip Unit

A P H
Reading of Settings on Rotary Switches X X X
Fine Settings in the Range Imposed by the Rotary Switches X X
Settings
Setting of Protection and Alarms X X
Customized Alarm Programming X
Standard X X
Reading of Protection and Alarms Set X X
Customized X
Current X X X
Reading of Measurements Voltages, Frequency, Power, etc. X X
Operating and
Power Quality: Fundamentals and Harmonics X
Maintenance Aids
Waveform Capture X
History of Trips and Alarms1 X X
Histories
Log of Trips and Alarms X
Contact Wear, Counters, Etc. X X
Indicators
Maintenance Record X
1 Up to 10 trips and 10 alarms.
Table 82: Trip Unit Field-Installable Accessories

Field-Installable Kit Cat. No.
Factory-
P-Frame R-Frame
Installed
Description
Cat. No. With
Suffix Unit Motor Unit
I-Line™ Drawout Rotary I-Line
Mount Operated Mount
Handle
Circuit Breaker Communication Module (BCM) (Modbus) E1 S64205 S64207 S64206 S64205
Two Programmable Contacts Module (M2C) V S64273
Six Programmable Contacts Module (M6C) W S64204 S64202 S64204 S64201
External Voltage Sensing (EVS) YV S64203 S64210 S64209 S64210 S64208
Trip Unit Battery for Trip Indicator Lights — S33593
12-pin Trip Unit Connector for P- and R-Frame Circuit Breakers — S33100
109
All Rights Reserved
™
M2C and M6C Programmable Contacts

The M2C and M6C contacts are used with the Micrologic P and H control units, and indicate the type of
fault and instantaneous or delayed threshold overruns (i.e: trip unit protection pickup, current/voltage
unbalance, under/over voltage, reverse power, phase rotation, under/over frequency, and load
shedding). The M2C has two programmable contacts while the M6C has six. They require an external
24 Vdc power supply (100 mA consumption).
NOTE: The M2C and M6C may use the same 24 V power supply as the trip unit. The M2C, M6C and
trip unit power supply must be separate and isolated from the power supply used for the BCM/CCM.
M6C contacts are programmed via the control unit using a keypad or via a supervisory station with the
COM communication option. They may be programmed:
• With instantaneous return to the initial state
• Without return to the initial state
• With return to the initial state following a delay
Table 83: Characteristics for M2C and M6C Programmable Contacts
Minimum Load 100 mA/24 V

240 Vac 5A
380 Vac 3A
Breaking Capacity at a 24 Vdc 1.8 A
Power Factor (p.f.) of 0.7 48 Vdc 1.5 A
125 Vdc 0.4 A
250 Vdc 0.15 A
Zone-Selective Interlocking (ZSI)
Table 84:
ZSI is used to reduce the stress on electrical distribution equipment during fault
Upstream
A 1 conditions by reducing the time it takes to clear the fault, while maintaining
Circuit 2
reak er 3
system coordination between overcurrent protective devices.
4
5 During a short-circuit or ground-fault condition on a ZSI system, the device
Fault 1 directly ahead of the fault sends a signal upstream via control wiring to restrain
upstream circuit breakers from tripping and then trips with no intentional time
delay to clear the fault. Upstream devices which receive a restraint signal obey
1
their short-time and/or ground-fault delay settings to maintain coordination in
2 other areas of the system. Upstream devices that do not receive a restraint
3
4 signal trip with no intentional time delay.
5
Fault 2 • Fault 1—The upstream circuit breaker (A) will clear the fault with no
intentional delay, regardless of its time-delay setting.
• Fault 2—Circuit breaker (B) will inform upstream circuit breaker (A) that it is
clearing the fault. This will prevent circuit breaker (A) from tripping
1 1
2 2
instantaneously. Circuit breaker (A) will trip at the end of its time delay setting
Downstream
3 3
Circuit if the fault is not cleared during this time.
4 4
5 reak ers
5 ZSI requires trip settings be coordinated so a downstream circuit breaker will trip
before an upstream circuit breaker under overload, short-circuit or ground-fault
conditions. Effective coordination requires a system coordination study. See data
bulletin 0100DB0501, Short Circuit Coordination for Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers.
110
All Rights Reserved
™
Restraint Interface Module (RIM)

The restraint interface module (RIM) is used to allow zone-selective interlocking communications
between circuit breakers with old Micrologic, Merlin Gerin™, or Federal Pioneer™ trip units and GC
series ground-fault relays. For 120 Vac/24 Vdc systems, use catalog number S48890. For 240 Vac/24
Vdc systems, use catalog number S48895.
Downstream circuit breakers with Micrologic 2.0A, 5.0A, 5.0P, 5.0H, 6.0A, 6.0P, and 6.0H trip units can
restrain up to fifteen upstream circuit breakers with Micrologic 5.0A, 5.0P, 5.0H, 6.0A, 6.0P, and 6.0H
trip units without requiring a restraint interface module. If the number of upstream circuit breakers
exceeds fifteen, then a RIM is required.
Table 85: RIM Requirements1
USRC and USRCM trip units

Upstream Device
(Receives input from RIM)
Series B trip unit
STR58 trip units

Federal Pioneer
Downstream Device
GC-100 relay
GC-200 relay
Merlin Gerin
(Sends output to RIM)
Micrologic
Micrologic
Square D
Square D
trip unit2
Micrologic Trip Unit2 15 R R 15 15 R
Square D Micrologic Series B Trip Units R 26 R R R 15
Square D GC-100 Relay R R 7 R R R
Square D GC-200 Relay 15 R R 15 15 R
Merlin Gerin STR58 Trip Units 15 R R 15 15 R
Merlin Gerin STR53 Trip Units 15 R R 15 15 R
Federal Pioneer USRC and USRCM Trip Units R 15 R R R 15
Square D Add-on Ground Fault Module for Equipment Protection R 5 R R R R
1 R = RIM is required.
Number denotes maximum number of upstream circuit breakers that can be restrained without requiring a RIM.
2 Includes 2.0A (as a downstream trip unit only), 5.0A, 5.0P, 5.0P, 5.0H, 6.0A, 6.0P, and 6.0H trip units.
External Power Supply Module
When used with the Micrologic A, P, and H trip units, a power supply module makes it possible to:
• Display currents less than 20% of sensor (In).
• Maintain display of tripping causes after opening of the circuit breaker.
• Store the value of the interrupted current (P and H trip units only).
• The modules are not UL Listed.
Table 86: External Power Supply Module

Power Supply Input Output Output
Cat. No.
(+10%, -15%) Voltage Power
24–30 Vdc Input 685823
48/60 Vdc Input 685824
125 Vdc Input 5 VA/5 W 685825
24 Vdc
110–130 Vac Input (Ripple < 5%) 685826
200–240 Vac Input 685827
380–415 Vac Input 685829
External Battery Backup Module
The external battery backup module (Catalog No. 685831) provides up to twelve hours of backup
power for the power supply module.
111
All Rights Reserved
™
Test Equipment
Hand-Held Test Kit

The hand held test kit may be used to:
• Verify trip unit operation, the mechanical operation of the circuit breaker, and the electrical
continuity of the connection between the tripping coil and the trip unit.
• Supply control power to the trip unit for settings via the keypad when the circuit breaker is open
(Micrologic P and H trip units).
• Inhibit thermal imaging for primary injection test (for Micrologic types A, P or H).
• Inhibit ground fault for primary injection test (for Micrologic types A, P or H).
• Self-restrain Zone-Selective Interlocking (ZSI) (for Micrologic types A, P or H).
Table 87: Hand-held Test Kit Catalog Numbers

Device Cat. No.
Hand-held Test Kit S33594
Seven-pin Test Cable (for Connection Between Test Kit and Trip Unit)1 S48907
Two-pin Test Cable (for Connection Between Test Kit and Trip Unit) S48908
1 Included in the test kit. Kit for replacement only.
Full-Function Test Kit

The full-function test kit consists of a signal-injection box which can be used alone or with a supporting
personal computer (PC). The optional test kit software is compatible with Windows® 95, 98 and
Windows NT® operating systems.
The test kit without a supporting PC may be used to check:
• The mechanical operation of the circuit breaker
• The electrical continuity of the connection between the tripping coil and the trip unit
• Trip unit operation — for example:
— Display of settings
— Operating tests on the electronic component
— Automatic and manual tests on protection functions (trip curve verification)
— Tests on the Zone-Selective Interlocking (ZSI) function
— Inhibition of the ground-fault protection for equipment
— Inhibition of the thermal imaging
• Save test data into test kit
The test kit with a supporting PC may be used to:
• Print test data
• Compare the real tripping curve with the curves available on the PC
Table 88: Full-Function Test Kit Catalog Numbers

Device Cat. No.
Full-function Test Kit S33595
Seven-pin Test Cable (for Connection Between Test Kit and Trip Unit)1 S48907
230 Vac Filtered Power Cord1 S48856
120 Vac Filtered Power Cord1 S48855
1 Included in the test kit. Kit for replacement only.
112
All Rights Reserved
™
Circuit Breaker Terminations
Mechanical, Compression, and Distribution Lugs
The M-frame, P-frame and NS630b–NS1250 circuit breakers have mechanical lugs standard on both ends
of the unit-mounted circuit breakers. The M-frame and P-frame I-Line™ circuit breakers have mechanical
lugs standard on the O/OFF end only. These lugs are suitable for use with copper or aluminum wire. Rear
connectors, compression lugs and distribution lugs are available for special applications.
M-Frame Mechanical Lugs M-Frame R-Frame

Compression Lug Compression Lug
P-Frame Mechanical Lugs
P-frame and NS630b–NS1600 circuit breakers are also available in drawout construction. See
Section 8 for drawout cradle details.
The R-frame and NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers have terminal pads only (no lugs) for bus
connections on both ends. Terminal pads are required for the use of lugs on R-frame circuit breakers,
lugs are not available for NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers. See the section on R-frame and
NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers for information on terminal pad requirements. R-frame I-Line circuit
breakers have mechanical lugs standard on the O/OFF end only (AL1200R53K).
Copper mechanical lugs are available for use with copper wire only. These lugs can be factory
installed by adding an LC suffix to the circuit breaker catalog number for standard copper lugs and LD
suffix for high-amp copper lugs (M-frame, P-frame and NS630b–NS1250 d800 A circuit breakers
only). See the Digest or product selector or contact the field office for more information.
I-Line™ Jaw Configurations
Standard 3P I-Line circuit breakers are supplied with an ABC phase jaw connection. In applications
where the jaw configuration must be reversed, specify a CBA jaw configuration by adding the digit 6 to
the phasing position of the circuit breaker catalog number.
I-Line 2P circuit breakers are available in AC or CA phasing. Add the digit of the desired phasing to the
phasing position of the circuit breaker catalog number.
Table 89: I-Line Phase Options
Phase Option Number Phase Connections

1 AB
2 AC
3 BA
4 BC
5 CA
6 CB
Standard ABC
6 CBA
113
All Rights Reserved
™
Power Distribution Connectors

Power distribution connectors (PDCs) are available for M-frame, P-frame and NS630b–NS1250 unit-
mount circuit breakers as field-installable kits. They can be used for multiple load wire connections on
one circuit breaker. Each is UL Listed for copper wire only. Power distribution connectors are for use
on the O/OFF end of the circuit breaker only, and the O/OFF end must be connected to the load. PDCs
are for use in UL508 applications only.
PDC6P20 PDC12P4
Control Wire Terminations
Mechanical lug kits are available with provisions for control wire terminations. The control wire is
crimped to a standard ring-type wire crimp terminal (not included) and secured to the lug using the
#6-32 screw included in the kit. These lugs are UL and CSA Recognized as a circuit breaker
component.
These lugs are available factory installed or as field-installable kits. For factory-installed control wire
terminations, add the suffix from the table below in the lug option field of the catalog number.
Table 90: Control Wire Termination
Termination Code Control Wire Location Control Wire Suffix

L Both ends LW
M ON end only LU
P OFF end only LV
Table 91: Lug Kits
Lugs Max. Conductors/Lug

Catalog Circuit
Lug Type Used On Per Amp.
Number Breaker Type
Kit1 Rating No. Range
M-Frame, P-Frame d800 A, Unit-Mount, 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil

AL800M23K 3, 4 800 3
NS630b–NS800 I-Line (95–250 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame d800 A3, Unit-Mount, 3/0 AWG–600 kcmil
AL800P6K 3, 4 800 2
NS630b–NS800 I-Line (95–300 mm2)
3/0 AWG–750 kcmil
M-Frame, P-Frame d800 A3, Unit-Mount, (95–400 mm2);
AL800P7K 3 770 2
NS630b–NS800 I-Line Compact AL 750 kcmil
(400 mm2) only
M-Frame, P-Frame > 800 A3, Unit-mount, 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
AL1200P24K 1 1200 4
optional for P-Framed800 A, NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (95–250 mm2)
Aluminum
P-Frame > 800 A, optional for P-Frame d800 A, 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
Mechanical Lug2 AL1200P25K Unit-Mount 3, 4 1200 4
NS630b–NS1200 (95–250 mm2)
R-Frame, 3/0 AWG–600 kcmil
AL1200R53K I-Line 1 1200 4
NS1600b–NS3200 (95–300 mm2)
P-Frame > 800 A, optional for P-Frame d00 A, 350-600 kcmil
AL1200P6KU Unit-Mount 3 1200 3
NS630b–NS1200 (185-300 mm2)
3/0 AWG–750 kcmil
P-Frame d 800 A3,
AL1200P7KU Unit-Mount 3 1155 3 (95–400 mm2);
NS630b–NS800
Compact AL 750 kcmil only
AL2500RK Unit-Mount 2 2500 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (50–400 mm2)
114
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 91: Lug Kits (continued)
Lugs Max. Conductors/Lug

Catalog Circuit
Lug Type Used On Per Amp.
Number Breaker Type
Kit1 Rating No. Range
M-Frame, P-Frame d800 A, Unit-Mount, 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil

CU800M23K 3, 4 800 3
NS630b–NS800 I-Line (95–250 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame > 800 A, optional for d800 A, Unit-Mount, 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
CU1200P24K 1 1200 4
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (95–250 mm2)
Copper
P-Frame > 800 A, optional for d800 A, 3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
Mechanical CU1200P25K Unit-Mount 3, 4 800 4
NS630b–NS1200 (95–250 mm2)
Lugs4
CU1200R53K I-Line 1 1200 4
NS1600b–NS3200 (95–300 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame d800 A, 1–1/0 AWG
CU250P1K PJ 3 150 A 1
NS630b–NS800 (50 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 2/0 AWG–300 kcmil
YA250P3 1 250 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (70–150 mm2)
YA400P3 2 400 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (70–150 mm2)
YA1200R3 I-Line 4 1200 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (70–150 mm2)
YA300P5 1 300 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (95–240 mm2)
Aluminum YA600P5 2 600 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (95–240 mm2)
Compression
Lugs R-Frame, 4/0 AWG–500 kcmil
YA1200R5 I-Line 4 1200 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (95–240 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 500–750 kcmil
YA400P7 1 400 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (240–400 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 500–750 kcmil
YA800P7 2 800 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (240–400 mm2)
R-Frame, 500–750 kcmil
YA1200R7 I-Line 4 1200 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (240–400 mm2)
YA2500R7 Unit-Mount 2 2500 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (240–400 mm2)
CYA400P5 1 400 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (95–240 mm2)
CYA600P5 2 600 1
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (95–240 mm2)
Copper
Compression CYA1200R5 I-Line 4 1200 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (95–240 mm2)
Lugs4
M-Frame, P-Frame, 500–750 kcmil
CYA800R7 I-Line 2 800 1
NS630b–NS1200 (240–400 mm2)
CYA1200R7 I-Line 4 1200 1
NS1600b–NS3200 (240–400 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 10–4 AWG
PDC12P4 3 400 12
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (6–25 mm2)
Power M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 10–4 AWG

PDC12P44 4 400 12
Distribution NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (6–25 mm2)
Connectors M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 12–2/0 AWG
(Copper Only) PDC6P20 3 600 6
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (25–70 mm2)
M-Frame, P-Frame, Unit-Mount, 12–2/0 AWG
PDC6P204 4 600 6
NS630b–NS1200 I-Line (25–70 mm2)
1 For 4P circuit breakers, add “4” to kit catalog number (AL800M23K4 instead of AL800M23K).
2 For version with tapped hole for control wire add a T before the K to the kit catalog number (AL800M23TK instead of AL800M23K).
3 Does not fit onto I/ON end of unit-mount P-frame circuit breakers.
4 Not available with tapped hole for control wire.
115
All Rights Reserved
™
External Accessories
Phase Barriers
Phase barriers are available for M-frame, P-frame and NS630b–NS1600 unit-mount circuit breakers
with bus connections or with lugs d 800 A. Phase barriers are also available for R-frame and
NS1600b–NS3200 unit-mount circuit breakers.
Table 92: Phase Barriers

Used With Cat. No. Qty Per Kit
M-Frame and P-Frame S33646
3
R-Frame S33998
Electric Joint Compound
I-Line circuit breakers, I-Line busway plug-on units and I-Line panelboards and switchboards are
supplied with factory-applied joint compound on the plug-on connectors. The compound is especially
formulated for I-Line connections and contributes to the overall performance of the connection.
If the joint compound is removed, it must be reapplied. A two-ounce container of the compound
(Cat. No. PJC7201) is available.
Door-Mounted Operating Mechanisms
Door-mounted operating mechanisms are available for M- and P-frame circuit breakers. The Type L
door-mounted variable-depth operating mechanism feature heavy-duty, all-metal constructions. They
can be padlocked in the OFF position when the enclosure door is open. Handle assemblies can be
locked OFF with up to three padlocks, which also locks the door closed. Complete kits include a
handle assembly, operating mechanism, and shaft assembly, and are rated for NEMA Type 1, 3R and
12 enclosures. A door drilling template is supplied for ease of installation.
Table 93: Door-Mounted Operating Mechanisms

Operating
Mechanism
Description Description Handle Assembly1 Shaft Mounting Depth Cat. No.
7.2–11.625 in.
Painted, 8 inch LW1
(182–295 mm)
Circuit Breaker Mechanism Type L
Handle 7.2–22.25 in.
Assembly Painted, 8 inch LW4
(182–565 mm)
Type 3, 4 Painted, 8 inch 7.2–11.625 in. LHP48
Handle Assembly2
Type 3, 4, 4X Chrome Plated, 8 inch (182–295 mm) LCP48
Handle Assembly Painted, 8 inch — LHP8
Operating Mechanism — — LW7
Replacement Parts 7.2–11.625 in.

Standard Shaft — LS8
(182–295 mm)
7.2–22.25 in.
Long Shaft — LS10
(182–565 mm)
1 Painted handles are painted flat black, with the base ring silver.
2 Due to gasketing, NEMA 3 and 4 handle assemblies are NOT trip indicating.
Handle Extension
Handle extensions are available for M- and P-frame circuit breakers. Order catalog number 33195.
116
All Rights Reserved
™
Rotary Operating Handles
P-frame and NS630b–NS1600 circuit breakers are available with standard black directly-mounted
(IP-40) or door-mounted / telescopic door-mounted (IP-55) rotary handles. The rotary handles are
factory-installed and available with two early-break or two early-make contacts.
Table 94: Rotary Operated Handles

Factory-Installed
Device Switches
Cat. No. Suffix
— RD10
Direct Mounted, Standard Black Handle
Two Early-Break and Two Early-Make Switches RD16
— RE10
Door Mounted, Standard Black Handle
Two Early-Break and Two Early-Make Switches RE16
Rotary Handle Replacement Kit — S33875
Replacement Handles
Replacement handle assemblies are available for R-frame and NS1600b–NS3200 circuit breakers.
Replacement toggle handle extensions, including an optional longer handle extension, are available
for M-frame, P-frame, and NS630b–NS1600 circuit breakers.
Table 95: Replacement Handles for M-, P-, and R-Frame Circuit Breakers
Description Frame Field-Installed Cat. No.
Standard R-Frame S33997
Standard Short M-, P-Frame S46998
Long M-, P-Frame S46996
Door Escutcheons
Accessory cover door escutcheons are available for all M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–
NS3200 circuit breakers. Toggle door escutcheons are also available for fixed-mounted, P-frame,
manually-operated circuit breakers.
Table 96: Door Escutcheons for M-, P-, and R-Frame Circuit Breakers
Description Frame Field-Installed Cat. No.
M-, P-Frame S33718
Accessory Cover
R-Frame S33929
Toggle Handle M-, P-Frame S33717
Drawout P-Frame S33857
Locking Accessories
Field-installable handle padlock attachments are available for manually-operated circuit breakers. These
attachments will accommodate three padlocks with a shackle diameter of 3/16–5/16 in. (5–8 mm) and will
lock the circuit breaker in the O/OFF position only.
A handle padlock attachment is also available for locking manually-operated circuit breakers in either
the I/ON or O/OFF position. This attachment will accommodate three padlocks with a shackle diameter
of 3/16–5/16 in. (5–8 mm) and is available as factory or field installation.
Kirk® key interlock brackets are also available for locking circuit breakers in the O/OFF position only.
Not available for drawout P-frame or NS630b–NS1600.
Circuit breakers with rotary handles come standard with provision for padlocking the handle in the O/OFF
position only. Key locks are also available for locking the circuit breaker in the I/ON or O/OFF positions.
A keylock or padlock provision for padlocking the circuit breaker in the O/OFF position is optional on
electrically-operated P-frame and NS-630b–NS1600 circuit breakers.
117
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 97: Locks and Interlocking

M- and P-Frame R-Frame
Factory-Installed Field-Installed Factory-Installed Field-Installed

Device Description
Cat. No. Suffix Cat. No. Cat. No. Suffix Cat. No.
Removable (Lock Off or On) — — — —
Handle Removable (Lock Off Only) — S44936 — S33996
Padlocking
Device Fixed (Lock Off or On) YP S32631 YP S32631
Fixed (Lock Off Only) YQ MPRPAF YQ MPRPAF
Interlocking
Mechanical for Circuit Breakers with Rotary Handles1 — S33890 — —
(Not UL listed)
Provision Only, Vertical Mount,
1 key interlock including padlock Kirk JE1 — JE1 —
provision, open position only
Provision Only, Vertical Mount, 1 or
Kirk JA — — —
2 Locks
Provision Only, Horizontal Mount Kirk JK — JK —
1 Lock, M- and P-Frame Ronis JB — JB —
1 or 2 Locks, R-Frame Profalux JD — JD —
Provision and 1 Lock, Vertical
Kirk JG — — —
Mount
Key Locking Kirk JL — JL —
Provision and 1 Lock, Horizontal
Ronis JC — JC —
Mount
Profalux JF — JF —
Provision and 2 Locks Keyed Alike,
Kirk JN — — —
Vertical Mount
Provision and 2 Locks Keyed Alike,
Kirk — — JN —
Horizontal Mount
Provision and 2 Locks Keyed
Kirk JP — — —
Differently, Vertical Mount
Provision and 2 Locks Keyed
Kirk — — JP —
Differently, Horizontal Mount
1 Not available on M-frame, motor-operated P-frame, or I-Line circuit breakers.
Sub-Feed Lugs
Sub-feed lug kits are UL Listed for use on Listed equipment. They have plug-on jaw construction and
plug on to the I-Line bus stack in the same manner as branch circuit breakers. Lugs on these devices
accommodate the same wire sizes as the equivalent ampere rated circuit breakers.
Table 98: I-Line Sub-Feed Lug Kit Terminations
Plug-On Lug Mounting Ampere Lug

Poles
Kit Cat. No. Height Rating Catalog No. Wire Size Conductors Per Lug
3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
SL800M5 3 800 A — 3
(95–240 mm2)
3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
SL1200P5 3 1200 A — 4
(95–240 mm2)
350–600 kcmil
SL1200P6 3 1200 A — 3
(185–300 mm2)
3/0 AWG–750 kcmil
SL1200P7 3 1200 A — 2
(95–400 mm2)
3/0 AWG–500 kcmil
S33931 3 9 in. 1200 A AL1200P24K 4
(95–240 mm2)
3/0 AWG–600 kcmil
S33930 3 15 in. 1200 A AL1200R53K 4
(95–300 mm2)
118
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 10—P-Frame Cradles and Cradle Accessories
Circuit Breaker and Cradle Design

A
D
06123146
E
B B
F
Drawout Circuit Breaker

A—Terminal Cover C
B—Lifting Tabs
C—Extension Rail Handle Cradle
D—Padlock Provision
E—Position Indicator
NOTE: See page 19 for cradle catalog numbers.
F—Crank Insertion Opening
G—Stop Release Button
H—Crank Storage Space
Drawout Mechanism
The drawout assembly mechanism allows the circuit breaker to be racked in four positions (connected,
test, disconnected, or withdrawn), as shown in the figure below.
Connected Position Test Position Disconnected Position Withdrawn Position
Secondary Contacts Clusters (UL)
Stabs (UL)
NOTE: For UL/CSA Listed devices, the clusters are mounted on the circuit breaker and the stabs are on the cradle.
For IEC devices, the clusters are mounted on the cradle and the stabs are mounted on the circuit breaker.
119
All Rights Reserved
™
Connectors
Table 99: Available Connectors
Rear-Connected “T” Vertical Rear-Connected “T” Horizontal

Front-Connected Flat (FCF)
(RCTV) (RCTH)
Cradle Accessories
Cradle Position Switches

Three optional cradle position switches are available for the cradle:
• Cradle position switches (CE) to indicate the connected position.
• Cradle position switches (CD) to indicate the disconnected position. This position is indicated when
the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached.
• Cradle position switches (CT) to indicate the test position. In this position, the power circuits are
disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected.
Table 100: Cradle Position Switches
Switch Type CE CD CT Cat. No. CE CD CT Cat. No.

Maximum Push-In Switches 3 2 1 3 2 1
Standard: 10 mA/24 V Min. Load Low-Level: 1 mA/4 V Min. Load1
240 Vac 8A 24-48 Vac 5A
380 Vac 8A 240 Vac 5A
Breaking Capacity at a 480 Vac 8A 380 Vac 5A S33171
S33170
Power Factor (pf) of 0.3 600-690 Vac 6A 24-48 Vdc 2.5 A
24-48 Vdc 2.5 A 125 Vdc 0.8 A
125 Vdc 0.8 A 250 Vdc 0.3 A
250 Vdc 0.3 A
1 If the maximum voltage and current is exceeded, the low-level function of the switch will be lost but the switch will continue to
function as a standard switch with standard switch specifications.
120
All Rights Reserved
™
Cradle Locking and Interlocking
Disconnected Position Locking

The circuit breaker can be locked in the disconnected position by key interlock (optional, catalog
number S33772 ) or padlock (standard). The key interlock is on the cradle and accessible with the door
locked.
• Kirk key interlocks are available for UL/CSA circuit breakers. Key is captive when circuit breaker is
RONIS
closed.
• Locking in all positions (disconnected, test, and connected) is possible. Factory standard setting is
locking in disconnected position.
RONIS
Door Interlock
The door interlock (catalog number S33786) prevents the compartment door from being opened when
the circuit breaker is in the connected or test position. If the circuit breaker is put into the connected
position with the door open, the door can be closed without disconnecting the circuit breaker. For
greater protection, this interlock can be used in conjunction with the open door racking interlock.
O OFF
push
O OFF
Open Door Racking Interlock
The racking interlock (catalog number S33788 ) prevents racking in the circuit breaker when the door is
open. (Insertion of the circuit breaker racking crank is not possible when the compartment door is
open.)
Cradle Rejection Kits
The cradle rejection feature (optional, catalog number S33767) ensures that only the properly
designated circuit breaker or switch is matched with the selected cradle assembly.
Miscellaneous Accessories
Shutter and Shutter Lock

The shutters automatically block access to the main disconnects when the circuit breaker is in the
disconnected, test, or fully withdrawn position. The shutter lock is used to prevent connection of the
circuit breaker or to lock the shutters in the closed position.
The optional shutter assembly (catalog number S48933 ) consists of shutter and padlock provision.
Door Escutcheon (CDP)
The door escutcheon (catalog number S33857 ) provides a frame and seal for the circuit breaker.
Transparent Cover for Door Escutcheon (CCP) (P-Frame Only)
The door escutcheon cover (catalog number S33859) is hinge-mounted and is designed to be installed
on the door escutcheon for the P-frame drawout circuit breaker.
121
All Rights Reserved
™
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 11: Terminal Layout for Push-In Connector Installation
CD2 CD
824 814
822 812
821 811
Com UC UC2 UC3 UC4 M6C CA 2 CA SDE MN M SD CAO2 CAO

E5 E6 5 M1 M2 M3 F2 3 3 544 534 84 D2/C12 94 524 514
E3 E4 3 4 T3 T4 N 2 2 542 532 82 C13 92 522 512
E1 E2 1 2 T1 T2 F1- 1 1 541 531 81 D1/C11 91 521 511
O3 O2 O
34 24 14
32 22 12
31 21 11
CE3 CE2 CE CT
334 324 314 914 Connector Recommended Wire Size
332 322 312 912 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) MIN shielded pair
E1–E2
331 321 311 911 cable or twisted pair copper wires
2
E3–E6, Q1, Q2, Q3 22 AWG (0.3 mm ) shielded twisted pairs
with drain (Belden 8723 or equal)3
Z1–Z5 22 AWG (0.3 mm2)
V1, V2, V3, Vn 22–16 AWG (0.3–1.5 mm2)
T 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) stranded shielded cable
OF, SD, SDE 18–16 AWG (0.8–1.5 mm2)
MN, MX 18–14 AWG (0.8–2.5 mm2)
F Size per aux 24 Vdc power supply
Function Connector Description Trip Unit Type
Auxiliary Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch

Basic A P H Connector Description
OF
Contacts position contacts
— X X X Com: E1-E6 Communication
Rotary CAO Early break contact — X X X UC1: Z Zone-selective Interlocking

Handle
Contacts CAF Early make contact Z1 = ZSI OUT signal
CD Disconnected position contacts Z2 = ZSI OUT

Cradle
CE Connected position contacts Z3 = ZSI IN signal
Contacts
CT Test position contacts Z4 = ZSI IN short time
SDE Electrical fault alarm contact Z5 = ZSI IN ground fault
SD Alarm contact — X X X UC1: M1 Modified differential ground fault (MDGF)

Remote
Operation
MN Undervoltage trip device — X X X UC2: T External neutral
MX1 Shunt trip — X X X UC2: M Modified differential ground fault (MDGF)

1 When networked MXF coils are used, terminal C3 must be connected — X X X UC3: F 24 Vdc external power supply (F1 -, F2 +)
to line even if the communication module is not installed.
— — X X UC3: Vn External neutral plug
— — X X UC4 External phase voltage sensing
— — X X M6C Six programmable contacts
122
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 12: Wiring Diagrams for Auxiliary Connections
Power Trip Unit Remote Operation
Wiring of the COM

varies with
C13
C12
D2
available options.
A See Figure 13.
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
MN M
or
Circuit Breaker
Communication
B Module (BCM)
D1
C11
C
D
NOTE: All diagrams show circuit breaker in tripped position.
E–For proper wiring of the FDM, refer to user guide 5100512864A-02.
Auxiliary Contacts Cell Switches

Disconnected
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Connected
Fault
Fault
Position
912 Test
522
524
512
514
542
544
532
534
812
822
824
814
332
334
324
312
314
322
914
82
84
92
94
32
34
22
24
12
14
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO2 CAO1

CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT1
521
541
511
531
81
91
21
31
11
821
811
321
331
311
911
123
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 13 – Wiring Diagrams for the COM Option
Wiring of the I/O Modules
ULP cord
I/O Module
Circuit Breaker
ULP cord
Black White
Red Blue
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
Circuit Breaker
Microswitches Communication
Connected to BCM Module (BCM)
Wiring of the COM Option (Modbus BCM ULP and CCM Modules
A. Modbus RS 485 4-wire A. Modbus RS 485 2-wire B. Modbus RS 485 2-wire + ULP
without ULP module without ULP module with ULP module
External power supply External power supply External power supply
24 V c
- + 24 V c
- + 24 V c
- +
A Typical for all CCMs.
See cell switches
Micrologic P/H + - + - + -
EGX100 EGX100 EGX100
Page 123.
Modbus
Com
Address Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+ Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+ Rx- Rx+ Tx- Tx+
47
The B configuration is
Baud-rat
e
19.2 k
4W, 2W+UL
P
only possible with CCM
4wires marked Schneider Electric
on the front face.
B
Micrologic P/H + - + - + - + -
Network
Network
Network
FDM121
Modbus A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’
Com version > V2.0.2
Address
CCM CCM CCM
Breaker
Breaker
Breaker
Baud-rate
19.2 k
A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’ A B A’ B’
4W, 2W+UL
P
2w+ULP + - + - + -
Circuit Breaker
ULP Cord
Red Black White Blue
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
customer terminal block customer terminal block customer terminal block
124
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 14: Communication Components and FDM121 Connections
Modbus-SL Ethernet
24 Vdc
- +
A 24 Vdc
- +
B
D0 = A’ / Rx-, A / Tx-
D1 = B’ / Rx+, B / Tx+
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFM D IFE D
4.3 ft. 9.8 ft.
(1.3 m) (3 m) OR
E E
0.98 ft.
(0.35 m) F F
C C
Red Black White Blue Red Black White Blue
LV434195 LV434196 LV434197 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6

24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
Circuit Breaker ULP Cord
Connections
PowerPact and Compact circuit Customer Terminal Block Customer Terminal Block
devices (FDM121 display, IFM, IFE or
I/O module) via the circuit breaker ULP A. Modbus Network
cord. B. Ethernet Network
• Cord is available in three lengths: D. FDM Display
0.98 ft. (0.35 m), 4.3 ft. (1.3 m) and E. ULP Termination
9.8 ft. (3 m). F. ULP Cable
125
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 11—Circuit Breaker Dimensional Drawings
Dimensions for M-Frame Circuit Breakers
Figure 15: M-Frame Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Enclosure Mounting Holes and
Door Cutouts
7.835
(199) 7.835
7.638 (199)
4x Ø 0.256 (194) 2.795 4x Ø 0.256
(6,5) (71) (6,5)
(76,5)
3.012
8.504
(216)
7.874
7.874
(200)
(200)
(120,5)
4.744
0.63
(16)
0.315
0.098
(8)
(2,5) 3.425 1.89

(87) (48)
9.606
(244)
7.835
4x Ø 0.256 (199) 4x Ø 0.256
(6,5) (6.5)
2.52
(64)
7.874
(200)
10.472
7.874
(200)
(266)
5.669
(144)
4.764 1.535
(121) (39)
1.299
(33)
0.886 7.835
(22,5) (199)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
126
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 16: M-Frame Individually-Mounted 3P 800 A Circuit Breaker with Lugs on Both Ends
0.217
(5,5)
(99,5)
3.917
7.835
(199)
7.874
(200)
8.268
(210)
7.402
4.449 0.492 (188)
(113) (12,5)
0.295 2.555
(7,5) (64,9)
28°
5° 0.256
ON 25°
TRIPPED (6,5)
OFF
0.433
(11)
(204,6)
8.06
(146,8)
5.78
(107,8)
4.244
(97,6)
3.84
5
(126,9) 2.756 2.756
(70) (70)
12.858 8.268
(326,6) (210)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
127
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 17: M-Frame Individually-Mounted 3P 800 A Circuit Breaker without Lugs
(35,6)
0.217
1.4
(5,5)
217
R0. 5)
(10,6)
0.42
(5,
(5,3)
0.21
(99,5)
3.917
7.835
(199)
0.36
0.669
(17)
(9,2)
(36,6)
1.441
0.984
(25)
0.72
(18,3)
1.1
(29)
Partial View B
(opposite side)
0.984
(25)
1.732
(44)
7.874
(200) 0.591
(15)
10.157
(258)
0.374
(9,5)
0.669
(17)
1.1
(29)
Ø0.433
8.2689 (11)
(210) Partial View A
(opposite side)
4.449 0.492
(113) (12,5)
7.402
0.295
(188)
(7,5)
2.555
28° 5°
(64,9)
ON TRIPPED
25° 0.256
OFF (6,5)
0.433
(11)
(204,4)
8.05
(146,8)
5.78
(107,8)
4.244
(97,6)
3.84
(16,5)
0.65
5 2.756 2.756
(126,9) (70) (70)
12.858 8.268
(326,6) (210)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
128
All Rights Reserved
™
Dimensions for P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Circuit Breakers
Table 101: Enclosure Dimensions
Circuit Breaker Enclosure Dimensions (H x W x D) Ventilation Area

Circuit Breaker Rating
in. mm Top Bottom
d800 A, 100% rated 51.9 x 20.25 x 7.75 1318.3 x 514.4 x 196.9 – – – –
d 1200 A, standard rated 51.9 x 20.25 x 7.75 1318.3 x 514.4 x 196.9 – – – –
!800 A, 100% rated 62.25 x 23 x 14.75 1581.2 x 584.2 x 374.7 16.5 in.2 10,645 mm2 16.5 in.2 10,645 mm2
Figure 18: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted Circuit Breaker Enclosure

Mounting Holes and Door Cutouts
3.01 4X Ø 0.26
4X Ø 0.26 (76,5) (6,5)
(6,5)
(200,0)
(216,0)
(200,0)
8.50
7.87
7.87
(119,0)
4.69
0.31 2.80 2.52
7.64 0.10
(8,0) (71,0) (64,0)
(194,0) (2,5)
7.83 7.83
(199,0) (199,0)
Handle Cutout
Accessory Cover Cutout
(Toggle Mech Only)
4X Ø 0.26 2.52
4X Ø 0.26
(6,5) (64,0) (6,5)
(200,0)
(266,0)
(200,0)
10.47
7.87
7.87
(144,0)
5.67
4.76 1.54
1.30 (121,0) (39,0)
(33,0) 7.83 0.89 7.83
(199,0) (22,5) (199,0)
9.61
(244,0) Handle Escutcheon Cutout
Accessory Cover Escutcheon Cutout (Toggle Mech Only) Dimensions: in.
(mm)
129
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 19: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 3P Circuit Breaker d800 A

with Lugs on Both Ends
8.27
48096-320-01
(210,0) 0.30
(7,5)
4.45 0.49
(113,0) (12,5) 7.40
25° (188,0)
28° 2.56
On 5° Off (64,9) 0.26
Tripped At Max (6,5)
(200,0)
7.87
0.43
(11,0)
(205,0)
8.07
(146,5)
5.77
(107,5)
(97,6)
4.23
3.84
2.50 2.49 2.76 2.76 3.92 0.22

(99,5) (5,5)
12.86 (63,6) (63,3) (70,0) (70,0)
7.83
(326,6) 8.27
(210,0) (199,0)
Dimensions: in.
Top View (mm)
Side View Back View
Figure 20: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 4P Circuit Breaker d800 A

8.27
48096-353-01
(210,0) 0.30
(7,5)
4.45 0.49 7.40
(113,0) (12,5) (188,0)
25 ° 2.56
28 °
On Off (64,9) 0.26
5° At Max (6,5)
Tripped
0.43
(200,0)
7.87
(11,0)
(205,0)
8.07
(146,5)
5.77
(107,5)
4.23
(97,6)
3.84
2.76 2.76 2.76

2.50 2.49 (70,0) (70,0) (70,0) 3.92 0.22
12.86 (63,6) (63,3) 11.02 (99,5) (5,5)
(326,6) (280,0) 10.59
(269,0)
Dimensions: in.
Back View Top View (mm)
Side View
130
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 21: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 3P Circuit Breaker !800 A

8.27
48096-321-01
(210,0) 0.30
(7,5)
4.45 0.49
(113,0) (12,5)
28° 25°
On Off 7.40
5° (188,0)
Tripped 2.56
(64,9)
(200,0)
At Max 0.26
7.87
4.00 (6,5)
(101,5) 0.43
(11,0)
(205,0)
8.07
(146,5)
5.77
(107,5)
4.23
(97,6)
3.84
2.50 4.19 2.76 2.76

3.92 0.22
(63,6) (106,5) (70,0) (70,0) (99,5) (5,5)
16.26
(413,0) 8.27 7.83
(210,0) (199,0)
Top View
Dimensions: in.
Side View Back View (mm)
Figure 22: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 4P Circuit Breaker !800 A

48096-354-01
8.27
(210,0) 0.30
(7,5)
4.45 0.49
(113,0) (12,5)
28 ° 25 °
Off 7.40
On (188,0)
5°
Tripped 2.56
(64,9)
(200,0)
At Max 0.26
7.87
4.00 (6,5)
(101,5) 0.43
(11,0)
(205,0)
8.07
(146,5)
5.77
(107,5)
4.23
(97,6)
3.84
2.50 4.19 2.76 2.76 2.76 3.92 0.22

(63,6) (106,5) (70,0) (70,0) (70,0) (99,5) (5,5)
16.26 10.59
11.02
(413,0) (269,0)
(280,0)
Top View in.
Back View Dimensions:
Side View (mm)
131
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 23: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 3P Circuit Breaker without Lugs
1.40
(35,5)
1.73
(44,0)
0.98
0.37 (25,0)
(9,1)
0.36
3
(9,5) 0.4 )
(29,0)
1.14
,0
(11
(15,0)
(18,3)
0.59
0.72
(200,0)
7.87
(258,0)
10.16
0.21
(5,3)
0.41
0.67 (10,5)
(17,0) 3.92 0.22
(199,0) (5,5)
7.83
(199,0)
8.27
(210,0) 0.30
(7,5)
4.45 0.49
(113,0) (12,5) 7.40
(188,0)
2.56 0.26
(64,9) (6,5)
2.30
(58,3) 0.43
1.86 (11,0)
(47,2)
(205,0)
8.07
(146,5)
5.77
(107,5)
4.23
(97,6)
3.84
(53,5)
2.11
2.50 2.49 2.76 2.76

(16,5)
0.65
(63,6) (63,3) (70,0) (70,0)

12.86 8.27
(326,6) (2015,0)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
132
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 24: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 4P Circuit Breaker without Lugs
0.40
(35,5)
1.73
(44,0)
0.98
0.37 (25,0)
(9,1)
0.36
3
(9,5) 0.4 )
(29,0)
,0
1.14
(11
(18,3)
0.72
(15,0)
0.59
(258,0)
10.16
(200,0)
7.87
0.21
(5,3)
0.41
0.67 (10,5)
(17,0) 3.92 0.22
(99,5) (5,5)
10.59
(269,0)
8.27
(210,0) 0.30
(7,5)
4.45 0.49
(113,0) (12,5) 7.40
(188,0)
2.56 0.26
(64,9) (6,5)
2.30
(58,3) 0.43
1.86 (11,0)
(205,0)
(47,2)
8.07
(146,5)
5.77
(107,5)
(97,6)
4.23
3.84
(53,5)
2.11
2.50 2.49 2.76 2.76 2.76

(16,5)
0.65
(63,6) (63.6) (70,0) (70,0) (70,0)

12.86
(326,6) 11.02
(280,0) Dimensions: in.
(mm)
133
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 25: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted Electrically-Operated 3P

Circuit Breaker d800 Awith Lugs on Both Ends
48096-348-01
8.27
(210,0) 7.40
(188,0)
2.30 0.30
(58,3) (7,5) 2.66 0.43
(67,6) (11,0)
(200,0)
7.87
(182,0)
(175,5)
7.17
6.91
(107,5)
4.23
2.49 2.76 2.76
(63,3) (70,0) (70,0)
12.86 3.92 0.22
(326,6) 8.27 (99,5) (5,5)
(210,0)
Side View 7.83
(199,0)
Back View
Top View Dimensions: in.
(mm)

Circuit Breaker d800 Awith Lugs on Both Ends
48096-356-01
7.40
8.27 (188,0)
(210,0)
2.30 0.30 2.66 0.43
(67,6) (11,0)
(58,3) (7,5)
(200,0)
7.87
(182,0)
(175,5)
7.17
6.91
(107,5)
4.23
2.76 2.76 2.76 3.92 0.22

(70,0) (70,0) (70,0) (99,5) (5,5)
2.49
(63,3) 10.59
12.86 11.02 (269,0)
(326,6) (280,0) Top View
Dimensions: in.
134
All Rights Reserved
™

Circuit Breaker !800 Awith Lugs on Both Ends
48096-249-01
7.41
8.27 (188,0)
(210,0)
2.66 0.43
4.00
0.30 (11,0)
(200,0)
(101,5) (67,6)
7.87
(7,5)
(182,0)
(175,5)
7.17
6.91
(107,5)
4.23
2.76 2.76
4.19 (70,0) (70,0) 3.92 0.22
(106,5) 8.27 (99,5) (5,5)
16.26 (210,0) 7.83
(413,0) (199,0)
Top View in.
Back View
Dimensions:
Side View (mm)

Circuit Breaker !800 Awith Lugs on Both Ends
48096-357-01
7.41
8.27 (188,0)
(210,0)
2.66 0.43
4.00
0.30 (67,6) (11,0)
(200,0)
(101,5)
7.87
(7,5)
(175,5)
(182,0)
7.17
6.91
(107,5)
4.23
2.76 2.76 2.76

4.19 (70,0) (70,0) (70,0) 3.92 0.22
(106,5) 11.02 (99,5) (5,5)
16.26 (280,0) 10.59
(413,0) (269,0)
Top View in.
Back View Dimensions:
Side View (mm)
135
All Rights Reserved
™

Circuit Breaker without Lugs
1.73
(44,0) 0.98
48096-352-1
0.37 (25,0)
1.40 .43
(35,5) (9,5) Ø0 1,0)
(1
(15,0)
0.59
0.36
(9,1)
(200,0)
(258,0)
(29,0)
1.14
10.16
7.87
(18,3)
0.72
3.92 0.22
0.21 A (99,5) (5,5)
(5,3)
0.41 7.83
(10,5) (199,0)
Partial View A
0.67
(far side) scale1/1 Top View
(17,0)
7.40
8.27 (188,0)
(210,0) 2.66
2.30 0.30
(7,5) (67,6)
(58,3) (182,0)
(175,5)
7.17
6.91
(107,5)
4.23
2.49 2.76 2.76

(63,3) (70,0) (70,0)
12.86 8.27
(326,6) (210,0) Dimensions: in.
136
All Rights Reserved
™

Circuit Breaker without Lugs
1.73
(44,0)
0.98
48096-359-01
0.37 (25,0)
1.40 .43
(35,5) (9,5) Ø0 1,0)
(1
(15,0)
0.59
0.36
(9,1)
(200,0)
(258,0)
(29,0)
1.14
10.16
7.87
(18,3)
0.72
3.92 0.22
0.21 A (99,5) (5,5)
(5,3)
0.41 10.59
(10,5) (269,0)
Partial View A
0.67 (far side) scale1/1 Top View
(17,0)
7.40
8.27 (188,0)
(210,0)
2.66
2.30 0.30
(67,6)
(58,3) (7,5) (182,0)
(175,5)
7.17
6.91
(107,5)
4.23
2.49 2.76 2.76 2.76

(63,3) (70,0) (70,0) (70,0)
12.86 11.02
(326,6) (280,0) in.
Dimensions:
137
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 31: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 3P Circuit Breaker with

Rotary Handle
48096-351-01
1.73 0.98
1.40 (44,0) (25,0) 0.99
(35,5) 0.37 (25,1)
43
(9,5) Ø0. ,0)
(11
1
Ø6.3 0)
0.36
(9,1)
,
(29,0) (165
1.14
(258,0)
(200,0)
10.16
7.87
(18,3)
0.72
(121,5)
4.88
(15,0)
0.21 Partial View A 0.98 3.92 0.22
0.59
(5,3) (far side) scale 1/1 (25,0) (99,5) (5,5)
0.41 7.83
(10,5) (199,0)
0.67
(17,0) A Top View
8.27 7.40
(210,0) (188,0)
4.87
7.68 (123,6)
(195,0) 0.26
(6,5)
0.30
2.30 (7,5) 0.43
(58,3) (11,0)
1.86 (223,5)
9.04
(47,2)
(175,8)
7.46
(147,0)
6.32
(104,0)
4.23
(53,5)
2.11
2.49 2.76 2.76

(63,3) (70,0) (70,0)
12.86 8.27
(326,6) (210,0)
Side View
Back View in.
Dimensions:
(mm)
138
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 32: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 4P Circuit Breaker with

Rotary Handle
48096-358-01
1.73 0.98
1.40 (44,0) (25,0) 0.99
(35,5) 0.37 (25,1)
43
(9,5) Ø0. ,0)
(11
1
Ø6.3 0,2)
0.36
(9,1)
(16
(29,0)
1.14
(258,0)
(200,0)
10.16
7.87
(18,3)
0.72
(124,1)
4.88
(15,0)
0.21 Partial View A 0.98 3.92 0.22
0.59
(5,3) (far side) scale 1/1 (25,0) (99,5) (5,5)
0.41 10.59
(10,5) (269,0)
0.67
(17,0) A Top View
8.27 7.40
(210,0) (188,0)
4.87
7.68 (123,6)
(195,0) 0.26
(6,5)
0.30
2.30 (7,5) 0.43
(58,3) (11,0)
(229,5)
1.86
9.04
(47,2)
(189,5)
7.46
(160,5)
6.32
(107,5)
4.23
(53,5)
2.11
2.76 2.76 2.76

2.49
(70,0) (70,0) (70,0)
(63,3)
12.86 11.02
(326,6) (280,0)
Side View Back View
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
Figure 33: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 3P Drawout Circuit Breaker Door Cutout
9.02 10.19
(229) (259) 9.02 10.19
(229) (259)
11.88
(302)
10.15
(258)
(109)
4.27
(130)
5.13
6.31 7.17
(160) (182)
10.15 12.03
(258) (306)
19.21
(488)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
139
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 34: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 4P Drawout Circuit Breaker Door Cutout
11.76 10.19 11.76 10.19

(299) (259) (299) (259)
10.15
(258)
11.88
(302)
(109)
4.27
(130)
5.13
6.31 7.17
(160) 12.03 (182)
10.15
(306)
(258)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
Figure 35: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 3P Drawout Circuit Breaker Rear Cutout
t
8.08
(205) 0.33
4.04 (9)
(103)
(150)
5.91
(234)
9.22
1.97
(50)
(117)
4.61
4.29 8.51
(109) (216)
8.59
(218)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
140
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 36: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 4P Drawout Circuit Breaker Rear Cutout
t
10.83
(275) 4.04 0.33
(103) (8)
(150)
5.91
(234)
9.22
1.97
(50)
(117)
4.61
4.29 8.52
(109) (216)
11.35
(288)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
Figure 37: P-Frame Drawout 3P Circuit Breaker d1200 A with Front-Connected Flat (FCF)
Connectors
3.54 3.54
(90) (90) (100)
3.94
0.98
(25)
0.25
(6)
6.86
(175)
11.34 0.63
6.26 (288) (16)
2.62
(159) 0.45
(67)
(11)
(199)
7.83
(135)
5.33
2.95
(75)
(150)
5.91
(123)
4.85
(135)
5.33
1.73
(44)
1.73
0.75
(44) 11.19 1.79
0.87 2.76 2.76 (19)
(284) (46)
(22) (70) (70) in.
Dimensions:
(mm)
141
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 38: P-Frame Drawout 4P Circuit Breaker d1200 A with Front-Connected Flat (FCF)
Connectors
3.55 6.30
(90) (160)
0.98
(25)
(100)
3.92
0.25
(6)
6.86
(175)
2.76 2.76 2.76 2.62

0.63
(70) (70) (70) (67)
(16)
(199)
7.83
(135)
5.33
2.95
(75)
(150)
5.92
(123)
4.85
(135)
5.33
1.73
(44)
9.11
(231)
0.45 0.75 11.19 1.79
0.87 1.73
(11) (19) (284) (46)
(22) (44)
6.32 7.80
(161) (198)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
142
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 39: NS630b–NS1600 Drawout 3P Circuit Breaker d1600 A with Front-Connected Flat
(FCF) Connectors
48096-368-01
3.54 Y 3.54
(25,0)
(90,0) (90,0)
0.98
Z
(100,0)
3.94
Ø0
(8, .33
5)
Top View
Z 6.89 Min
6.34 Y 5.04 (175,0)
(161,0) (128,0)
2.76 2.76 2.64
0.59 (67,0)
(70,0) (70,0) (15,0)
(199,0)
(171,0)
7.83
6.73
(75,0)
2.95
(336,0)
13.23
(150,0)
5.91
X X
(123,0)
(141,0)
4.84
5.55
(12,5)
0.49
0.98 9.09
(25,0) (231,0)
9.25 1.79
.43 0.87 1.73 (45,5)
Ø0 11,0) (22,0) (44,0)
(235,0)
(
Back View Side View Dimensions: in.

(mm)
143
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 40: NS630b–NS1600 Drawout 4P Circuit Breaker d1600 A with Front-Connected Flat
(FCF) Connectors
Y
48096-371-01
3.54 6.30
(90,0) (160,0)
(25,0)
0.98
Z
(100,0)
3.94
Ø0
(8, .33
5)
Top View Z 6.89 Min

(175,0)
Y
2.64
2.76 2.76 2.76 (67,0)
(70,0) (70,0) (70,0) 0.59
(15,0)
(199,0)
7.83
(171,0)
6.73
(25,0)
2.95
(336,0)
13.23
(100,0)
5.91
X X
(123,0)
(140,0)
4.84
5.51
0.98 9.09
(12,5)
(231,0)
0.49
0.87 (25,0)
1.79
.43 ) (22,0) 1.73 9.25
Ø011,0 (44,0) (235,0) (45,5)
( 6.34 7.80
(161,0) (198,0)
Back View Side View in.
Dimensions:
(mm)
144
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 41: P-Frame Drawout 3P Circuit Breaker d1200 A with Rear-Connected “T” Vertical
(RCTV) Connectors
3.54 3.54
(90) (90)
(100)
3.94
0.98
(25)
0.25
(6)
0.37
(10)
6.86
(175)
6.32 5.06 2.62

(161) (128) 0.45 (67)
(11)
(199)
7.83
2.95
(75)
(150)
5.91
(123)
4.85
1.73
(44)
0.87
1.73
(22)
(44)
9.11
0.75 (231)
2.76 2.76 (19)
(70) (70) 12.67 1.79
3.54 3.54 (322) (46)
(90) (90)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
145
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 42: P-Frame Drawout 4P Circuit Breaker d1200 A with Rear-Connected “T” Vertical
(RCTV) Connectors
3.54 6.30
(90) (160)
0.98
(25)
(100)
3.92
0.25
(6)
0.37
(10) 6.86
(175)
2.62
(67)
0.45
(11)
(199)
7.83
0.87
(228)
(22)
8.99
(150)
5.91
(123)
(114)
4.85
4.50
2.76 2.76 2.76 1.73 1.73

(70) (70) (44) (44) 9.11
(70)
0.75 (231)
6.32 7.80 12.67 1.79
(19)
(161) (198) (322) (46)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
146
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 43: NS630b–NS1600 Drawout 3P Circuit Breaker d1600 A with Rear-Connected “T”
Vertical (RCTV) Connectors
48096-366-01
3.54 Y 3.54
(25,0)
(90,0) (90,0)
0.98
Z
(100,0)
3.94
Ø0
(8, .33
5)
0.59
(15,0) Z 6.89 Min
Top View (175,0)
2.64
1.97 (67,0)
2.76 2.76 (50,0)
(70,0) (70,0) 0.51
(13,0)
Ø
(110.43
(22,0)
0.87
,0)
(114,0)
4.49
(228,0)
(150,0)
8.98
5.91
X
0.51
(13,0)
(123,0)
4.84
(44,0)
0.98
(25,0)
6.34 5.04 1.73 9.09
(161,0) (128,0) (231,0) 1.81
10.55 (46,0)
(268,0) in.
Dimensions:
Back View Side View (mm)
147
All Rights Reserved
™
Vertical (RCTV) Connectors
48096-369-01
3.54 Y 6.30
(25,0)
(90,0) (160,0)
0.98
Z
(100,0)
3.94
Ø0
(8, .33
5)
0.59 Z 6.89 Min

(15,0) (175,0)
Top View
Ø
0.4 1.93 2.64
3
(1
2.76 Y 2.76 2.76 (49,0) (67,0)
1,0
)
(70,0) (70,0) (70,0)
0.49
(12,5)
(22,0)
0.87
(199,0)
7.83
(150,0)
(228,0)
5.91
8.98
X X
(123,0)
(114,0)
4.84
4.49
(25,0)
0.98
(44,0) 9.09
6.34 7.80
1.73
(161,0) (198,0) (231,0)

10.53 1.79
(267,0) (45,5)
Back View Side View
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
148
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 45: P-Frame Drawout 3P Circuit Breaker d1200 A with Rear-Connected “T” Horizontal
(RCTH) Connectors
3.54 3.54
(90) (90)
0.98
(25)
(100)
3.94
0.25
(6)
1.73
(44)
0.75
(19)
0.87
1.73 (22)
0.45
(11) (44)
6.86
(175)
6.32 5.06 2.62

(161) (128) (67)
3.56
(90)
(199)
7.83
0.37
2.95
(75)
(228,0) (10)
(150)
5.91
8.90
(114,0)
4.48
(123)
4.85
2.76 2.76 9.11

(70) (70) (231)
12.64 1.79
(321) (46)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
149
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 46: P-Frame Drawout 4P Circuit Breaker d1200 A with Rear-Connected “T” Horizontal
(RCTH) Connectors
3.54 6.30
(90) (160)
0.98
(25)
(100)
3.92
0.25
(6)
0.45
(11)
1.73
(44)
0.75
(19)
0.87 6.86
1.73 (22) (175)
(44)
2.62
(67)
(199)
7.83
0.37
(75)
296
(10)
(228,0)
8.99
(150)
5.92
(114)
4.50
(123)
4.85
2.76 2.76 2.76 9.11

(70) (70) (70) (231)
12.67 1.79
6.32 7.80 (322) (46)
(161) (198)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
150
All Rights Reserved
™
Horizontal (RCTH) Connectors
3.54 3.54
(25,0)
(90,0) (90,0)
48096-367-01
0.98
Z
(100,0)
3.94
Ø0
.
(8,5 33
)
(13,0)
0.51
.43 0.98
Ø0 ,0) (25,0)
(11 0.87
(22,0) 1.73 Z
(44,0) 6.89 Min
(175,0)
Top View
2.64
1.93 (67,0)
(49,0)
(15,0)
0.59
(199,0)
7.83
(75,0)
2.95
(150,0)
(228,0)
5.91
8.98
X X
(114,0)
(123,0)
4.49
4.84
2.76 2.76
(70,0) (70,0)
9.09 1.79
6.34 5.04 (231,0) (45,5)
(161,0) Y (128,0)
10.55
(268,0)
Back View Side View
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
151
All Rights Reserved
™
Horizontal (RCTH) Connectors
48096-370-01
3.54 6.30
(90,0) (160,0)
(25,0)
0.98
Z
(100,0)
3.94
Ø0
(8,.33
5)
0.87 Ø
0.98 (110.43
(12,5)
(22,0)
0.49
(25,0) ,0) Z 6.89 Min

1.73 (175,0)
(44,0)
Top View
1.93 2.64
2.76 Y 2.76 2.76 (49,0) (67,0)
(70,0) (70,0) (70,0)
(15,0)
0.59
(199,0)
7.83
(75,0)
2.95
(150,0)
(228,0)
5.91
8.98
X X
(114,0)
(123,0)
4.49
4.84
6.34 7.80 9.09

(161,0) (198,0) (231,0)
10.53 1.79
(267,5) (45,5)
Dimensions: in.
Back View Side View (mm)
Figure 49: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 100–1600 A External Neutral Current Transformers
8.20
(208,3)
6.95
(176,5) 0.94
(23,7)
5.04
(127,9)
1.38 5.38
(34,9) (136,7)
0.56
(14,2) 3.00
(76,2)
0.62
(15,7)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
152
All Rights Reserved
™
Dimensions for R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers
Figure 50: R-Frame Individually-Mounted UL Listed 3P Circuit Breaker
(115,0) (115,0) (44,5)
(15,9)
(44,5)
Minimum Enclosure Size (22,3) (15,8)
30 x 21 x 7
(762 x 533 x 178)
(115,5)
Minimum Ventilation
(100% Rated Circuit Breakers Only):
40.25 in.2 (250 cm2) on top and bottom of enclosure
(11
,0)
(150,0)
(381,1)
Circuit Breaker "A"
1600 A 0.50 in. (12.8 mm)
2000 A 0.63 in. (16 mm)
2500 A 0.79 in. (20 mm)
3000 A 0.79 in. (20 mm) (14,5
(76,0) (195,0) (15,0)

(390,0)
(210,0) (339,8)
(139,6)
(113,0) (12,6)
(163
,0)
(30,0)
(6,9)
(7,5)
(368,0)
(11,0)
)
8,8
(6,0)
(24
See Table
(222,3)
(168,5)
(131,8)
(18,3)
(119,3)
Dimensions: in.
(38,6) (mm)
153
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 51: R-Frame Individually-Mounted UL Listed 4P Circuit Breaker

4.53 4.53 4.53 1.75
(115.0) (115.0) (115.0) (44.5)
(15.8)
0.62
48096-450-01
0.88 0.62
(44.5)
1.75
(22.2) (15.7)
(115.5)
4.55
Ø0.43
(11,0
)
(150,0)
(381.1)
15.00
5.91
Circuit Breaker "A"
1600 A 0.50 in. (12.8 mm)
2000 A 0.63 in. (16.0 mm)
2500 A 0.79 in. (20.0 mm)
57
3000 A 0.79 in. (20.0 mm) Ø0. 5)
4.
(Ø1
2.99 7.68 0.59

(76.0) 19.88 (195,0) (15,0)
(505,0)
Top View
13.38
(339,8)
8.27 5.50
(210,0) (139,6)
14.49 Extended
4.45 0.49 At Max

Handle
(113,0) (12,6)
4Û Trippe
d
(368,0)
n Han
1.18 28Û O R6.42 Fo dle
(30,0) ld
25
Û (163,0) ed 0.27
0.30 Of (6,9)
(7,5) f At Max
(119,3)
0.43
4.70
Handle
(24 79
8.75 Folded
0.24
8,8
(11,0)
9.
(6,0)
See Table
(222,3)
"A"
(168,5)
6.63
(131,8)
(18,3)
5.19
.72
1.52
(38,6) in.
Dimensions:
154
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 52: NS1600b–NS3200 Individually-Mounted IEC Rated, 3P Circuit Breaker
(15,0)
1.97
0.59
(50,0)
0.98 2.99
48096-209-01
(25,0) (76,0) 0.51
(13,0)
(75,0)
2.95
Ø0
.
(11 43
,0)
(150,0)
(300,0)
11.81
5.91
9
Ø0.4
)
(12,5
4.53 4.53 0.59

(115,0) (115,0) (15,0)
7.68
(195,0)
15.35
(390,0)
Top View
13.38
8.27 (339,8)
5.50
(210,0) (139,6)
4.45 0.49 At Max
(113,0) (12,6)
4° Tripp
ed
14.49 Extended
1.18 ° On R 6.4 Handle

Handle
28 2
(30,0) (163 Folded
,0) 0.27
0.30 25 (6,9)
(7,5) ° Of At Max
f
(368,0)
0.43
Handle
8.75 Folded
0.24
)
(24 .79
8,8
(6,0) (11,0)
9
(222,3)
(20,0)
(168,5)
0.79
6.63
(131,8)
(18,3)
0.72
(119,3)
5.19
4.70
1.52
155
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 53: NS1600b–NS3200 Individually-Mounted IEC Rated 4P Circuit Breaker
48096-245-01
1.97
(15,0)
0.59
(50,0) 2.99
0.98 (76,0) 0.51
(25,0)
(13,0)
(75,0)
2.95
Ø0.43
(11,0
)
(150,0)
(300,0)
11.81
5.91
Ø0.49
4.53 4.53 4.53 (12,5)
(115,0) (115,0) (115,0)
7.68 0.59
19.88 (195,0) (15,0)
(505,0)
Top View
13.38
(339,8)
8.27 5.50
(210,0) (139,6)
14.49 Extended
4.45 0.49 At Max

Handle
(113,0) (12,6)
4° Trippe
d
(368,0)
n Han
1.18 28° O R6.42 Fo dle
(30,0) ld
25
° (163,0) ed 0.27
0.30 Off (6,9)
(7,5) At Max
0.43
)
(24 79
Handle
8.75 Folded
0.24
8,8
(11,0)
9.
(6,0)
(222,3)
(20,0)
(168,5)
0.79
6.63
(131,8)
(18,3)
(119,3)
5.19
4.70
.72
1.52
156
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 54: R-Frame RLTB 3P Terminal Pad (UL)

15.35
(390,0)
(115,5)
(15,9)
0.62
4.55
(150,0)
5.91
2.11
(53,6)
(115,0)
4.53
Top View
(461,2)
18.16
(20,0)
0.79
(238,9)
9.40
2.50 3.50 4.53 3.50 4.53 3.50 0.72

(63,5) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (18,3)
5.00 20.99
(127,0) (533,2)
7.05
(178,9)
Side View Back View in.

Dimensions:
(mm)
157
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 55: R-Frame RL3TB 3P Terminal Pad (UL)

15.35
(390,0)
(15,9)
(115,5)
0.62
4.55
(150,0)
5.91
2.11
(53,6)
(153,1)
6.03
(461,2)
18.16
(20,0)
0.79
(238,9)
9.40
4.00 3.50 4.53 3.50 4.53 3.50 1.06

(101,8) (88,90) (115,0) (55,9) (115,0) (88,9) (26,92)
8.00 21.67
(127,0) (550,4)
10.05 in.
(255,3) Dimensions:
(mm)
158
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 56: R-Frame RLTB 4P Terminal Pad (UL)

19.88
(505,0)
(15,9)
(115,5)
0.62
4.55
(150,0)
5.91
2.11
(53,6)
(115,0)
4.53
Top View
(461,2)
18.16
(20,0)
0.79
(238,9)
9.40
2.50 3.50 4.53 3.50 4.53 3.50 4.53 3.50 0.72

(63,5) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (18,3)
5.00 29.02
(127,0) (737,1)
7.05
(178,9)
Dimensions: in.
159
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 57: R-Frame RL3TB 4P Terminal Pad (UL)
19.88
(505,0)
(115,5)
(15,8)
0.62
4.55
(457,33)
18.0
(150,0)
5.91
2.11
(53,6)
(153,1)
6.03
(461,2)
18.16
(20,0)
0.79
(238,9)
9.40
4.00 3.50 4.53 3.50 4.53 3.50 4.53 3.50 1.06

(101,6) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (115,0) (88,9) (26,92)
8.00
(127,0) 29.70
10.05 (754,38)
(255,3)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
160
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 58: NS1600b–NS3200 RLTBE Terminal Pad (IEC)

19.88 4 Pole
(505,0)
15.35 3 Pole
(15,0)
(390,0) 1.97
0.59
0.98 (50,0)
(25,0) 0.51
(13,0)
(75,0)
2.95
(150,0)
5.91
M 10
(125,0)
4.92
(35,0)
1.38
3.15
2.17 (80,0)
(55,0) Top View
(264,0)
10.39
(18,3)
0.72
0.49
(26,7)
(12,5)
1.05
0.98
(25,0)
6.10 4.53
1.97
(155,0) (115,0)
2.46 2.95 (50,0) 4.53
(62,5) (75,0) (115,0)
3.94 0.39 TYP
(100,0) (10,0)
0.39 TYP
Side View (10,0) Dimensions: in.
(mm)
Back View
161
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 59: R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 Enclosure Mounting Holes and Door Cutouts
15.35 3-pole
(390,0)
19.88 4-pole 1.30
4x Ø0.43 (505,0)
(11,0) (33,0)
15.35 3-pole
(390,0)
19.88 4-pole
4x Ø0.43 (505,0)
(216,0)
(150,0)
(11,0)
5.91
8.50
(150,0)
5.91
(119,0)
4.69
13.62 0.87
(346,0) (22,0)
Accessory Cover Cutout
0.80
15.35 3-pole (20,4) 5.75 4.80
(390,0) (146,0) (122,0)
2.30
4x Ø0.43 (58,5) Handle Cutout
(11,0)
(150,0)
(267,0)
10.51
5.91
0.14
15.63 (3,5)
(mm)
Accessory Cover Escutcheon Cutout
Figure 60: R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 100–1600 A External Neutral Current Transformers
4.92
8.10 (125)
(206)
2.00
(51)
1.75
3.00
(44)
(76)
(162)
6.39
0.75
(19)
0.56
6.85
(14)
(174)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
162
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 61: R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 2000 A External Neutral Current Transformers
4.92
8.10 (125)
(206)
2.00
(51)
1.75
(44)
(102)
4.00
(162)
6.39
0.75
(19)
0.56
6.85
(14)
(174)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
Figure 62: R-Frame and NS1600b–NS3200 2500–3200 A External Neutral Current

Transformers
4.92
6.85 (125)
(174)
2.00
(51)
(162)
6.39
0.75
1.75 (19)
(44)
10.35 0.56
(263) (14)
11.60
(295)
Dimensions: in.
(mm)
163
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 12—Accessory Dimensional Drawings
Accessory Dimensions
Figure 63: IFE Ethernet Interface
ETH1 ETH2
IFE
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
1.77
Module Status (45) 3.62
Modbus-SL
Network Status 3.34 (92) 4.13
T LV434011
(84,8) (105)
2.50
2.83 (63,6)
(72) in.
2.80 Dimensions:
(mm)
(71)
Figure 64: I/O (Input/Output) Application Module
24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
I1 A1
I2
I3 O1
I4 O2 1.77 3.62
I5 O3
I6 (45) (92)
3.34 4.53
IO LV434063
(84,8) (115)
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2
2.83 2.50
(72) (63,6) in.
2.80 Dimensions:
(mm)
(71)
164
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 65: IFM Modbus-SL Interface
1.77 3.62
(45) (92)
3.35 4.13
(85) (105)
0.71 2.60 in.

(18) (66) Dimensions:
(mm)
2.87
(73)
Figure 66: FDM121 Switchboard Display Dimensions
3.78
(96) X
3.78
(96)
in.
Y Dimensions:
(mm)
Figure 67: FDM121 Switchboard Display Mounting Through Panel
3.62+0.03/-0
X (92+0.8/-0) X
0.42 3.62+0.03/-0
(10,6) (92+0.8/-0)
0.81 0.91
(20,7) (23) Y
in.
Z Dimensions:
(mm)
165
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 68: FDM121 Switchboard Display Mounting On Panel

0.89
2Ø
(22,5)
0.65
(16,5)
3.91
X (99,3)
X
1.26+/-0.02
(32+/-0.5)
0.75
(19)
0.59 1.46 0.79 0.51 0.23+/-0.01

(20) 2 Ø (22,5+/-0,3)
(15) (37) (13)
+/-0.06
3.91
+/-1.5
Z (33 ) 0.67
(17)
99.3
1.30
(99.3) Y in.
Dimensions:
(mm)
Figure 69: FDM128 Switchboard Display Dimensions
5.08
(129) X
6.42
(163) in.
Dimensions:
(mm)
Y
166
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 70: FDM128 Switchboard Display Mounting on Panel

(1.5–6)
3.94
(100)
X
1.20
(30.6)
0.69
(17.5)
1.54
(39)
+0/-0.01
Ø 0.89+0/-0,30
(22,4 )
3.94
(100)
3.94 3.94
(100) (100)
X
3.94
(100)
1.18+0/-0.008
(30+0/-0,20)
Y
in.
Dimensions:
(mm)
167
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 71: Masterpact, PowerPact, and Compact Circuit Breaker Communication
K Ethernet
J
24 V DC
Modbus
A
A A
A A
A
24 V DC
24 V DC EB
+24V
0V
II II II
KK
C
Eth2
C Eth1
C
C +24V
0V
D
D
KK +24V
0V
Eth1
Eth2
Eth2
Eth1
II
II
II I5
C
I6
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC
A1
K
K
K
K O1
O2
O3
K
K dule
IO Mo
E
I6
E
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C A1
I1
T2
O3 T1
34
I6 I6 O2 33
C C 24
I5 23
O1
I3 14
I2 13
C I2
C
I1 I1
+
24VDC
I6
C
I5
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC
dule
IO Mo
A1
T2
T1
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
A1
T2
T1
M
O2
M
24
O1 23
14
13
F
F
LL L
L LL M
M
FF G
G H H
H
H
A. FDM121 (TRV00121) E. IO application module (LV434063) I. ULP termination (TRV00880) M. NSX cord
B. IFE master (LV434011) F. Masterpact NT/NW J. FDM128 (LV434128)
C. IFE (LV434010) G. PowerPact P/R K. ULP cable
D. IFM (TRV00210) H. PowerPact H/J/L L. Circuit breaker ULP cord
168
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 72: Fixed Masterpact, PowerPact, and Compact Circuit Breaker Connection to the Communication Interface
Module
121
FDM
Color
Red E1 24 V
Black E2 0V
White E5 H
Blue E6 L
Breaker ULP
cord
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
Customer terminal block

24 V DC 24 V DC
- + - +
Ethernet Modbus-SL
D0 = A’ / Rx-, A / Tx-
ULP cable D1 = B’ / Rx+, B / Tx+
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFE IFM
ULP Termination ULP Termination
OR
169
All Rights Reserved
™
Figure 73: Drawout Masterpact, PowerPact, and Compact Circuit Breaker Connection to the I/O and Communication
Interface Module
121
FDM
24VDC
IO
application
Color module
Red E1 24 V
Black E2 0V
White E5 H
Blue E6 L
Breaker ULP ULP cable
cord
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
24 V
0V
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A’ / Rx- D0
B’ / Rx+ D1
Customer terminal block
Modbus-SL Ethernet
24 V DC 24 V DC
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFM IFE
ULP Termination ULP Termination

OR
170
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 13—Trip Curves
Basic Electronic Trip Unit ET 1.0I, M-Frame 800 A Characteristic Trip Curve
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In)
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
ELECTRONIC TRIP 1.0
7000 7000 CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 613-14
6000 6000
5000 5000
Long-time Pickup and Delay
4000 4000
Instantaneous Pickup and Delay
2x–10x
3000 3000
The time-current curve information is to be used
2000 2000
for application and coordination purposes only.
1500 1500
Curves apply from -25°C to +70°C
(-13°F to +158°F) ambient temperature.
1000 1000 Instantaneous override values are given on 613-10.
900 900
800
700
800
700
Notes:
600 600
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act
500 500
to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-
400
400
imaging effect comes into play if a current
300 300 above the long-time delay pickup value exists
for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of
200 200 a downstream device or the circuit breaker
itself. A subsequent overload will cause the
150 150
circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than
normal. The amount of time delay reduction is
100 100
90 90 inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed
80 80
70 70
since the previous overload. Approximately 20
60 60 minutes is required between overloads to
50 50 completely reset thermal-imaging.
40 40
2. Total clearing times shown include the
30 30 response times of the trip unit, the circuit
breaker opening, and the extinction of the
20 20 current.
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
5x
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
INSTANTANEOUS
PICKUP
1
x In 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 2x 3x 4x 6x 8 x 10 x .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
171
All Rights Reserved
™
Basic Electronic Trip Unit 1.0I P- and R-Frame Characteristic Trip Curve
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
ELECTRONIC TRIP 1.0I
6000 6000
5000
LONG-TIME 5000
Long-time Pickup and Fixed Delay
PICKUP Instantaneous Pickup
4000 4000
1.5x-12x
3000 3000
2000 2000
1500 1500
1000 1000 Instantaneous override values are given on
900 900
800 800 613-10.
700 700
600 600 Notes:
500 500
400
400
300 300 imaging effect comes into play if a current
above the long-time delay pickup value exists
200 200 for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of
a downstream device or the circuit breaker
150 150
itself. A subsequent overload will cause the
circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than
100 100
90 90 normal. The amount of time delay reduction is
80 80
70
LONG-TIME 70
inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed
DELAY
60 60 since the previous overload. Approximately 20
50 50 minutes is required between overloads to
40 40 completely reset thermal-imaging.
30 30 2. Total clearing times shown include the
response times of the trip unit, the circuit
20 20 breaker opening, and the extinction of the
15 15
current.
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5x
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
INSTANTANEOUS
10 x PICKUP
1.5 1.5
x In
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
1.5 x 2 x 3x 4x 6x 8x 12 x
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
172
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 2.0A NS630b–NS3200 Trip Unit Characteristic Trip Curve
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
Micrologic 2.0A Trip Unit
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
®
9000
8000
9000
8000
MICROLOGICTrip
Characteristic 2.0Curve
A TRIPNo.
UNIT
613-9
Long-Time Pickup and Delay
6000 6000
5000 5000 Short-Time

Long-time Pickup
Pickupwith
andNo Delay
Delay
4000 4000 Short-time Pickup with No Delay
LONG-TIME PICKUP
3000
x In = Ir 3000 The time-current curve information is to be used
2000 2000
1500 1500 (-13°F to +158°F) ambient temperature.
Instantaneous override
(-13°F to +158°F) values
ambient are given on
temperature.
1000
1000
900 900 613-10.
800 800
700 700 Notes:
Notes:
600 600
500
24 500 1. 1.
There
Thereis aisthermal-imaging
a thermal-imaging effect
effectthatthatcan
canact
16 to shorten the long-time delay.delay.
The thermal-
400 400 act to shorten the long-time The
imaging effect comes
thermal-imaging intocomes
effect play ifinto
a current
play if a
300 300
above the above
current long-time delay pickup
the long-time delayvaluepickup exists
for value
a timeexists
and then
for a is cleared
time and thenby the tripping
is cleared by of
200 200
a downstream
the tripping of device or the circuit
a downstream device breaker
or the
150 150 itself. A subsequent
circuit breaker itself. overload will cause
A subsequent the
overload
circuit
will breaker
cause the tocircuit
trip inbreaker
a shorter time
to trip in than
a
100 100 normal.
shorter The amount
time of timeThe
than normal. delay reduction
amount of is
90
80
90
80
inverse
time to thereduction
delay amount of time that
is inverse hasamount
to the elapsed
70 20 70 since the previous
of time overload.
that has elapsed Approximately
since the previous 20
60 12 60
minutes is required between overloads tois
overload. Approximately twenty minutes
50 8 50
completely
required reset
betweenthermal-imaging.
overloads to completely
40 4 40
2
2. Thereset
end thermal-imaging.
of the curve is determined by the
30 30 2. The endsetting.
short-time of the curve is determined by the
1 short-time setting.
20
.5
20
3. 3.
Total clearing
Total times
clearing timesshown
shown include
includethe
the
24 response
responsetimes of of
times thethe
trip
tripunit,
unit,the
thecircuit
circuit
15 15
breaker opening,
breaker opening,and
and the
the extinction
extinctionofofthe
16
current.
current.
10 10
9
8
LONG-TIME
9
8
4. 4. Overload
Overload indicator
indicator illuminatesatat100%.
illuminates 100%.
7
DELAY BANDS 7
SECONDS AT 6 x Ir
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
8
1 1
.9 SHORT-TIME 10 .9
.8 PICKUP 6 .8
.7 x Ir 1.5 2 2.5 .7
.6 .6
4
.5 .5
.4 3 5 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir
(Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)
173
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 3.0A P-Frame and R-Frame Trip Unit Characteristic Trip Curve
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In)

100
1.5
Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-6
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
®
9000
8000
9000
8000
MICROLOGIC 3.0and
Long-Time Pickup A TRIP
DelayUNIT
6000 6000
5000 5000 Long-time Pickup and Delay

LONG-TIME PICKUP
4000
x In = Ir
4000
3000 3000 for application and coordination purposes only.
2000 2000
1500 1500
Notes:
Notes:
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can ac
1000 1000
1. toThere
shorten
is a the long-time delay. effectThe
thatthermal-
900 900
800 800 thermal-imaging can
700 700 imaging effect the
act to shorten comes into play
long-time if aThe
delay. current
600 600 above
thermal-imaging effect comes into play if aexist
the long-time delay pickup value
500 500
for a timeabove
current and then is cleared
the long-time by the
delay tripping
pickup
400 400 avalue
downstream
exists fordevice
a time or and the circuit
then breaker
is cleared
300
24 300 itself.
by theA tripping
subsequent overload will
of a downstream cause
device or the
16 circuit breaker
the circuit breakerto trip in aAshorter
itself. subsequent time than
200 200 normal.
overload The
willamount
cause the ofcircuit
time delay
breaker reduction
to trip i
inverse to the
in a shorter amount
time of timeThe
than normal. thatamount
has elapse
150 150
since thedelay
of time previous overload.
reduction Approximately
is inverse to the 2
minutes
amount is of required
time that between
has elapsed overloads
since the to
100
90
100
90 completely reset thermal-imaging.
previous overload. Approximately twenty
80 80
70 70 2. The end of
minutes the curvebetween
is required is determined by to
overloads the
60 60
instantaneous setting.
completely reset thermal-imaging.
50 50
2. Total
3. The clearing
end of thetimes
curveshown
is determined
include by
thethe
LONG-TIME DELAY
40
SECONDS AT 6 x Ir
40
instantaneous
response timessetting
of the of theunit,
trip circuit
thebreaker.
circuit
30 30 3. breaker
Total clearing
opening,times
andshown include theof the
the extinction
20
current.
12
20
8 20 breaker opening, and the extinction of
4. See 613-8 for instantaneous pickup trip curv
current.
15 4 15
2
4. See trip curve 613-8 on page 175 for
24 instantaneous pickup trip curve.
10
1 10
9 .5 16 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
174
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 3.0A P-Frame and R-Frame Trip Unit Characteristic Trip Curve
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
®
9000
8000
9000
8000
MICROLOGIC
Instantaneous 3.0 A1.5X
Pickup, TRIP UNIT
to 12X
6000 6000
5000 5000
Instantaneous Pickup
4000
1.5x-12x
4000
3000 3000 for application and coordination purposes only.
2000 2000 Curves apply
(-13°F to fromambient
+158°F) -25°C to +70°C
temperature.
1500 1500
(-13°F to +158°F)
Instantaneous ambient
override temperature.
values are given on
613-10.
Instantaneous override values are given on
1000 1000 613-10.
900 900
800
700
800
700
Notes:
Notes:
600 600
1. The end of the curve is determined by the
500 500 1. The end of the curve is determined by the
interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
400 400 interrupting rating of the circuit breaker.
2.
2. Total
Totalclearing
clearingtimes
times shown includethe
shown include the
300
300
response
responsetimes
times of
of the trip
trip unit,
unit,the
thecircuit
circuit
breaker
breakeropening,
opening, and
and the extinction
extinctionofofcurrent.
the
200
3. current.
200
The instantaneous region of the trip curve
150 150 shows
3. The maximum total
instantaneous clearing
region times.
of the Actual
trip curve
clearing
shows times in this
maximum totalregion cantimes.
clearing vary Actual
INSTANTANEOUS
100
PICKUP
100 depending
clearing on in
times thethis
circuit breaker
region can mechanism
vary
90 90
80 x In 80 design andon
depending other
the factors. The actual
circuit breaker clearing
mechanism
70 70
time can be considerably faster than
design and other factors. The actual clearing
60 60
50 50
indicated.
time can beContact your local
considerably sales
faster thanoffice for
indicated
40 40
additional
Contact information.
your local Sales Office for additional
4. information.
See trip curve 613-6 on page 174 for long-
30
5x 10 x
30 time pickup and delay trip curves.
4. See 613-6 for long-time pickup and delay trip
20 20 curves.
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 1.5 x 2 x 3x 4x 6x 8x 12 x .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
175
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 5.0/6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Unit Characteristic Trip Curve
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000 Long-Time®Pickup
MICROLOGIC 5.0/6.0and DelayTRIP UNIT
A/P/H
8000
7000
8000
7000 CHARACTERISTIC and I2tCURVE
Short-Time Pickup TRIP OFF Delay
NO. 613-4
6000 6000
5000 5000 Long-time Pickup and Delay

4000 4000 Short-time
The time-current Pickup
curve and I2t isOFF
information Delay
to be used
LONG-TIME PICKUP
3000
x In = Ir 3000 The time-current curve information is to be use
Curves apply from
for application -25°C
and to +70°C purposes only
coordination
2000 2000
Notes:
Notes:
1000 1000
900 900
1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can ac
800 800
700 700 to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal-
600
24
600
500 500 above
abovethe thelong-time
long-time delay delaypickup
pickupvalue exists
value exis
16
400 400 for
foraatime
timeand andthenthen is iscleared
cleared by by
thethetripping
tripping
of a downstream device or the
a downstream device or the circuit breaker circuit breaker
300 300
itself.
itself.AAsubsequent
subsequent overload
overload willwill
cause
causethe the
circuit
circuitbreaker
breakertoto trip in a
trip inshorter
a shorter time thanthan
time
200 200
normal.
normal.The Theamount
amount ofof time
timedelay
delay reduction
reduction
150 150 isinverse
inversetotothe theamount
amount of of time
time that
thathashas elaps
elapsed since the previous overload.
since the previous overload. Approximately 2
100 100 Approximately twenty minutes
minutes is required between overloads to is required
90 90
80 80 between
completely overloads to completely reset
reset thermal-imaging.
70 20 70
thermal-imaging.
12
2.2. The
Theendendofofthe thecurve
curve is is determined by by
the the
60 60
determined
50 8 50
interruptingrating
interrupting ratingof of
thethe circuit
circuit breaker.
breaker.
40 4 40
3.3. With
Withzone-selective
zone-selective interlocking
interlocking ON,on, short-
short-tim
2
30 30 time
delaydelay utilized,
utilized andand no restraining
no restraining signal,
signal, the
1 the maximum unrestrained short-time delay
.5 maximum unrestrained short-time delay time
20 20 time band applies regardless
band applies regardless of the setting. of the setting.
15
24
15
4. response
Total clearing
times times
of the shown
trip unit,include the
the circuit
16
response
breaker times and
opening, of the thetrip unit, the
extinction of circuit
the
10 10
9 9 breaker opening, and the extinction of the
current.
LONG-TIME
8
7
DELAY BANDS
8
7 5. For current.
a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous
SECONDS AT 6 x Ir
6 6
5. can
Forbe turned OFF.
a withstand See trip
circuit curveinstantaneou
breaker, 613-7 on
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
page
can be178turned
for instantaneous
OFF. See 613-7 trip curve.
for See
4 4 table on page 182
instantaneous tripforcurve.
instantaneous
See 613-10 override
for
3 3 values.
instantaneous override values.
6. Overload indicator illuminates at 100%.
6. Overload indicator illuminates at 100%.
2 2
1.5 1.5
8
1 1
.9 SHORT-TIME 10 SHORT-TIME .9
.8 PICKUP 6 DELAY I2t OFF .8
.7 x Ir 1.5 2 2.5 (FIXED-TIME DELAY) .7
.6 SECONDS AT 10 x Ir .6
4
.5 .5
3 5 0.4 OFF
.4 .4
.3 .3
0.3 OFF
MAXIMUM
.2 .2
UNRESTRAINED
SHORT-TIME 0.2 OFF
.15 DELAY .15
.1 0.1 OFF .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
0
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
176
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 5.0/6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Units Characteristic Trip
Curve
CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000 Short-Time Pickup
MICROLOGIC ®
5.0/6.0 I2t ONTRIP
andA/P/H DelayUNIT
8000 8000
6000 6000
The time-current
Short-timecurve information
Pickup is toDelay
and I2t ON be used
5000 5000
4000 4000 The time-current curve information is to be used
Curves
for apply from
application and -25°C to +70°Cpurposes only.
coordination
3000 3000
1500 1500 Notes:
Notes:
1000
1.1.There
There is is
a athermal-imaging
thermal-imaging effect effect that canact
that can act
1000
900 900 totoshorten
shortenthe thelong-time
long-time delay. The thermal-
delay. The thermal-
800 800
700 700
imaging
imagingeffecteffectcomes
comes into into play
play ifif aa current
current
600 600 above
abovethe thelong-time
long-time delay
delay pickup
pickup valuevalueexists
exists
500 500 forfor
a atime
timeandandthen
then isis cleared
cleared by bythe thetripping
trippingof o
400 400 a downstream
a downstreamdevice deviceor or the
the circuit breaker
circuit breaker
300 300
itself.
itself.A Asubsequent
subsequentoverload
overload will cause the
will cause the
circuit
circuitbreaker
breakertototriptrip in
in aa shorter
shorter timetimethan
than
200 200
normal.
normal.The Theamount
amountof of time delay reduction
time delay reductionisis
inverse
inverse totothe
theamount
amount of timethat
of time thathas haselapsed
elapsed
150 150 since
since the theprevious
previousoverload.
overload. Approximately
Approximately 20
SHORT-TIME
minutes
twenty is required
minutes between
is required overloads
between to
overloads
100
90
PICKUP 100
90
completely
to completely reset thermal-imaging.
reset thermal-imaging.
x Ir
2.2.The
The endofofthe
thecurve
curveisisdetermined
determined byby the
80 80
70
1.5 2 2.5 6 8 10 70 end the
60 60 interruptingrating
interrupting ratingof
of the
the circuit
circuit breaker.
breaker.
50 50 3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short-
3. With
timezone-selective interlocking
delay utilized, and on, short-time
no restraining signal,
40 40
3 4 5 delay utilized and
the maximum no restraining
unrestrained signal,delay
short-time the
30 30 maximum unrestrained short-time delay
time band applies regardless of the setting. time
4.band
Totalapplies regardless
clearing of the
times shown setting.
include the
20 20
response
4. Total times
clearing of the
times trip unit,
shown the circuit
include the
15 15 breaker opening,
response times of and the extinction
the trip of current.
unit, the circuit
5.breaker
For withstand
opening, circuit
and breaker, instantaneous
the extinction of the
10 10 can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 on
current.
9 9
8 8 page 178 for instantaneous trip curve. See
5. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous
7 7
table on page 182 for instantaneous override
6 6 can be turned OFF. See 613-7 for
values.
TIME IN SECONDS
0.4
5 5 instantaneous trip curve. See 613-10 for

6. See Trip Curve 613-4 on page 176 for long-
ON
4 4 instantaneous override values.

time pickup and delay trip curve.
3 3 6. See 613-4 for long-time pickup and delay trip
0.2
curve.
ON
2 2
0.1
1.5 1.5
0.3
ON
ON
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 0.4 ON .4
SHORT-TIME
.3
DELAY I2t ON .3
SECONDS AT 10 x Ir 0.3 ON
MAXIMUM
.2 .2
UNRESTRAINED
SHORT-TIME 0.2 ON
.15 DELAY .15
.1 0.1 ON .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
(I LONG TIME SETTING I )
177
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 5.0/6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Units Characteristic Trip
Curve
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) Micrologic 5.0/6.0 Trip Units

100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000 Instantaneous Pickup,
MICROLOGIC ® 2XA/P/H
5.0/6.0 to 15XTRIP
and OFF
UNIT
8000 8000
6000 6000
5000 5000
Instantaneous
The time-current Pickup
curve information is to be used
4000 4000
2x–15x
for application and and OFF
coordination purposes only.
3000 3000
The time-current
Curves apply fromcurve
-30°Cinformation
to +60°C is to be used
for application
(-22°F andambient
to +140°F) coordination purposes only.
temperature.
2000 2000 Curves apply from -25°C to +70°C
1500 1500
Notes:to +158°F) ambient temperature.
(-13°F
Notes:
1000
1000
900 900 1. Theinterrupting
end of therating of the
curve circuit breaker.
is determined by the
800 800 2. interrupting
Total clearing times
rating of shown include
the circuit the
breaker.
700 700
600 response times of the trip unit, the circuit
600
breaker opening, and the extinction of current.
500 500
3. The instantaneous region of the trip curve
400
400
breaker opening, and the extinction of the
shows maximum total clearing times. Actual
300 300 current.
clearing times in this region can vary
3. The instantaneous
depending regionbreaker
on the circuit of the trip curve
mechanism
200
200
shows
designmaximum
and other total clearing
factors. times.
The actual Actual
clearing
150 150 clearing
time cantimes in this region
be considerably canthan
faster vary
depending on the circuit
indicated. Contact breaker
your local salesmechanism
office for
INSTANTANEOUS design and information.
other factors. The actual clearing
100
PICKUP
100 additional
90 90
80 x In 80 4. time
For can be considerably
a withstand fasterinstantaneous
circuit breaker, than indicated
70 70 Contact your local
can be turned OFF.Sales Office
See trip curvefor613-7
additional
on
60 60
information.
page 178 for the instantaneous trip curve. See
50 50
4. Fortable on page 182

a withstand for the
circuit instantaneous
breaker, instantaneous
40 40
override
can values.
be turned OFF. See 613-7 for
30 30 5. instantaneous
See trip curvetrip
613-4 on page 176
curve. See 613-10 and for
trip
10 x
curve 613-5 onoverride
instantaneous page 177 for long-time pickup,
values.
20 20 long-time delay, short-time pickup and short-
5. See 613-4
time delayand 613-5 for long-time pickup,
trip curves.
15 15
long-time delay, short-time pickup, and short-
time delay trip curves.
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
2x 3x 4x 6x 8x 12 x 15 x
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
178
All Rights Reserved
™
Micrologic 6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Units with Adjustable
Ground-fault Pickup and Delay Characteristic Trip Curve
Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.15
1.5
10
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
with Adjustable
MICROLOGIC Ground-Fault
®
Pickup
6.0 A/P/H TRIP and
UNIT
7000 7000 WITH ADJUSTABLE
Delay GROUND-FAULT
6000 6000 PICKUP AND DELAY
5000 5000 Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-1
CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 613-1
4000 4000 Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON
Ground-fault I2t OFF and ON
3000 3000 In d400 A
In ≤ 400 A
2000 2000 The time-current
The time-currentcurve
curve information
information is be
is to to used
be used
forapplication
for applicationand
and coordination
coordination purposes
purposes only.only.
1500 1500
Curvesapply
Curves applyfrom
from-25°C
-25°C
to to +70°C
+70°C
1000 1000 (-13°Fto
(-13°F to+158°F)
+158°F)ambient
ambienttemperature.
temperature.
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
GROUND-FAULT
150 PICKUP 150
x In
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9

20 20
15 15
10 0.4 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
0.6 0.8 1.0
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
DELAY
SECONDS AT 1 x In
1 1
.9
0.1 .9
0.2
0.4
.8 .8
.7 0.3 .7
ON
0.4
0.3
.6 .6
ON
.5 .5
0.2
GROUND-FAULT 0.4 OFF

ON
.4 .4
DELAY BANDS
I2t ON
0.1
.3 .3
ON
0.3 OFF
MAXIMUM
.2 .2
UNRESTRAINED
.15 DELAY .15
.1 0.1 OFF .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
GROUND-FAULT
.04 DELAY BANDS .04
I2t OFF
.03
(FIXED DELAY) .03
0
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
179
All Rights Reserved
™
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) Micrologic 6.0 A/P/H Trip Units

with Adjustable Ground-Fault Pickup and
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.15
1.5
10
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
MICROLOGIC®Delay
6.0 A/P/H TRIP UNIT
7000 7000 WITH ADJUSTABLE
Characteristic GROUND-FAULT
Trip Curve No. 613-2
6000 6000
PICKUP AND DELAY
Ground Fault I2t OFF and ON
5000 5000
4000 4000
400 A I d1200 A
Ground-fault In2t OFF and ON
3000 3000
400 A < In ≤ 1200 A
1500 1500
Curves apply from
for application -25°C to +70°C
and coordination purposes only.
1000 1000
900
900
800 800
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
150 150
100 100
90 90
80
GROUND-FAULT 80
70
PICKUP 70
x In
60 60
50 50
40 40
30
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
0.4
4 4
ON
3 3
0.2
2 2
ON
1.5 1.5
DELAY
SECONDS AT 1 x In
1 1
.9 0.1 .9
.8 0.2 .8
.7 0.3 .7
0.4
.6 .6
.5 .5
0.3
.4 GROUND-FAULT 0.4 OFF .4

ON
DELAY BANDS
I2t ON
.3 .3
0.3 OFF
0.1
N O
MAXIMUM
.2 .2
UNRESTRAINED
.15 DELAY .15
.1 0.1 OFF .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
GROUND-FAULT
.04 DELAY BANDS .04
I2t OFF
.03 (FIXED DELAY) .03
0
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
180
All Rights Reserved
™
AMPERES x 103
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
.15
1.5
10
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
Micrologic 6.0
® A/P/H Trip Units
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
MICROLOGIC 6.0 A/P/H TRIP UNIT
7000 7000 with Adjustable Ground-Fault
WITH ADJUSTABLE Pickup and
GROUND-FAULT
6000 6000
PICKUP AND DELAY
Delay
5000 5000
4000 4000 Characteristic Trip Curve No. 613-3
2
Ground-fault
Ground Fault I2It OFF
t OFFand
and ON
ON
3000 3000
In > 1200 A
In !1200 A
1500 1500
1000
900
1000
900
(-13°F
The to +158°F)
time-current ambient
curve temperature.
information is to be used for
800 800 application and coordination purposes only.
700 700
600 600
500
500
(-13°F to +158F) ambient temperature.
400 400
300 300
200 200
150
GROUND-FAULT 150
PICKUP
1120 A
800 A
x In
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
960 A
60 60
50 50
640 A
40 40
30 30
20 20
880 A
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
1040 A
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
720 A
4 4
3 3
2 2
1200 A
1.5 1.5
500 A
DELAY
SECONDS AT 1 x In
1 1
.9
0.1 .9
0.4
.8
0.2 .8
0.3
ON
.7 .7
0.2
0.4
.6 .6
ON
.5 .5
0.3

ON
.4 .4
DELAY BANDS
I2t ON
.3 .3
0.1
0.3 OFF
ON
MAXIMUM
.2 .2
UNRESTRAINED
.15 DELAY .15
.1 0.1 OFF .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
GROUND-FAULT
.04 DELAY BANDS .04
I2t OFF
.03 (FIXED DELAY) .03
0
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
.1
.15
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
.05
.06
.07
.08
.09
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
AMPERES x 103
181
All Rights Reserved
™
Table 102: Instantaneous Override Values Characteristic Trip Curve
Instantaneous Override1 Instantaneous Override1

UL/IEC Circuit Breaker UL/IEC Circuit Breaker
(kA Peak)2 (kA Peak)2
RG 600 130 ± 10% MG300 20 ± 15%
RG 800 130 ± 10% MG350 20 ± 15%
RG 1000 130 ± 10% MG400 20 ± 15%
RG 1200 130 ± 10% MG450 20 ± 15%
RG 1600 130 ± 10% MG500 20 ± 15%
RG 2000 130 ± 10% MG600 20 ± 15%
RG 2500 130 ± 10% MG700 20 ± 15%
RJ 600 90 ± 15% MG800 20 ± 15%
RJ 800 90 ± 15% MJ300 20 ± 15%
RJ 1000 90 ± 15% MJ350 20 ± 15%
RJ 1200 90 ± 15% MJ400 20 ± 15%
RJ 1600 90 ± 15% MJ450 20 ± 15%
RJ 2000 90 ± 15% MJ500 20 ± 15%
RJ 2500 90 ± 15% MJ600 20 ± 15%
RK 600 130 ± 10% MJ700 20 ± 15%
RK 800 130 ± 10% MJ800 20 ± 15%
RK 1000 130 ± 10%
Instantaneous Override1
RK 1200 130 ± 10% IEC Circuit Breaker
(kA Peak)2
RK 1600 130 ± 10%
RK 2000 130 ± 10% NS 800bN 130 ± 10%
RK 2500 130 ± 10% NS1000bN 130 ± 10%
RL 600 90 ± 15% NS1250bN 130 ± 10%
RL 800 90 ± 15% NS1600bN 130 ± 10%
RL 1000 90 ± 15% NS2000N 130 ± 10%
RL 1200 90 ± 15% NS2500N 90 ± 15%
RL 1600 90 ± 15% NS 3200N 90 ± 15%
RL 2000 90 ± 15% NS 800bH 90 ± 15%
RL 2500 90 ± 15% NS1000bH 90± 15%
PG 250 55 ± 10% NS1250bH 55 ± 10%
PG 400 55 ± 10% NS1600bH 55 ± 10%
PG 600 55 ± 10% NS2000H 55 ± 10%
PG 800 55 ± 10% NS2500H 55 ± 10%
PG 1000 55 ± 10% NS3200H 55 ± 10%
PG 1200 55 ± 10% NS630bN 55 ± 10%
PJ 250 15 ± 10% NS800N 55 ± 10%
PJ 400 22 ± 10% NS1000N 55 ± 10%
PJ 600 22 ± 10% NS1250N 55 ± 10%
PJ 800 22 ± 10% NS1600N 55 ± 10%
PJ 1000 22 ± 10% NS630bH 55 ± 10%
PJ 1200 22 ± 10% NS800H 55 ± 10%
PK 250 55 ± 10% NS1000H 55 ± 10%
PK 400 55 ± 10% NS1250H 55 ± 10%
PK 600 55 ± 10% NS1600H 55 ± 10%
PK 800 55 ± 10% NS630bL 55 ± 10%
PK 1000 55 ± 10% NS800L 55 ± 10%
PK 1200 55 ± 10% NS1000L 55 ± 10%
PL 250 20 ± 10% NS1250L 55 ± 10%
PL 400 22 ± 10% NS1600L 55 ± 10%
PL 600 22 ± 10%
PL 800 22 ± 10%
PL 1000 22 ± 10%
PL 1200 22 ± 10%
1 Faults at or above instantaneous override value will be cleared at 25 msec or less.
2 Test X/R=4.9; divide by 2.1 for nominal RMS
182
All Rights Reserved
™
Basic Electronic Trip Unit 1.0M, P-Frame 600 A MDP Characteristic Trip Curve
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) Basic Electronic Trip Unit 1.0M, 600 A
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
600 A ELECTRONIC
Instantaneous Pickup, 2XTRIP
to 16X1.0M
6000 6000
5000 5000
Instantaneous Pickup
4000 4000
2x-16x
The time-current
The time-currentcurve
curveinformation is to
information is be used
to be used
3000 3000 for application
for applicationand
andcoordination
coordinationpurposes
purposesonly.
only.
2000 2000
Curves apply
Curves applyfrom
from-25°C
-25°Ctoto
+70°C
+70°C
(-13°F to
(-13°F to +158°F)
+158°F)ambient
ambienttemperature.
temperature.
1500 1500
Instantaneous override
Instantaneous overridevalues
valuesare given
are onon
given page
1000 1000
182.
613-10.
900 900
800 800
Notes:
700 700
600
Notes:
600
500 500
1. interrupting
The end of the rating
curveof isthe circuit breaker.
determined by the
400 400
interrupting
2. Total clearingrating
times of the
shown circuit breaker.
include the
300 300 2. response
Total clearing
timestimes shown
of the trip include
unit, thethe circuit
responseopening,
breaker times of and
the trip
theunit, the circuit
extinction of the
200 200 breaker opening, and the extinction of
current.
current.
150 150
3. The
3. The instantaneous
instantaneous regionregionofofthe thetrip
trip curve
curve
shows maximumtotal
shows maximum totalclearing
clearing times.
times. Actual
Actual
100 100
90 90 clearing times in
clearing times inthis
thisregion
regioncancanvaryvary
INSTANTANEOUS
80
70
PICKUP
80
70
depending
depending on onthe
thecircuit
circuitbreaker
breaker mechanism
mechanism
60
x In
60 design and other
design and otherfactors.
factors.The Theactual
actual clearing
clearing
8x 13.5 x
50 50 time
time can be considerably
can be considerablyfaster faster than indicate
than
40 40 Contact
indicated.your localyour
Contact Sales Office
local salesfor additional
office for
information.
additional information.
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
2.5 x 5.5 x6.5 x 10.5 x
.15 2x 4x 16 x .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
183
All Rights Reserved
™
Basic Electronic Trip Unit 1.0M P-Frame 800–1200A MCP Characteristic Trip Curve
MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) Basic Electronic Trip Unit 1.0M

800 A–1200 A
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
Characteristic Trip Curve
TRIPNo. 613-11
10000 10000
9000
8000
9000
8000
ELECTRONIC 1.0M
7000 7000 Instantaneous
800Pickup,
A–1200 1.5X
A to 12X
6000 6000
5000 5000
4000 4000
The time-currentInstantaneous Pickup
curve information is to be used
1.5x-12x purposes only.
for application and coordination
3000 3000
The time-current
Curves apply fromcurve
-25°Cinformation
to +70°C is to be used
2000 2000
for application
(-13°F and
to +158°F) coordination
ambient purposes only.
temperature.
1500 1500
Curves apply from
Instantaneous -25°C
override to +70°C
values are given on page
(-13°F
182. to +158°F) ambient temperature.
1000 1000 Instantaneous override values are given on
900 900
800 800 613-10.
700 700 Notes:
600 600 Notes:
500 500 1. The end of the curve is determined by the
1. The end of the
interrupting curve
rating is determined
of the by the
circuit breaker.
400
2. interrupting rating
timesofshown
the circuit breaker.
400
Total clearing include the
300 300
2. Total clearing
response times
times of theshown include
trip unit, the
the circuit
response times ofand
breaker opening, thethe
tripextinction
unit, the of
circuit
current.
200
200
3. breaker opening, and
The instantaneous the of
region extinction of the
the trip curve
150 150 current.
shows maximum total clearing times. Actual
clearing
3. The times in thisregion
instantaneous regionofcan
thevary
trip curve
INSTANTANEOUS
100
PICKUP
100 depending
shows on the total
maximum circuitclearing
breakertimes.
mechanism
Actual
90 90
80 x In 80 design and other factors. The actual
clearing times in this region can vary clearing
70 70 time can be considerably faster than
depending on the circuit breaker mechanism
60 60
indicated.
design andContact your local
other factors. Thesales office
actual for
clearing
50 50
additional
time can beinformation.
considerably faster than indicate
40 40
Contact your local Sales Office for additional

30 30
5x 10 x information.
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 1.5 x 2 x 3x 4x 6x 8x 12 x .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
.03 .03
.02 .02
1 CYCLE
.015 .015
.01 .01
.009 .009
1
.008 2 CYCLE .008
.007 .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
184
All Rights Reserved
™
Section 14—Catalog Numbers
685823 ...........................111 MJA267002 ......................70 NPLLE34063U33R ..........94 NPRLE34063U43R ......... 94 PDC6P204 .................... 115
685824 ...........................111 MJA268002 ......................70 NPLLE34063U42R ..........94 NPRLE34063U44R ......... 94 PGA36025CU31A ........... 76
685825 ...........................111 MJA36300 ........................70 NPLLE34063U43R ..........94 NPRLE34063U63RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025CU33A ........... 76
685826 ...........................111 MJA36350 ........................70 NPLLE34063U44R ..........94 NPRLE34063U64RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025CU41A ........... 76
685827 ...........................111 MJA36400 ........................70 NPLLE34063U63RE1 ......94 NPRLE34063U73RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025CU43A ........... 76
685829 ...........................111 MJA36450 ........................70 NPLLE34063U64RE1 ......94 NPRLE34063U74RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025CU44A ........... 76
AL1200P24K ..................114 MJA36500 ........................70 NPLLE34063U73RE1 ......94 NPRLE34080U32R ......... 94 PGA36025CU63AE1 ....... 76
AL1200P24K ..................118 MJA36600 ........................70 NPLLE34063U74RE1 ......94 NPRLE34080U33R ......... 94 PGA36025CU64AE1 ....... 76
AL1200P25K ..................114 MJA36700 ........................70 NPLLE34080U32R ..........94 NPRLE34080U42R ......... 94 PGA36025CU73AE1 ....... 76
AL1200P6KU .................114 MJA36800 ........................70 NPLLE34080U33R ..........94 NPRLE34080U43R ......... 94 PGA36025CU74AE1 ....... 76
AL1200P7KU .................114 MJL26300 ........................70 NPLLE34080U42R ..........94 NPRLE34080U44R ......... 94 PGA36025U31A .............. 75
AL1200R53K .................114 MJL26350 ........................70 NPLLE34080U43R ..........94 NPRLE34080U63RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025U33A .............. 75
AL1200R53K .................118 MJL26400 ........................70 NPLLE34080U44R ..........94 NPRLE34080U64RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025U41A .............. 75
AL2500RK .....................114 MJL26450 ........................70 NPLLE34080U63RE1 ......94 NPRLE34080U73RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025U43A .............. 75
AL800M23K ...................114 MJL26500 ........................70 NPLLE34080U64RE1 ......94 NPRLE34080U74RE1 ..... 94 PGA36025U44A .............. 75
AL800P6K ......................114 MJL26600 ........................70 NPLLE34080U73RE1 ......94 NRHFE36160U32R ......... 98 PGA36025U63AE1 ............75
AL800P7K ......................114 MJL26700 ........................70 NPLLE34080U74RE1 ......94 NRHFE36160U33R ......... 98 PGA36025U64AE1 ............75
CU1200P24K .................115 MJL26800 ........................70 NPLLE34100U32R ..........94 NRHFE36160U42R ......... 98 PGA36025U73AE1 ............75
CU1200P25K .................115 MJL36300 ........................70 NPLLE34100U33R ..........94 NRHFE36160U43R ......... 98 PGA36025U74AE1 ............75
CU1200R53K .................115 MJL36350 ........................70 NPLLE34100U42R ..........94 NRHFE36160U44R ......... 98 PGA36040CU31A ........... 76
CU250P1K .....................115 MJL36400 ........................70 NPLLE34100U43R ..........94 NRHFE36160U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36040CU33A ........... 76
CU800M23K ..................115 MJL36450 ........................70 NPLLE34100U44R ..........94 NRHFE36160U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36040CU41A ........... 76
CYA1200R5 ...................115 MJL36500 ........................70 NPLLE34100U63RE1 ......94 NRHFE36200U32R ......... 98 PGA36040CU43A ........... 76
CYA1200R7 ...................115 MJL36600 ........................70 NPLLE34100U64RE1 ......94 NRHFE36200U33R ......... 98 PGA36040CU44A ........... 76
CYA400P5 .....................115 MJL36700 ........................70 NPLLE34100U73RE1 ......94 NRHFE36200U42R ......... 98 PGA36040CU63AE1 ....... 76
CYA600P5 .....................115 MJL36800 ........................70 NPLLE34100U74RE1 ......94 NRHFE36200U43R ......... 98 PGA36040CU64AE1 ....... 76
CYA800R7 .....................115 MPRPAF ........................118 NPNFE36160U32R ..........94 NRHFE36200U44R ......... 98 PGA36040CU73AE1 ....... 76
LCP48 ............................116 MPRPAF ........................118 NPNFE36160U33R ..........94 NRHFE36200U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36040CU74AE1 ....... 76
LHP48 ............................116 NCTWIRING ..................107 NPNFE36160U42R ..........94 NRHFE36200U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36040U31A .............. 75
LHP8 ..............................116 NPHFE36160U32R ..........94 NPNFE36160U43R ..........94 NRHFE36250U32R ......... 98 PGA36040U33A .............. 75
LS10 ..............................116 NPHFE36160U33R ..........94 NPNFE36160U44R ..........94 NRHFE36250U33R ......... 98 PGA36040U41A .............. 75
LS8 ................................116 NPHFE36160U42R ..........94 NPNFE36160U63RE1 .....94 NRHFE36250U42R ......... 98 PGA36040U43A .............. 75
LW1 ...............................116 NPHFE36160U43R ..........94 NPNFE36160U64RE1 .....94 NRHFE36250U43R ......... 98 PGA36040U44A .............. 75
LW4 ...............................116 NPHFE36160U44R ..........94 NPNFE36160U73RE1 .....94 NRHFE36250U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36040U63AE1 ............75
LW7 ...............................116 NPHFE36160U63RE1 .....94 NPNFE36160U74RE1 .....94 NRHFE36250U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36040U64AE1 ............75
MGA263002 .....................70 NPHFE36160U64RE1 .....94 NPNLE36063U32R ..........94 NRHFE36320U32R ......... 98 PGA36040U73AE1 ............75
MGA263502 .....................70 NPHFE36160U73RE1 .....94 NPNLE36063U33R ..........94 NRHFE36320U33R ......... 98 PGA36040U74AE1 ............75
MGA264002 .....................70 NPHFE36160U74RE1 .....94 NPNLE36063U42R ..........94 NRHFE36320U42R ......... 98 PGA36060 ....................... 75
MGA264502 .....................70 NPHLE36063U32R ..........94 NPNLE36063U43R ..........94 NRHFE36320U43R ......... 98 PGA36060CU31A ........... 76
MGA265002 .....................70 NPHLE36063U33R ..........94 NPNLE36063U44R ..........94 NRHFE36320U44R ......... 98 PGA36060CU33A ........... 76
MGA266002 .....................70 NPHLE36063U42R ..........94 NPNLE36063U63RE1 .....94 NRHFE36320U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36060CU41A ........... 76
MGA267002 .....................70 NPHLE36063U43R ..........94 NPNLE36063U64RE1 .....94 NRHFE36320U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36060CU43A ........... 76
MGA268002 .....................70 NPHLE36063U44R ..........94 NPNLE36063U73RE1 .....94 NRHLFE36250U44R ....... 98 PGA36060CU44A ........... 76
MGA36300 .......................70 NPHLE36063U63RE1 .....94 NPNLE36063U74RE1 .....94 NRNFE36160U32R ......... 98 PGA36060CU63AE1 ....... 76
MGA36350 .......................70 NPHLE36063U64RE1 .....94 NPNLE36080U32R ..........94 NRNFE36160U33R ......... 98 PGA36060CU64AE1 ....... 76
MGA36500 .......................70 NPHLE36080U32R ..........94 NPNLE36080U43R ..........94 NRNFE36160U44R ......... 98 PGA36060U31A .............. 75
MGA36600 .......................70 NPHLE36080U33R ..........94 NPNLE36080U44R ..........94 NRNFE36160U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36060U33A .............. 75
MGA36700 .......................70 NPHLE36080U42R ..........94 NPNLE36080U63RE1 .....94 NRNFE36160U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36060U41A .............. 75
MGA36800 .......................70 NPHLE36080U43R ..........94 NPNLE36080U64RE1 .....94 NRNFE36200U32R ......... 98 PGA36060U43A .............. 75
MGL26300 .......................70 NPHLE36080U44R ..........94 NPNLE36080U73RE1 .....94 NRNFE36200U33R ......... 98 PGA36060U44A .............. 75
MGL26350 .......................70 NPHLE36080U63RE1 .....94 NPNLE36080U74RE1 .....94 NRNFE36200U42R ......... 98 PGA36060U63AE1 ............75
MGL26400 .......................70 NPHLE36080U64RE1 .....94 NPNLE36100U32R ..........94 NRNFE36200U43R ......... 98 PGA36060U64AE1 ............75
MGL26450 .......................70 NPHLE36080U73RE1 .....94 NPNLE36100U33R ..........94 NRNFE36200U44R ......... 98 PGA36060U73AE1 ............75
MGL26500 .......................70 NPHLE36080U74RE1 .....94 NPNLE36100U42R ..........94 NRNFE36200U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36060U74AE1 ............75
MGL26600 .......................70 NPHLE36100U32R ..........94 NPNLE36100U43R ..........94 NRNFE36200U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36080 ....................... 75
MGL26700 .......................70 NPHLE36100U33R ..........94 NPNLE36100U44R ..........94 NRNFE36250U32R ......... 98 PGA36080CU31A ........... 76
MGL26800 .......................70 NPHLE36100U42R ..........94 NPNLE36100U63RE1 .....94 NRNFE36250U33R ......... 98 PGA36080CU33A ........... 76
MGL36400 .......................70 NPHLE36100U63RE1 .....94 NPNLE36100U74RE1 .....94 NRNFE36250U44R ......... 98 PGA36080CU44A ........... 76
MGL36450 .......................70 NPHLE36100U64RE1 .....94 NPNLE36125U32R ..........94 NRNFE36250U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36080CU63AE1 ....... 76
MGL36500 .......................70 NPHLE36100U73RE1 .....94 NPNLE36125U33R ..........94 NRNFE36250U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36080CU64AE1 ....... 76
MGL36600 .......................70 NPHLE36100U74RE1 .....94 NPNLE36125U42R ..........94 NRNFE36320U32R ......... 98 PGA36080CU73AE1 ....... 76
MGL36700 .......................70 NPHLE36125U32R ..........94 NPNLE36125U43R ..........94 NRNFE36320U33R ......... 98 PGA36080CU74AE1 ....... 76
MGL36800 .......................70 NPHLE36125U42R ..........94 NPNLE36125U44R ..........94 NRNFE36320U42R ......... 98 PGA36080U31A .............. 75
MICROTUSEAL .............106 NPHLE36125U43R ..........94 NPNLE36125U63RE1 .....94 NRNFE36320U43R ......... 98 PGA36080U33A .............. 75
MJA263002 ......................70 NPHLE36125U44R ..........94 NPNLE36125U64RE1 .....94 NRNFE36320U44R ......... 98 PGA36080U41A .............. 75
MJA263502 ......................70 NPHLE36125U63RE1 .....94 NPNLE36125U73RE1 .....94 NRNFE36320U63RE1 .... 98 PGA36080U43A .............. 75
MJA264002 ......................70 NPHLE36125U64RE1 .....94 NPNLE36125U74RE1 .....94 NRNFE36320U64RE1 .... 98 PGA36080U44A .............. 75
MJA264502 ......................70 NPHLE36125U73RE1 .....94 NPRLE34063U32R ..........94 PDC12P4 ...................... 115 PGA36080U63AE1 ............75
MJA265002 ......................70 NPHLE36125U74RE1 .....94 NPRLE34063U33R ..........94 PDC12P44 .................... 115 PGA36080U64AE1 ............75
MJA266002 ......................70 NPLLE34063U32R ..........94 NPRLE34063U42R ..........94 PDC6P20 ...................... 115 PGA36080U73AE1 ............75
185
All Rights Reserved
™
PGA36080U74AE1 75 PGL36060U33A 73 PJA36025CU33A 76 PJA36080U31A 75 PJL36060U31A 73

PGA36100 75 PGL36060U41A 73 PJA36025CU41A 76 PJA36080U33A 75 PJL36060U33A 73
PGA36100U31A 75 PGL36060U43A 73 PJA36025CU43A 76 PJA36080U41A 75 PJL36060U41A 73
PGA36100U33A 75 PGL36060U44A 73 PJA36025CU44A 76 PJA36080U43A 75 PJL36060U43A 73
PGA36100U41A 75 PGL36060U63AE1 73 PJA36025CU63AE1 PJA36080U44A 75 PJL36060U44A 73
PGA36100U43A 75 PGL36060U64AE1 73 76 PJA36080U63AE1 75 PJL36060U63AE1 73
PGA36100U44A 75 PGL36060U73AE1 73 PJA36025CU64AE1 PJA36080U64AE1 75 PJL36060U64AE1 73
PGA36100U63AE1 75 PGL36060U74AE1 73 76 PJA36080U73AE1 75 PJL36060U73AE1 73
PGA36100U64AE1 75 PGL36080 73 PJA36025CU73AE1 PJA36080U74AE1 75 PJL36060U74AE1 73
PGA36100U73AE1 75 PGL36080CU31A 74 76 PJA36100 75 PJL36080 73
PGA36100U74AE1 75 PGL36080CU33A 74 PJA36025CU74AE1 PJA36100U31A 75 PJL36080CU31A 74
PGA36120 75 PGL36080CU41A 74 76 PJA36100U33A 75 PJL36080CU33A 74
PGA36120U31A 75 PGL36080CU43A 74 PJA36025U31A 75 PJA36100U41A 75 PJL36080CU41A 74
PGA36120U33A 75 PGL36080CU44A 74 PJA36025U33A 75 PJA36100U43A 75 PJL36080CU43A 74
PGA36120U41A 75 PGL36080CU63AE1 PJA36025U41A 75 PJA36100U44A 75 PJL36080CU44A 74
PGA36120U43A 75 74 PJA36025U43A 75 PJA36100U63AE1 75 PJL36080CU63AE1 74
PGA36120U44A 75 PGL36080CU64AE1 PJA36025U44A 75 PJA36100U64AE1 75 PJL36080CU64AE1 74
PGA36120U63AE1 75 74 PJA36025U63AE1 75 PJA36100U73AE1 75 PJL36080CU73AE1 74
PGA36120U64AE1 75 PGL36080CU73AE1 PJA36025U64AE1 75 PJA36100U74AE1 75 PJL36080CU74AE1 74
PGA36120U73AE1 75 74 PJA36025U73AE1 75 PJA36120 75 PJL36080M68 79
PGA36120U74AE1 75 PGL36080CU74AE1 PJA36025U74AE1 75 PJA36120U31A 75 PJL36080U31A 73
PGL36025CU31A 74 74 PJA36040CU31A 76 PJA36120U33A 75 PJL36080U33A 73
PGL36025CU33A 74 PGL36080U31A 73 PJA36040CU33A 76 PJA36120U41A 75 PJL36080U41A 73
PGL36025CU44A 74 PGL36080U43A 73 PJA36040CU44A 76 PJA36120U63AE1 75 PJL36080U63AE1 73
PGL36025CU63AE1 PGL36080U44A 73 PJA36040CU63AE1 PJA36120U64AE1 75 PJL36080U64AE1 73
74 PGL36080U63AE1 73 76 PJA36120U73AE1 75 PJL36080U73AE1 73
PGL36025CU64AE1 PGL36080U64AE1 73 PJA36040CU64AE1 PJA36120U74AE1 75 PJL36080U74AE1 73
74 PGL36080U73AE1 73 76 PJL36000S10 78 PJL36100 73
PGL36025CU73AE1 PGL36080U74AE1 73 PJA36040CU73AE1 PJL36000S12 78 PJL36100CU31A 74
74 PGL36100 73 76 PJL36000S60 78 PJL36100CU33A 74
PGL36025CU74AE1 PGL36100CU31A 74 PJA36040CU74AE1 PJL36000S80 78 PJL36100CU41A 74
74 PGL36100CU33A 74 76 PJL36025CU31A 74 PJL36100CU43A 74
PGL36025U31A 73 PGL36100CU41A 74 PJA36040U31A 75 PJL36025CU33A 74 PJL36100CU44A 74
PGL36025U33A 73 PGL36100CU43A 74 PJA36040U33A 75 PJL36025CU41A 74 PJL36100CU63AE1 74
PGL36025U41A 73 PGL36100CU44A 74 PJA36040U41A 75 PJL36025CU43A 74 PJL36100CU64AE1 74
PGL36025U43A 73 PGL36100CU63AE1 PJA36040U43A 75 PJL36025CU44A 74 PJL36100CU73AE1 74
PGL36025U44A 73 74 PJA36040U44A 75 PJL36025CU63AE1 74 PJL36100CU74AE1 74
PGL36025U63AE1 73 PGL36100CU64AE1 PJA36040U63AE1 75 PJL36025CU64AE1 74 PJL36100M69 79
PGL36025U64AE1 73 74 PJA36040U64AE1 75 PJL36025CU73AE1 74 PJL36100U31A 73
PGL36025U73AE1 73 PGL36100CU73AE1 PJA36040U73AE1 75 PJL36025CU74AE1 74 PJL36100U33A 73
PGL36025U74AE1 73 74 PJA36040U74AE1 75 PJL36025U31A 73 PJL36100U41A 73
PGL36040CU31A 74 PGL36100CU74AE1 PJA36060 75 PJL36025U33A 73 PJL36100U43A 73
PGL36040CU33A 74 74 PJA36060CU31A 76 PJL36025U41A 73 PJL36100U44A 73
PGL36040CU41A 74 PGL36100U31A 73 PJA36060CU33A 76 PJL36025U43A 73 PJL36100U63AE1 73
PGL36040CU43A 74 PGL36100U33A 73 PJA36060CU41A 76 PJL36025U44A 73 PJL36100U64AE1 73
PGL36040CU44A 74 PGL36100U41A 73 PJA36060CU43A 76 PJL36025U63AE1 73 PJL36100U73AE1 73
PGL36040CU63AE1 PGL36100U43A 73 PJA36060CU44A 76 PJL36025U64AE1 73 PJL36100U74AE1 73
74 PGL36100U44A 73 PJA36060CU63AE1 PJL36025U73AE1 73 PJL36120 73
PGL36040CU64AE1 PGL36100U63AE1 73 76 PJL36025U74AE1 73 PJL36120CU31A 74
74 PGL36100U64AE1 73 PJA36060CU64AE1 PJL36040CU31A 74 PJL36120CU33A 74
PGL36040CU73AE1 PGL36100U73AE1 73 76 PJL36040CU33A 74 PJL36120CU41A 74
74 PGL36100U74AE1 73 PJA36060CU73AE1 PJL36040CU41A 74 PJL36120CU43A 74
PGL36040CU74AE1 PGL36120 73 76 PJL36040CU43A 74 PJL36120CU44A 74
74 PGL36120CU31A 74 PJA36060CU74AE1 PJL36040CU44A 74 PJL36120CU63AE1 74
PGL36040U31A 73 PGL36120CU33A 74 76 PJL36040CU63AE1 74 PJL36120CU64AE1 74
PGL36040U33A 73 PGL36120CU41A 74 PJA36060U31A 75 PJL36040CU64AE1 74 PJL36120CU73AE1 74
PGL36040U41A 73 PGL36120CU43A 74 PJA36060U33A 75 PJL36040CU73AE1 74 PJL36120CU74AE1 74
PGL36040U43A 73 PGL36120CU44A 74 PJA36060U41A 75 PJL36040CU74AE1 74 PJL36120M70 79
PGL36040U44A 73 PGL36120CU63AE1 PJA36060U43A 75 PJL36040U31A 73 PJL36120U31A 73
PGL36040U63AE1 73 74 PJA36060U44A 75 PJL36040U33A 73 PJL36120U33A 73
PGL36040U64AE1 73 PGL36120CU64AE1 PJA36060U63AE1 75 PJL36040U41A 73 PJL36120U41A 73
PGL36040U73AE1 73 74 PJA36060U64AE1 75 PJL36040U43A 73 PJL36120U43A 73
PGL36040U74AE1 73 PGL36120CU73AE1 PJA36060U73AE1 75 PJL36040U44A 73 PJL36120U44A 73
PGL36060 73 74 PJA36060U74AE1 75 PJL36040U63AE1 73 PJL36120U63AE1 73
PGL36060CU31A 74 PGL36120CU74AE1 PJA36080 75 PJL36040U64AE1 73 PJL36120U64AE1 73
PGL36060CU33A 74 74 PJA36080CU31A 76 PJL36040U73AE1 73 PJL36120U73AE1 73
PGL36060CU41A 74 PGL36120U31A 73 PJA36080CU33A 76 PJL36040U74AE1 73 PJL36120U74AE1 73
PGL36060CU43A 74 PGL36120U33A 73 PJA36080CU41A 76 PJL36060 73 PKA36025CU31A 76
PGL36060CU44A 74 PGL36120U41A 73 PJA36080CU43A 76 PJL36060CU31A 74 PKA36025CU33A 76
PGL36060CU63AE1 PGL36120U43A 73 PJA36080CU44A 76 PJL36060CU33A 74 PKA36025CU41A 76
74 PGL36120U44A 73 PJA36080CU63AE1 PJL36060CU41A 74 PKA36025CU43A 76
PGL36060CU64AE1 PGL36120U63AE1 73 76 PJL36060CU43A 74 PKA36025CU44A 76
74 PGL36120U64AE1 73 PJA36080CU64AE1 PJL36060CU44A 74 PKA36025CU63AE1
PGL36060CU73AE1 PGL36120U73AE1 73 76 PJL36060CU63AE1 74 76
74 PGL36120U74AE1 73 PJA36080CU73AE1 PJL36060CU64AE1 74 PKA36025CU64AE1
PGL36060CU74AE1 PHLE36125U33RN 76 PJL36060CU73AE1 74 76
74 94 PJA36080CU74AE1 PJL36060CU74AE1 74 PKA36025CU73AE1
PGL36060U31A 73 PJA36025CU31A 76 76 PJL36060M68 79 76
186
All Rights Reserved
™
PKA36025CU74AE1 ........76 PKA36120U43A ...............75 PKL36080U63AE1 .............73 PLA34060CU33A ............ 76 PLL34040CU41A ............ 74
PKA36025U31A ...............75 PKA36120U44A ...............75 PKL36080U64AE1 .............73 PLA34060CU41A ............ 76 PLL34040CU43A ............ 74
PKA36025U33A ...............75 PKA36120U63AE1 ........... 75 PKL36080U73AE1 .............73 PLA34060CU43A ............ 76 PLL34040CU44A ............ 74
PKA36025U41A ...............75 PKA36120U64AE1 ........... 75 PKL36080U74AE1 .............73 PLA34060CU44A ............ 76 PLL34040CU63AE1 ...........74
PKA36025U43A ...............75 PKA36120U73AE1 ........... 75 PKL36100 ........................73 PLA34060CU63AE1 ....... 76 PLL34040CU64AE1 ...........74
PKA36025U44A ...............75 PKA36120U74AE1 ........... 75 PKL36100CU31A .............74 PLA34060CU64AE1 ....... 76 PLL34040CU73AE1 ..........74
PKA36025U63AE1 ............ 75 PKL36000S10 ..................78 PKL36100CU33A .............74 PLA34060CU73AE1 ....... 76 PLL34040CU74AE1 ..........74
PKA36025U64AE1 ............ 75 PKL36000S12 ..................78 PKL36100CU41A .............74 PLA34060CU74AE1 ....... 76 PLL34040U31A ............... 73
PKA36025U73AE1 ............ 75 PKL36000S60 ..................78 PKL36100CU43A .............74 PLA34060U31A .............. 75 PLL34040U33A ............... 73
PKA36025U74AE1 ............ 75 PKL36000S80 ..................78 PKL36100CU44A .............74 PLA34060U33A .............. 75 PLL34040U41A ............... 73
PKA36040CU31A ............76 PKL36025CU31A .............74 PKL36100CU63AE1 ..........74 PLA34060U41A .............. 75 PLL34040U43A ............... 73
PKA36040CU41A ............76 PKL36025CU41A .............74 PKL36100CU73AE1 ..........74 PLA34060U44A .............. 75 PLL34040U63AE1 .............73
PKA36040CU43A ............76 PKL36025CU43A .............74 PKL36100CU74AE1 ..........74 PLA34060U63AE1 .............75 PLL34040U64AE1 .............73
PKA36040CU44A ............76 PKL36025CU44A .............74 PKL36100U31A ...............73 PLA34060U64AE1 .............75 PLL34040U73AE1 .............73
PKA36040CU63AE1 ........76 PKL36025CU63AE1 ......... 74 PKL36100U33A ...............73 PLA34060U73AE1 .............75 PLL34040U74AE1 .............73
PKA36040CU64AE1 ........76 PKL36025CU64AE1 ......... 74 PKL36100U41A ...............73 PLA34060U74AE1 .............75 PLL34060 ........................ 73
PKA36040CU73AE1 ........76 PKL36025CU73AE1 ......... 74 PKL36100U43A ...............73 PLA34080 ....................... 75 PLL34060CU31A ............ 74
PKA36040CU74AE1 ........76 PKL36025CU74AE1 ......... 74 PKL36100U44A ...............73 PLA34080CU31A ............ 76 PLL34060CU33A ............ 74
PKA36040U31A ...............75 PKL36025U31A ...............73 PKL36100U63AE1 .............73 PLA34080CU33A ............ 76 PLL34060CU41A ............ 74
PKA36040U43A ...............75 PKL36025U43A ...............73 PKL36100U74AE1 .............73 PLA34080CU44A ............ 76 PLL34060CU63AE1 ...........74
PKA36040U44A ...............75 PKL36025U44A ...............73 PKL36120 ........................73 PLA34080CU63AE1 ....... 76 PLL34060CU64AE1 ...........74
PKA36040U63AE1 ............ 75 PKL36025U63AE1 ............ 73 PKL36120CU31A .............74 PLA34080CU64AE1 ....... 76 PLL34060CU73AE1 ..........74
PKA36040U64AE1 ............ 75 PKL36025U64AE1 ............ 73 PKL36120CU33A .............74 PLA34080CU73AE1 ....... 76 PLL34060CU74AE1 ..........74
PKA36040U73AE1 ............ 75 PKL36025U73AE1 ............ 73 PKL36120CU41A .............74 PLA34080CU74AE1 ....... 76 PLL34060M68 ................. 79
PKA36040U74AE1 ............ 75 PKL36025U74AE1 ............ 73 PKL36120CU43A .............74 PLA34080U31A .............. 75 PLL34060U31A ............... 73
PKA36060 ........................75 PKL36040CU31A .............74 PKL36120CU44A .............74 PLA34080U33A .............. 75 PLL34060U33A ............... 73
PKA36060CU43A ............76 PKL36040CU44A .............74 PKL36120CU74AE1 ..........74 PLA34080U63AE1 .............75 PLL34060U63AE1 .............73
PKA36060CU44A ............76 PKL36040CU63AE1 ......... 74 PKL36120U31A ...............73 PLA34080U64AE1 .............75 PLL34060U64AE1 .............73
PKA36060CU73AE1 ........76 PKL36040CU74AE1 ......... 74 PKL36120U43A ...............73 PLA34100 ....................... 75 PLL34080 ........................ 73
PKA36060CU74AE1 ........76 PKL36040U31A ...............73 PKL36120U44A ...............73 PLA34100U31A .............. 75 PLL34080CU31A ............ 74
PKA36060U31A ...............75 PKL36040U33A ...............73 PKL36120U63AE1 .............73 PLA34100U33A .............. 75 PLL34080CU33A ............ 74
PKA36060U44A ...............75 PKL36040U63AE1 ............ 73 PLA34025CU31A .............76 PLA34100U63AE1 .............75 PLL34080CU63AE1 ...........74
PKA36060U63AE1 ............ 75 PKL36040U64AE1 ............ 73 PLA34025CU33A .............76 PLA34100U64AE1 .............75 PLL34080CU64AE1 ...........74
PKA36060U64AE1 ............ 75 PKL36040U73AE1 ............ 73 PLA34025CU41A .............76 PLA34100U73AE1 .............75 PLL34080CU73AE1 ..........74
PKA36060U73AE1 ............ 75 PKL36040U74AE1 ............ 73 PLA34025CU43A .............76 PLA34100U74AE1 .............75 PLL34080CU74AE1 ..........74
PKA36060U74AE1 ............ 75 PKL36060 ........................73 PLA34025CU44A .............76 PLA34120 ....................... 75 PLL34080M68 ................. 79
PKA36080 ........................75 PKL36060CU31A .............74 PLA34025CU63AE1 ........76 PLA34120U31A .............. 75 PLL34080U31A ............... 73
PKA36080CU31A ............76 PKL36060CU33A .............74 PLA34025CU64AE1 ........76 PLA34120U33A .............. 75 PLL34080U33A ............... 73
PKA36080CU43A ............76 PKL36060CU44A .............74 PLA34025U31A ...............75 PLA34120U44A .............. 75 PLL34080U44A ............... 73
PKA36080CU44A ............76 PKL36060CU63AE1 ......... 74 PLA34025U33A ...............75 PLA34120U63AE1 .............75 PLL34080U63AE1 .............73
PKA36080CU63AE1 ........76 PKL36060CU64AE1 ......... 74 PLA34025U41A ...............75 PLA34120U64AE1 .............75 PLL34080U64AE1 .............73
PKA36080CU74AE1 ........76 PKL36060U31A ...............73 PLA34025U63AE1 .............75 PLL34000S10 ................. 78 PLL34100 ........................ 73
PKA36080U31A ...............75 PKL36060U33A ...............73 PLA34025U64AE1 .............75 PLL34000S12 ................. 78 PLL34100CU31A ............ 74
PKA36080U43A ...............75 PKL36060U44A ...............73 PLA34040CU31A .............76 PLL34025CU31A ............ 74 PLL34100CU43A ............ 74
PKA36080U44A ...............75 PKL36060U63AE1 ............ 73 PLA34040CU33A .............76 PLL34025CU33A ............ 74 PLL34100CU44A ............ 74
PKA36080U63AE1 ............ 75 PKL36060U64AE1 ............ 73 PLA34040CU41A .............76 PLL34025CU41A ............ 74 PLL34100CU63AE1 ...........74
PKA36080U64AE1 ............ 75 PKL36060U73AE1 ............ 73 PLA34040CU43A .............76 PLL34025CU43A ............ 74 PLL34100CU64AE1 ...........74
PKA36080U73AE1 ............ 75 PKL36060U74AE1 ............ 73 PLA34040CU44A .............76 PLL34025CU44A ............ 74 PLL34100CU73AE1 ..........74
PKA36080U74AE1 ............ 75 PKL36080 ........................73 PLA34040CU63AE1 ........76 PLL34025CU63AE1 ...........74 PLL34100CU74AE1 ..........74
PKA36100 ........................75 PKL36080CU31A .............74 PLA34040CU64AE1 ........76 PLL34025CU64AE1 ...........74 PLL34100M69 ................. 79
PKA36100U31A ...............75 PKL36080CU33A .............74 PLA34040CU73AE1 ........76 PLL34025CU73AE1 ..........74 PLL34100U31A ............... 73
PKA36100U33A ...............75 PKL36080CU41A .............74 PLA34040CU74AE1 ........76 PLL34025CU74AE1 ..........74 PLL34100U33A ............... 73
PKA36100U41A ...............75 PKL36080CU43A .............74 PLA34040U31A ...............75 PLL34025U31A ............... 73 PLL34100U41A ............... 73
PKA36100U43A ...............75 PKL36080CU44A .............74 PLA34040U33A ...............75 PLL34025U33A ............... 73 PLL34100U43A ............... 73
PKA36100U44A ...............75 PKL36080CU63AE1 ......... 74 PLA34040U41A ...............75 PLL34025U41A ............... 73 PLL34100U44A ............... 73
PKA36100U63AE1 ............ 75 PKL36080CU64AE1 ......... 74 PLA34040U43A ...............75 PLL34025U43A ............... 73 PLL34100U63AE1 .............73
PKA36100U64AE1 ............ 75 PKL36080CU73AE1 ......... 74 PLA34040U44A ...............75 PLL34025U44A ............... 73 PLL34100U64AE1 .............73
PKA36100U73AE1 ............ 75 PKL36080CU74AE1 ......... 74 PLA34040U63AE1 .............75 PLL34025U63AE1 .............73 PLL34100U73AE1 .............73
PKA36100U74AE1 ............ 75 PKL36080U31A ...............73 PLA34040U64AE1 .............75 PLL34025U64AE1 .............73 PLL34100U74AE1 .............73
PKA36120 ........................75 PKL36080U33A ...............73 PLA34040U73AE1 .............75 PLL34025U73AE1 .............73 PLL34120 ........................ 73
PKA36120U31A ...............75 PKL36080U41A ...............73 PLA34040U74AE1 .............75 PLL34025U74AE1 .............73 PLL34120CU31A ............ 74
PKA36120U33A ...............75 PKL36080U43A ...............73 PLA34060 ........................75 PLL34040CU31A ............ 74 PLL34120CU33A ............ 74
PKA36120U41A ...............75 PKL36080U44A ...............73 PLA34060CU31A .............76 PLL34040CU33A ............ 74 PLL34120CU41A ............ 74
187
All Rights Reserved
™
PLL34120CU43A 74 86 RGF36200 85 88 RJF36120 84

PLL34120CU44A 74 RGF36080CU74AE1 RGF36200CU31A 87 RJA36120CU31A 88 RJF36120CU31A 86
PLL34120CU63AE1 74 86 RGF36200CU33A 87 RJA36120CU33A 88 RJF36120CU33A 86
PLL34120CU64AE1 74 RGF36080U31A 84 RGF36200CU41A 87 RJA36120CU41A 88 RJF36120CU41A 86
PLL34120CU73AE1 RGF36080U33A 84 RGF36200CU43A 87 RJA36120CU43A 88 RJF36120CU43A 86
74 RGF36080U41A 84 RGF36200CU44A 87 RJA36120CU44A 88 RJF36120CU44A 86
PLL34120CU74AE1 RGF36080U43A 84 RGF36200CU63AE1 RJA36120CU63AE1 RJF36120CU63AE1
74 RGF36080U44A 84 87 88 86
PLL34120M70 79 RGF36080U63AE1 84 RGF36200CU64AE1 RJA36120CU64AE1 RJF36120CU64AE1
PLL34120U31A 73 RGF36080U64AE1 84 87 88 86
PLL34120U33A 73 RGF36080U73AE1 84 RGF36200CU73AE1 RJA36120CU73AE1 RJF36120CU73AE1
PLL34120U41A 73 RGF36080U74AE1 84 87 88 86
PLL34120U43A 73 RGF36100CU31A 86 RGF36200CU74AE1 RJA36120CU74AE1 RJF36120CU74AE1
PLL34120U44A 73 RGF36100CU33A 86 87 88 86
PLL34120U63AE1 73 RGF36100CU41A 86 RGF36200U31A 85 RJF36060CU31A 86 RJF36120U31A 84
PLL34120U74AE1 73 RGF36100CU63AE1 RGF36200U43A 85 RJF36060CU43A 86 RJF36120U43A 84
RD10 117 86 RGF36200U44A 85 RJF36060CU44A 86 RJF36120U44A 84
RD16 117 RGF36100CU64AE1 RGF36200U63AE1 85 RJF36060CU63AE1 RJF36120U63AE1 84
RE10 117 86 RGF36200U64AE1 85 86 RJF36120U64AE1 84
RE16 117 RGF36100CU73AE1 RGF36200U73AE1 85 RJF36060CU64AE1 RJF36120U73AE1 84
RGA36100CU31A 88 86 RGF36200U74AE1 85 86 RJF36120U74AE1 84
RGA36100CU33A 88 RGF36100CU74AE1 RGF36250 85 RJF36060CU73AE1 RJF36160 85
RGA36100CU41A 88 86 RGF36250CU31A 87 86 RJF36160CU31A 87
RGA36100CU43A 88 RGF36100U31A 84 RGF36250CU33A 87 RJF36060CU74AE1 RJF36160CU33A 87
RGA36100CU44A 88 RGF36100U33A 84 RGF36250CU41A 87 86 RJF36160CU41A 87
RGA36100CU63AE1 RGF36100U41A 84 RGF36250CU43A 87 RJF36060U31A 84 RJF36160CU43A 87
88 RGF36100U43A 84 RGF36250CU44A 87 RJF36060U33A 84 RJF36160CU44A 87
RGA36100CU64AE1 RGF36100U44A 84 RGF36250CU63AE1 RJF36060U41A 84 RJF36160CU63AE1
88 RGF36100U63AE1 84 87 RJF36060U43A 84 87
RGA36100CU73AE1 RGF36100U64AE1 84 RGF36250CU64AE1 RJF36060U44A 84 RJF36160CU64AE1
88 RGF36100U73AE1 84 87 RJF36060U63AE1 84 87
RGA36100CU74AE1 RGF36100U74AE1 84 RGF36250CU73AE1 RJF36060U64AE1 84 RJF36160CU73AE1
88 RGF36120 84 87 RJF36060U73AE1 84 87
RGA36120CU31A 88 RGF36120CU31A 86 RGF36250CU74AE1 RJF36060U74AE1 84 RJF36160CU74AE1
RGA36120CU33A 88 RGF36120CU33A 86 87 RJF36080CU31A 86 87
RGA36120CU41A 88 RGF36120CU41A 86 RGF36250U31A 85 RJF36080CU33A 86 RJF36160U31A 85
RGA36120CU63AE1 RGF36120CU63AE1 RGF36250U43A 85 RJF36080CU44A 86 RJF36160U43A 85
88 86 RGF36250U44A 85 RJF36080CU63AE1 RJF36160U44A 85
RGA36120CU64AE1 RGF36120CU64AE1 RGF36250U63AE1 85 86 RJF36160U63AE1 85
88 86 RGF36250U64AE1 85 RJF36080CU64AE1 RJF36160U64AE1 85
RGA36120CU73AE1 RGF36120CU73AE1 RGF36250U73AE1 85 86 RJF36160U73AE1 85
88 86 RGF36250U74AE1 85 RJF36080CU73AE1 RJF36160U74AE1 85
RGA36120CU74AE1 RGF36120CU74AE1 RGF36300CU31A 87 86 RJF36200 85
88 86 RGF36300CU33A 87 RJF36080CU74AE1 RJF36200CU31A 87
RGF36060CU31A 86 RGF36120U31A 84 RGF36300CU41A 87 86 RJF36200CU33A 87
RGF36060CU33A 86 RGF36120U33A 84 RGF36300CU43A 87 RJF36080U31A 84 RJF36200CU41A 87
RGF36060CU41A 86 RGF36120U41A 84 RGF36300CU44A 87 RJF36080U33A 84 RJF36200CU43A 87
RGF36060CU43A 86 RGF36120U43A 84 RGF36300CU63AE1 RJF36080U41A 84 RJF36200CU44A 87
RGF36060CU44A 86 RGF36120U44A 84 87 RJF36080U43A 84 RJF36200CU63AE1
RGF36060CU63AE1 RGF36120U63AE1 84 RGF36300CU64AE1 RJF36080U44A 84 87
86 RGF36120U64AE1 84 87 RJF36080U63AE1 84 RJF36200CU64AE1
RGF36060CU64AE1 RGF36120U73AE1 84 RGF36300CU73AE1 RJF36080U64AE1 84 87
RGF36060CU73AE1 RGF36160 85 RGF36300CU74AE1 RJF36080U74AE1 84 87
86 RGF36160CU31A 87 87 RJF36100CU31A 86 RJF36200CU74AE1
RGF36060CU74AE1 RGF36160CU33A 87 RGF36300U31A 85 RJF36100CU33A 86 87
86 RGF36160CU41A 87 RGF36300U33A 85 RJF36100CU41A 86 RJF36200U31A 85
RGF36060U31A 84 RGF36160CU43A 87 RGF36300U41A 85 RJF36100CU43A 86 RJF36200U33A 85
RGF36060U33A 84 RGF36160CU44A 87 RGF36300U43A 85 RJF36100CU44A 86 RJF36200U41A 85
RGF36060U41A 84 RGF36160CU63AE1 RGF36300U44A 85 RJF36100CU63AE1 RJF36200U43A 85
RGF36060U43A 84 87 RGF36300U63AE1 85 86 RJF36200U44A 85
RGF36060U44A 84 RGF36160CU64AE1 RGF36300U64AE1 85 RJF36100CU64AE1 RJF36200U63AE1 85
RGF36060U63AE1 84 87 RGF36300U73AE1 85 86 RJF36200U64AE1 85
RGF36060U64AE1 84 RGF36160CU73AE1 RGF36300U74AE1 85 RJF36100CU73AE1 RJF36200U74AE1 85
RGF36060U73AE1 84 87 RJA36100CU31A 88 86 RJF36250 85
RGF36060U74AE1 84 RGF36160CU74AE1 RJA36100CU33A 88 RJF36100CU74AE1 RJF36250CU31A 87
RGF36080CU31A 86 87 RJA36100CU41A 88 86 RJF36250CU33A 87
RGF36080CU33A 86 RGF36160U31A 85 RJA36100CU43A 88 RJF36100U31A 84 RJF36250CU41A 87
RGF36080CU41A 86 RGF36160U33A 85 RJA36100CU44A 88 RJF36100U33A 84 RJF36250CU43A 87
RGF36080CU43A 86 RGF36160U41A 85 RJA36100CU63AE1 RJF36100U41A 84 RJF36250CU44A 87
RGF36080CU44A 86 RGF36160U43A 85 88 RJF36100U43A 84 RJF36250CU63AE1
RGF36080CU63AE1 RGF36160U44A 85 RJA36100CU64AE1 RJF36100U44A 84 87
RGF36080CU64AE1 RGF36160U64AE1 85 RJA36100CU73AE1 RJF36100U64AE1 84 87
RGF36080CU73AE1 RGF36160U74AE1 85 RJA36100CU74AE1 RJF36100U74AE1 84 87
188
All Rights Reserved
™
RJF36250CU74AE1 .......... 87 RKF36080U33A ................ 84 RKF36200U64AE1 .............85 RLF36060U44A ..................84 RLF36200CU31A ...............87
RJF36250U31A ................. 85 RKF36080U41A ................ 84 RKF36200U74AE1 .............85 RLF36060U63AE1 .............84 RLF36200CU33A ...............87
RJF36250U33A ................. 85 RKF36080U43A ................ 84 RKF36250 ...........................85 RLF36060U64AE1 .............84 RLF36200CU41A ...............87
RJF36250U41A ................. 85 RKF36080U44A ................ 84 RKF36250CU31A ...............87 RLF36060U73AE1 .............84 RLF36200CU43A ...............87
RJF36250U43A ................. 85 RKF36080U63AE1 ............ 84 RKF36250CU33A ...............87 RLF36060U74AE1 .............84 RLF36200CU44A ...............87
RJF36250U44A ................. 85 RKF36080U64AE1 ............ 84 RKF36250CU41A ...............87 RLF36080CU31A ...............86 RLF36200CU63AE1 ..........87
RJF36250U63AE1 ............ 85 RKF36080U73AE1 ............ 84 RKF36250CU43A ...............87 RLF36080CU33A ...............86 RLF36200CU64AE1 ..........87
RJF36250U73AE1 ............ 85 RKF36100CU31A .............. 86 RKF36250CU63AE1 ..........87 RLF36080CU43A ...............86 RLF36200CU74AE1 ..........87
RJF36250U74AE1 ............ 85 RKF36100CU33A .............. 86 RKF36250CU64AE1 ..........87 RLF36080CU44A ...............86 RLF36200U31A ..................85
RJF36300CU31A .............. 87 RKF36100CU41A .............. 86 RKF36250CU73AE1 ..........87 RLF36080CU63AE1 ..........86 RLF36200U33A ..................85
RJF36300CU33A .............. 87 RKF36100CU43A .............. 86 RKF36250CU74AE1 ..........87 RLF36080CU64AE1 ..........86 RLF36200U41A ..................85
RJF36300CU41A .............. 87 RKF36100CU44A .............. 86 RKF36250U31A .................85 RLF36080CU73AE1 ..........86 RLF36200U43A ..................85
RJF36300CU43A .............. 87 RKF36100CU63AE1 ......... 86 RKF36250U33A .................85 RLF36080CU74AE1 ..........86 RLF36200U44A ..................85
RJF36300CU44A .............. 87 RKF36100CU64AE1 ......... 86 RKF36250U41A .................85 RLF36080U31A ..................84 RLF36200U63AE1 .............85
RJF36300CU63AE1 .......... 87 RKF36100CU73AE1 ......... 86 RKF36250U43A .................85 RLF36080U33A ..................84 RLF36200U64AE1 .............85
RJF36300CU64AE1 .......... 87 RKF36100CU74AE1 ......... 86 RKF36250U44A .................85 RLF36080U41A ..................84 RLF36200U64AE1 .............85
RJF36300CU73AE1 .......... 87 RKF36100U31A ................ 84 RKF36250U63AE1 .............85 RLF36080U43A ..................84 RLF36200U73AE1 .............85
RJF36300CU74AE1 .......... 87 RKF36100U33A ................ 84 RKF36250U64AE1 .............85 RLF36080U44A ..................84 RLF36200U74AE1 .............85
RJF36300U31A ................. 85 RKF36100U41A ................ 84 RKF36250U73AE1 .............85 RLF36080U63AE1 .............84 RLF36250 ...........................85
RJF36300U33A ................. 85 RKF36100U43A ................ 84 RKF36250U74AE1 .............85 RLF36080U64AE1 .............84 RLF36250CU31A ...............87
RJF36300U41A ................. 85 RKF36100U44A ................ 84 RKF36300CU31A ...............87 RLF36080U73AE1 .............84 RLF36250CU33A ...............87
RJF36300U43A ................. 85 RKF36100U63AE1 ............ 84 RKF36300CU33A ...............87 RLF36080U74AE1 .............84 RLF36250CU41A ...............87
RJF36300U44A ................. 85 RKF36100U64AE1 ............ 84 RKF36300CU41A ...............87 RLF36100CU31A ...............86 RLF36250CU43A ...............87
RJF36300U63AE1 ............ 85 RKF36100U73AE1 ............ 84 RKF36300CU43A ...............87 RLF36100CU33A ...............86 RLF36250CU44A ...............87
RJF36300U73AE1 ............ 85 RKF36120 ........................84 RKF36300CU63AE1 ..........87 RLF36100CU43A ...............86 RLF36250CU64AE1 ..........87
RJF36300U74AE1 ............ 85 RKF36120CU31A .............. 86 RKF36300CU64AE1 ..........87 RLF36100CU44A ...............86 RLF36250CU73AE1 ..........87
RJF363200U73AE1 .......... 85 RKF36120CU33A .............. 86 RKF36300CU73AE1 ..........87 RLF36100CU63AE1 ..........86 RLF36250CU74AE1 ..........87
RKA36100CU31A ............88 RKF36120CU41A .............. 86 RKF36300CU74AE1 ..........87 RLF36100CU64AE1 ..........86 RLF36250U31A ..................85
RKA36100CU33A ............88 RKF36120CU43A .............. 86 RKF36300U31A .................85 RLF36100CU73AE1 ..........86 RLF36250U33A ..................85
RKA36100CU41A ............88 RKF36120CU44A .............. 86 RKF36300U33A .................85 RLF36100CU74AE1 ..........86 RLF36250U41A ..................85
RKA36100CU43A ............88 RKF36120CU63AE1 ......... 86 RKF36300U41A .................85 RLF36100U31A ..................84 RLF36250U43A ..................85
RKA36100CU44A ............88 RKF36120CU64AE1 ......... 86 RKF36300U43A .................85 RLF36100U33A ..................84 RLF36250U44A ..................85
RKA36100CU63AE1 .......88 RKF36120CU73AE1 ......... 86 RKF36300U44A .................85 RLF36100U41A ..................84 RLF36250U63AE1 .............85
RKA36100CU64AE1 .......88 RKF36120CU74AE1 ......... 86 RKF36300U63AE1 .............85 RLF36100U43A ..................84 RLF36250U64AE1 .............85
RKA36100CU73AE1 .......88 RKF36120U31A ................ 84 RKF36300U64AE1 .............85 RLF36100U44A ..................84 RLF36250U73AE1 .............85
RKA36100CU74AE1 .......88 RKF36120U33A ................ 84 RKF36300U73AE1 .............85 RLF36100U63AE1 .............84 RLF36250U74AE1 .............85
RKA36120CU31A ............88 RKF36120U41A ................ 84 RKF36300U74AE1 .............85 RLF36100U64AE1 .............84 RLF36300CU31A ...............87
RKA36120CU33A ............88 RKF36120U43A ................ 84 RKF363200U73AE1 ...........85 RLF36100U73AE1 .............84 RLF36300CU33A ...............87
RKA36120CU41A ............88 RKF36120U44A ................ 84 RL3TB ..............................90 RLF36100U74AE1 .............84 RLF36300CU41A ...............87
RKA36120CU43A ............88 RKF36120U63AE1 ............ 84 RL3TB1 ............................90 RLF36120 ....................... 84 RLF36300CU43A ...............87
RKA36120CU44A ............88 RKF36120U64AE1 ............ 84 RL3TB4 ............................90 RLF36120CU31A ...............86 RLF36300CU44A ...............87
RKA36120CU63AE1 .......88 RKF36120U73AE1 ............ 84 RL3TB4 ............................90 RLF36120CU33A ...............86 RLF36300CU63AE1 ..........87
RKA36120CU64AE1 .......88 RKF36120U74AE1 ............ 84 RLA36100CU31A ............88 RLF36120CU41A ...............86 RLF36300CU64AE1 ..........87
RKA36120CU73AE1 .......88 RKF36160 .......................... 85 RLA36100CU33A ............88 RLF36120CU43A ...............86 RLF36300CU73AE1 ..........87
RKA36120CU74AE1 .......88 RKF36160CU31A .............. 87 RLA36100CU41A ............88 RLF36120CU44A ...............86 RLF36300CU74AE1 ..........87
RKF36000S12 .................89 RKF36160CU33A .............. 87 RLA36100CU43A ............88 RLF36120CU63AE1 ..........86 RLF36300U31A ..................85
RKF36000S16 .................89 RKF36160CU41A .............. 87 RLA36100CU44A ............88 RLF36120CU64AE1 ..........86 RLF36300U33A ..................85
RKF36000S20 .................89 RKF36160CU43A .............. 87 RLA36100CU63AE1 ........88 RLF36120CU73AE1 ..........86 RLF36300U41A ..................85
RKF36000S25 .................89 RKF36160CU44A .............. 87 RLA36100CU64AE1 ........88 RLF36120CU74AE1 ..........86 RLF36300U43A ..................85
RKF36000S30 .................89 RKF36160CU63AE1 ......... 87 RLA36100CU73AE1 ........88 RLF36120U31A ..................84 RLF36300U44A ..................85
RKF36060CU31A .............. 86 RKF36160CU64AE1 ......... 87 RLA36100CU74AE1 ........88 RLF36120U33A ..................84 RLF36300U63AE1 .............85
RKF36060CU33A .............. 86 RKF36160CU73AE1 ......... 87 RLA36120CU31A ............88 RLF36120U41A ..................84 RLF36300U73AE1 .............85
RKF36060CU41A .............. 86 RKF36160CU74AE1 ......... 87 RLA36120CU33A ............88 RLF36120U43A ..................84 RLF36300U74AE1 .............85
RKF36060CU43A .............. 86 RKF36160U31A ................ 85 RLA36120CU41A ............88 RLF36120U44A ..................84 RLTB ............................... 90
RKF36060CU44A .............. 86 RKF36160U33A ................ 85 RLA36120CU43A ............88 RLF36120U63AE1 .............84 RLTB ............................... 90
RKF36060CU63AE1 ......... 86 RKF36160U41A ................ 85 RLA36120CU44A ............88 RLF36120U64AE1 .............84 RLTB1 ............................. 90
RKF36060CU64AE1 ......... 86 RKF36160U43A ................ 85 RLA36120CU63AE1 ........88 RLF36120U73AE1 .............84 RLTB4 ............................. 90
RKF36060CU73AE1 ......... 86 RKF36160U44A ................ 85 RLA36120CU64AE1 ........88 RLF36120U74AE1 .............84 RLTB4 ............................. 90
RKF36060CU74AE1 ......... 86 RKF36160U63AE1 ............ 85 RLA36120CU73AE1 ........88 RLF36160 ...........................85 RLTB4 ............................. 90
RKF36060U31A ................ 84 RKF36160U64AE1 ............ 85 RLA36120CU74AE1 ........88 RLF36160CU31A ...............87 RLTBE ............................. 97
RKF36060U33A ................ 84 RKF36160U73AE1 ............ 85 RLF36000S12 ..................89 RLF36160CU33A ...............87 RLTBE4 ........................... 97
RKF36060U41A ................ 84 RKF36160U74AE1 ............ 85 RLF36000S16 ..................89 RLF36160CU41A ...............87 S131A ........................... 106
RKF36060U43A ................ 84 RKF36200 .......................... 85 RLF36000S20 ..................89 RLF36160CU43A ...............87 S132R ........................... 106
RKF36060U44A ................ 84 RKF36200CU31A .............. 87 RLF36000S25 ..................89 RLF36160CU44A ...............87 S133A ........................... 106
RKF36060U63AE1 ............ 84 RKF36200CU33A .............. 87 RLF36000S30 ..................89 RLF36160CU63AE1 ..........87 S141A ........................... 106
RKF36060U64AE1 ............ 84 RKF36200CU41A .............. 87 RLF36060CU31A ...............86 RLF36160CU64AE1 ..........87 S142R ........................... 106
RKF36060U73AE1 ............ 84 RKF36200CU43A .............. 87 RLF36060CU33A ...............86 RLF36160CU73AE1 ..........87 S143A ........................... 106
RKF36060U74AE1 ............ 84 RKF36200CU44A .............. 87 RLF36060CU41A ...............86 RLF36160CU74AE1 ..........87 S144A ........................... 106
RKF36080CU31A .............. 86 RKF36200CU63AE1 ......... 87 RLF36060CU43A ...............86 RLF36160U31A ..................85 S163A ........................... 106
RKF36080CU33A .............. 86 RKF36200CU64AE1 ......... 87 RLF36060CU44A ...............86 RLF36160U33A ..................85 S164A ........................... 106
RKF36080CU41A .............. 86 RKF36200CU73AE1 ......... 87 RLF36060CU63AE1 ..........86 RLF36160U41A ..................85 S173A ........................... 106
RKF36080CU43A .............. 86 RKF36200CU74AE1 ......... 87 RLF36060CU64AE1 ..........86 RLF36160U43A ..................85 S174A ........................... 106
RKF36080CU44A .............. 86 RKF36200U31A ................ 85 RLF36060CU73AE1 ..........86 RLF36160U44A ..................85 S29450 .......................... 104
RKF36080CU63AE1 ......... 86 RKF36200U33A ................ 85 RLF36060CU74AE1 ..........86 RLF36160U63AE1 .............85 S29450 .......................... 104
RKF36080CU64AE1 ......... 86 RKF36200U41A ................ 85 RLF36060U31A ..................84 RLF36160U64AE1 .............85 S29450 .......................... 104
RKF36080U31A ................ 84 RKF36200U63AE1 ............ 85 RLF36060U43A ..................84 RLF36200 ...........................85 S29450 .......................... 104
189
All Rights Reserved
™
S29452 104 S47052 108

S29452 104 S47053 108
S29452 104 S47067 106
S29452 104 S47390 105
S29452 104 S47390 105
S29452 104 S47391 105
S32631 118 S47391 105
S32631 118 S47391 105
S33033 105 S47391 105
S33034 105 S47392 105
S33034 105 S47392 105
S33035 105 S47393 105
S33035 105 S47393 105
S33036 105 S47395 105
S33036 105 S47395 105
S33038 105 S47396 105
S33091 108 S47396 105
S33092 108 S47398 105
S33092 108 S47398 105
S33092 108 S48182 107
S33093 108 S48818 108
S33093 108 S48819 108
S33093 108 S48820 108
S33094 108 S48823 108
S33095 108 S48823 108
S33095 108 S48824 108
S33095 108 S48824 108
S33100 107 S48825 108
S33100 109 S48836 108
S33170 120 S48837 108
S33171 120 S48838 108
S33542 108 S48839 108
S33543 108 S48840 108
S33544 108 S48855 112
S33545 108 S48856 112
S33575 107 S48891 107
S33576 107 S48896 107
S33579 107 S48907 112
S33592 106 S48907 112
S33593 109 S48908 112
S33594 112 S48916 107
S33595 112 S48933 121
S33646 116 S64201 109
S33659 105 S64202 109
S33660 105 S64203 109
S33660 105 S64204 109
S33661 105 S64204 109
S33661 105 S64205 109
S33662 105 S64205 109
S33662 105 S64206 109
S33664 105 S64207 109
S33680 103 S64208 109
S33681 103 S64209 109
S33682 103 S64210 109
S33683 103 S64210 109
S33684 103 S64273 109
S33685 103 YA1200R3 115
S33717 117 YA1200R5 115
S33718 117 YA1200R7 115
S33767 121 YA2500R7 115
S33772 121 YA250P3 115
S33788 121 YA300P5 115
S33857 117 YA400P3 115
S33857 121 YA400P7 115
S33859 121 YA600P5 115
S33875 117 YA800P7 115
S33890 118
S33929 117
S33982 108
S33982 108
S33983 108
S33983 108
S33984 108
S33996 118
S33997 117
S33998 116
S34036 107
S44936 118
S46996 117
S46998 117
190
All Rights Reserved
™
Schneider Electric, Square D, PowerPact, and Micrologic are trademarks and the
property of Schneider Electric SE, its subsidiaries, and affiliated companies. All
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.‘
Schneider Electric USA, Inc. Schneider Electric Canada, Inc. Schneider Electric, Square D, PowerPact et Micrologic sont des marques
800 Federal Street 5985 McLaughlin Road commerciales et la propriété de Schneider Electric SE, ses filiales et compagnies
Andover, MA 01810 USA Mississauga, ON L5R 1B8 Canada affiliées. Toutes les autres marques commerciales sont la propriété de leurs
888-778-2733 800-565-6699 propriétaires respectifs.
www.schneider-electric.us www.schneider-electric.ca 0612CT0101 R01/17 Replaces / Remplace Replaces 0612CT0101 R02/16
01/2017

Powerpact™ M-, P-And R-Frame, and Compact™ Ns630B-Ns3200 Circuit Breakers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powerpact™ M-, P-And R-Frame, and Compact™ Ns630B-Ns3200 Circuit Breakers

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powerpact™ M-, P-And R-Frame, and Compact™ Ns630B-Ns3200 Circuit Breakers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerPact™ M-, P- and R-Frame,

and Compact™ NS630b–NS3200

22: ENERGY MANAGEMENT 22

39: ELECTRONIC TRIP SYSTEMS 39

69: POWERPACT M-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 69

72: POWERPACT P-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 72

83: POWERPACT R-FRAME CIRCUIT BREAKERS 83

92: COMPACT NS630B–NS1600 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 92

97: COMPACT NS1600B–NS3200 CIRCUIT BREAKER 97

119: P-FRAME CRADLES AND CRADLE ACCESSORIES 119

126: CIRCUIT BREAKER DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 126

164: ACCESSORY DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS 164

171: TRIP CURVES 171

185: CATALOG NUMBERS 185

SECTION 1: GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 7

SECTION 2: ENERGY MANAGEMENT .......................................................................... 22

SECTION 3: ELECTRONIC TRIP SYSTEMS ................................................................. 39

Customized Alarm Programming ....................................................................................... 51

SECTION 4: POWERPACT M-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......... 69

SECTION 5: POWERPACT P-FRAME MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ........... 72

SECTION 6: POWERPACT R-FRAME CIRCUIT BREAKERS ...................................... 83

SECTION 7: COMPACT NS630B–NS1600 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................... 92

Interrupting Ratings ....................................................................................................................... 96

SECTION 8: COMPACT NS1600B–NS3200 CIRCUIT BREAKER ................................ 97

SECTION 9: ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................... 99

SECTION 10: P-FRAME CRADLES AND CRADLE ACCESSORIES ........................... 119

SECTION 11: CIRCUIT BREAKER DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ................................. 126

SECTION 12: ACCESSORY DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS ............................................ 164

SECTION 13: TRIP CURVES .......................................................................................... 171

SECTION 14: CATALOG NUMBERS ............................................................................. 185

Section 1—General Information

Features and Benefits

M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 electronic trip circuit breakers:

Codes and Standards

M-Frame, P-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 NS630b–NS3200

Circuit Breaker Ratings

UL/CSA Rating (50/60 Hz) IEC 60947-2 Rating (50/60 Hz)

Table 3: IEC Only Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings (50/60 Hz)

Voltage Withstand Rating at

Ampere Rating (Continuous Current Rating)

Enclosure Dimensions (h x w x d) Ventilation Area

Maximum Ambient Temperature

d6,600 ft. 8,500 ft. 13,000 ft.

Extreme Atmospheric Conditions

PowerPact circuit breakers meet IEC 60068-2-6 Standards for vibration.

Instantaneous OFF Feature

Motor Circuit Protectors

Automatic Molded Case Switches

Table 8: P- and R-Frame Withstand Ratings1

Voltage P-Frame Circuit Breakers R-Frame Circuit Breakers

Internal Operating Mechanism

Manually-Operated Circuit Breakers

Electrically-Operated Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Mounting and Connections

Table 9: Circuit Breaker Mounting and Connections

Unit-Mount Construction I-Line Drawout

Unit-Mount Circuit Breakers

M-Frame Unit-Mount Electrically Operated

I-Line Circuit Breakers